Data Taker

www.dataTaker.
com
dataT aker
...keeping an eye on reality
Users Manual
DeLogger 4 and DeLogger 4 Pro

complete guide to DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro: DeLogger4 for graphical dataTaker setup DeLogger4 Pro for managing a remote network of dataTakers Data visualization SCADA
Users Manual
for
DeLogger 4
and
DeLogger 4 Pro
UM-0070-A0
Software Discbell Limited 1997 All rights reserved Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Discbell Limited. The software (which includes any database supplied therewith) described in the document may be furnished subject to a licence agreement. It is against the law to copy the software except as specically allowed in the licence. The customer, in applying the products and software described herein, accepts that the products are wholly or partly programmable electronic systems that are inherently complex and which cannot thus be guaranteed to be free from errors.
In doing so, the customer accepts the responsibility to ensure that the products are correctly programmed, congured, installed, commissioned, operated and maintained by competent and suitably trained staff and in accordance with any instructions provided or dictated by good engineering practices. The software and products described herein are subject to continuous development and improvement. All information of a technical nature is given by Discbell Limited in good faith, but Discbell Limited shall not be liable for any omissions or errors herein or within the software herein described.
Software Disclaimer Discbell Limited will under no circumstances be responsible for direct, indirect, incidental, or consequential damages, death or personal injury arising from the use or misuse of this documentation or the products and software described herein. Manual dataTaker Pty Ltd 2002
dataTaker is a registered trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd. DeLogger is a trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, FoxPro, Visual Basic and SQL Server are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. Crystal Reports is a registered trademark of Crystal Decisions (Crystal Decisions is a trademark of Seagate Technology LLC). Other brand and product names mentioned in this manual are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
About this Users Manual

DeLogger is graphical host software supplied by
dataTaker Pty Ltd with each DT5/6xx and DT8xx dataTaker data logger. Also supplied is a Getting Started guide, which is a step-by-step tutorial that introduces you to your dataTaker data logger and to DeLogger software. The manual youre reading now the Users Manual for DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro supplements the Getting Started guide. Its a detailed reference to DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro. Unlike the Getting Started manual, whose topics are presented in a logical workow, this Users Manual for DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro presents its information in categories. For example, Chapter 2 covers DeLogger commands, menu-bymenu Chapter 3 covers windows Chapter 4 covers toolbars. Use the table of contents or the index to nd exactly what you want, or browse through the manual to see what DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro can do.
Installing DeLogger Installing DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro is covered in the Getting Started guide supplied with your dataTaker.
If youre using Windows NT, Windows 2000 or Windows XP, see also Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser) beginning on page 235.
Terminology
The term dataTaker is a registered trademark of dataTaker Pty Ltd. In this manual, dataTaker refers to any of our DT50, DT500 or DT600 series of data loggers (DT5/6xx), and to our DT800 data loggers (DT8xx). In this manual, the term DeLogger refers to both DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro.
Pro Only
The Pro symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate commands and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger4 Pro.
UM-0070-A0
Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro
Contents Overview
About this Users Manual ...................... 4 Contents Overview............................ 5 Contents Detailed .............................. 7
CHAPTER 3 WINDOWS
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 The Project Window ......................................136 The Form Window .........................................136 Formula One Workbook Designer ...............138 The Chart Window ........................................139 The Text Window ..........................................144 The Mimic Window .......................................145 The Spreadsheet Window ..............................149 The Spreadsheet Worksheet .......................150 The Spreadsheet Graph Area ....................151 Using the Mouse with Worksheets ...............160 The Analysis Window ...................................161 The Analysis Worksheet ............................162 The Analysis Chart Area ...........................163
PART A Menus, Windows and Toolbars

CHAPTER 1 THE BIG PICTURE
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Main Window (Project Window) ...................... 13 Document Windows ........................................ 14 Viewing and Saving Data ................................ 16 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels ...... 17 DeLoggers Folders.......................................... 18
3-7
3-8 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Window ...........164 3-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window ...............165 3-10 The Event Logs Window .................................167
CHAPTER 2 MENUS
2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 Menu Overview.............................................. 19 The File Menu................................................. 21 The Edit Menu ................................................ 34 The View Menu .............................................. 37 The Connections Menu .................................... 38 The Configuration Menu .................................. 51 The dataTaker Menu ....................................... 63 The Seventh Menu........................................... 77 The Form Menu .......................................... 77 The Chart Menu ......................................... 85 The Text Menu ........................................... 91 The Mimic Menu ........................................ 97 The Spread Menu ..................................... 104 The Analysis Menu .................................. 115 The Program Menu DT5/6xx ................. 124 The Program Menu DT8xx ..................... 126
TOOLBARS
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 Repositioning Toolbars ...................................168 The System Toolbar........................................169 The Connection Toolbar .................................169 The dataTaker Toolbar ...................................169 The Configuration Toolbar ..............................170 The Status Bar ...............................................170 The Project Bar .............................................171 The Connections Sub-Bar............................172 The Actions Sub-Bar...................................172 Window Toolbars..........................................173 The Form Toolbar ......................................173 The Chart Toolbar .....................................174 The Text Toolbars ......................................174 The Mimic Toolbar ....................................176 The Spreadsheet Toolbar............................176 The Analysis Toolbar ................................177 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar ........177 The DT8xx Program Builder Toolbar ............177
CHAPTER 4
4-8
2-9 The Reports Menu ......................................... 127 2-10 The Tools Menu ............................................ 130 Tools > Internal Cards ............................... 130 Tools > Memory Cards.............................. 130 2-11 The Window Menu ....................................... 134 2-12 The Help Menu ............................................. 135 2-13 The Taskbar Menu ........................................ 135
Contents Overview
UM-0070-A0
PART B Nuts & Bolts

CHAPTER 5 ACTIONS
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 Actions Overview ..........................................179 Using Actions................................................180 Action Macro Commands ..............................184 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) ............196
9-5
DeLogger Pro Web Publishing ....................... 229 Intranet (Local) Publishing .......................... 230 Internet (WWW) Publishing ...................... 231 Publishing Frequency................................. 232 Publishing Reports..................................... 232 Personalizing the Data Site ........................ 232 DeLogger OPC Server ................................... 233 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser)............................................... 235 DeLogger Messaging..................................... 237
9-6 9-7 9-8
CHAPTER 6 REPORTS
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 Reports Introduction .......................................199 Report Tools and the Data Database ................199 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports ..........200 Global Formulas............................................202 DIY Installed Reports ......................................202
PART C Appendixes
APPENDIX 1 Keyboard Shortcuts 239
Menu-Specific Shortcuts ............................. 239 General Shortcuts ..................................... 239
CHAPTER 7 DELOGGER
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4
UTILITY SOFTWARE
Schedule Utility .........................................203 SiteAdmin Utility ...........................................203 iUser Utility ...................................................207 Replay File Utilities.........................................207
APPENDIX 2 Worksheet Functions......................... 240
Index................................................ 285
CHAPTER 8 SAVING
8-1
WHAT, WHEN, WHERE
Whats Saved When .....................................208 Automatic Saves .......................................208 Manual Saves...........................................208 Whats Stored Where ....................................209
8-2
ADVANCED TOPICS
9-1 The Data Hub ...............................................210 Data Channels in the Data Hub...................211 Data Hub Functions ...................................213 Virtual Data Channels ................................215 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager ...221 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) .......................222 DDE Concepts ..........................................222 DeLogger Pro Topics and Items ...................224 DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel .........224 Databases ....................................................226 Database Delicacies ..................................226 DeLoggers Default Databases ....................226 Database Size and Performance Issues ........227 Alternative Databases ................................227
CHAPTER 9
9-2 9-3
9-4
UM-0070-A0
Contents Detailed
About this Users Manual ...................... 4 Contents Overview............................ 5 Contents Detailed .............................. 7
2-4 The Edit > Replace ........................................35 Edit > Go To Matching Brace ...................36 Edit > Select All ......................................36 View Menu ...............................................37 View > Status Bar ...................................37 View > Project Bar .................................37 View > Toolbars .....................................37 View > Show Alarm Events ......................37 View > Show Error Events ........................37 View > Show Message Events ..................37 View > View Events.................................37 Connections Menu .....................................38 Connections > Connect ...........................38 Connections > Manual Integrity Check .....39 Connections > Disconnect ........................39 Connections > Play .................................40 Connections > Properties .........................42 Connections Serial .......................... 43 Connections Network ...................... 45 Connections Modem ....................... 46 Connections Auto-Answer Modem .... 48 Connections File.............................. 49 Connections Database .................... 50 Configuration Menu ...................................51 Configuration > Defaults ..........................52 Load Existing Message Entries............... 52 Logging Errors and Alarms ................... 53 Channel Logging Mode ....................... 53 Connection Defaults............................. 54 Configuration > Actions ..........................55 Configuration > Reports ..........................57 Configuration > Web Publish ..................58 Configuration > Data Hub Channels ........59 Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions ................................................60 dataTaker Menu ........................................63 dataTaker > Data Logging .......................63 dataTaker > Unload ................................64 dataTaker > Quit Unload .........................66 dataTaker > Clear ..................................67 dataTaker > Job To Run On Hard Reset .....68 dataTaker > Reset ...................................68 dataTaker > Run .....................................69 dataTaker > Halt ....................................69 dataTaker > Set Date/Time ......................69 dataTaker > Status ..................................70 dataTaker > Test .....................................71 dataTaker > Memory Card ......................71 dataTaker > Run Card Program ................72 dataTaker > Profile .................................73 Host Port Tab ...................................... 73 Ethernet Tab ....................................... 73 Host Modem Tab................................. 73 FTP Server Tab .................................... 73 PPP Tab.............................................. 75 ISP Tab .............................................. 75 dataTaker > Upgrade Firmware................76
UM-0070-A0

CHAPTER 1 THE BIG PICTURE
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 Main Window (Project Window) ...................... 13 Document Windows ........................................ 14 Viewing and Saving Data ................................ 16 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels ...... 17 DeLoggers Folders.......................................... 18
2-5
The
2-6
The
CHAPTER 2 MENUS
2-1 2-2 Menu Overview.............................................. 19 The File Menu................................................. 21 File > New ............................................ 21 File > Open........................................... 22 File > Close ........................................... 23 File > Save Project.................................. 23 File > Project Properties .......................... 23 File > Performance ................................. 24 File > Page Setup .................................. 25 File > Print............................................. 26 File > Print Preview ................................. 27 File > Print Setup .................................... 28 File > Customize ................................... 29 File > Register Product ............................ 33 File > Recent Project Files (List) ................. 33 File > Exit .............................................. 33 The Edit Menu ................................................ 34 Edit > Undo........................................... 34 Edit > Redo ........................................... 34 Edit > Cut.............................................. 34 Edit > Copy........................................... 34 Edit > Paste ........................................... 34 Edit > Paste Values ................................. 34 Edit > Clear........................................... 35 Edit > Insert ........................................... 35 Edit > Delete.......................................... 35 Edit > Copy Down.................................. 35 Edit > Copy Right ................................... 35 Edit > Find ............................................ 35
2-7
The
2-3
Contents Detailed
2-8
The Seventh Menu ...........................................77 The Form Menu...........................................77 Form > Pause .........................................77 Form > Edit Mode ...................................77 Form > Column Template .........................78 Form > Reset High ..................................78 Form > Reset Low....................................78 Form > Background Colour ......................78 Form > Show Headers.............................78 Form > Show Gridlines ............................78 Form > View Toolbar...............................79 Form > Format........................................79 Form > Format > Alignment .................. 79 Form > Format > Font .......................... 79 Form > Format > Border....................... 80 Form > Format > Pattern....................... 80 Form > Format > General..................... 80 Form > Format > Fixed......................... 80 Form > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) ........... 80 Form > Format > Percent % ................. 80 Form > Format > Scientific ................... 80 Form > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd) .... 81 Form > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) ......... 81 Form > Format > Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000) ............... 81 Form > Format > Locale Date/Time ....... 81 Form > Format > Custom Number ........ 81 Form > Format > Default Font ............... 81 Form > Object .......................................81 Form > Object > Insert Button .............. 81 Form > Object > Insert Checkbox ......... 81 Form > Object > Attach Action ............ 82 Form > Object > Options ..................... 82 Form > Validation Rule ...........................82 Form > Calculation ................................82 Form > Define Name ..............................83 Form > Set Print Range From Selection ......83 Form > Insert Page Break .........................83 Form > Remove Page Break .....................84 Form > Publish .......................................84 Form > Properties....................................84 The Chart Menu ..........................................85 Chart > Pause ........................................85 Chart > Edit Mode ..................................85 Chart > Chart Properties ..........................86 Chart > Select Channels ..........................88 Chart > Edit Axis ....................................89 Chart > Rotate ........................................89 Chart > Auto Re-Scale .............................89 Chart > Allow Compressed Mode .............89 Chart > Clear .........................................89 Chart > XY Chart ...................................89 Chart > View Toolbar..............................90 Chart > Scale Text Up .............................90 Chart > Scale Text Down .........................90 Chart > Publish ......................................90 Chart > Properties...................................90
The Text Menu............................................ 91 Text > Display Screen ............................. 91 Text > Display Screen > Filter Data.......... 91 Text > Display Screen > Display Data As.. 92 Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk............................................... 92 Text > Display Screen > Font ................ 92 Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer As ............................................ 93 Text > Display Screen > Clear Screen Buffer................................................. 93 Text > Display Screen > Insert Text ....... 93 Text > Display Screen > Pause .............. 93 Text > Display Screen > View Toolbar ... 93 Text > Display Screen > Properties ........ 94 Text > Entry Screen ................................. 94 Text > Entry Screen > Command Edit Mode................................................. 94 Text > Entry Screen > Open Text File ..... 95 Text > Entry Screen > Load DLP Text ...... 95 Text > Entry Screen > Save Text File ...... 95 Text > Entry Screen > Send Line ............ 95 Text > Entry Screen > Send Highlighted . 95 Text > Entry Screen > Send Program...... 95 Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons .. 96 Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons ........ 96 Text > Entry Screen > Clear Entry Buffer . 96 Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching Brace................................................. 96 Text > Entry Screen > View Toolbar ....... 96 Text > Splitter View................................. 96 The Mimic Menu......................................... 97 Mimic > Needle Meters .......................... 98 Mimic > Arc Meters ............................... 98 Mimic > Pie Meters ................................ 98 Mimic > Temperature Meter .................... 99 Mimic > Annunciator ............................. 99 Mimic > Digital ................................... 100 Mimic > LED Indicators ......................... 100 Mimic > Buttons .................................. 101 Mimic > Picture .................................... 101 Mimic > Pause ..................................... 101 Mimic > Edit Mode............................... 102 Mimic > Edit Panel ............................... 102 Mimic > Arrange.................................. 102 Mimic > Arrange > Back One............. 102 Mimic > Arrange > Forward One........ 102 Mimic > Arrange > Send To Back ....... 102 Mimic > Arrange > Bring To Front ....... 102 Mimic > Lock ....................................... 103 Mimic > Delete..................................... 103 Mimic > Scale Text Up .......................... 103 Mimic > Scale Text Down ...................... 103 Mimic > View Toolbar........................... 103 Mimic > Publish ................................... 103 Mimic > Properties ............................... 103 The Spread Menu ..................................... 104 Spread > Load Session From Database .. 105 Spread > Load Session From File............ 105 Spread > Import Sheet ......................... 106 Spread > Export Sheet .......................... 106 Spread > Load Into External Spreadsheet 106 Spread > Chart Type ........................... 107
UM-0070-A0
Spread > Update Chart ....................... 107 Spread > Background Colour ............... 107 Spread > Show Headers ....................... 108 Spread > Show Gridlines ...................... 108 Spread > View Toolbar......................... 108 Spread > Format .................................. 109 Spread > Format > Alignment............. 109 Spread > Format > Font ..................... 109 Spread > Format > Border ................. 109 Spread > Format > Pattern ................. 110 Spread > Format > General ............... 110 Spread > Format > Fixed ................... 110 Spread > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) ...... 110 Spread > Format > Percent % ............ 110 Spread > Format > Scientific ............. 110 Spread > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 110 Spread > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) ... 110 Spread > Format > Custom Number ... 110 Spread > Format > Default Font .......... 111 Spread > Calculation ........................... 111 Spread > Sort ..................................... 112 Spread > Define Name ........................ 112 Spread > Set Print Range From Selection. 113 Spread > Insert Page Break ................... 113 Spread > Remove Page Break ............... 113 Spread > Publish ................................. 113 Spread > Properties.............................. 114 The Analysis Menu .................................. 115 Analysis > Load Session From Database 116 Analysis > Load Session From File ......... 116 Analysis > Import Sheet ....................... 117 Analysis > Export Sheet ....................... 117 Analysis > Load Into External Spreadsheet ....................................... 117 Analysis > Update Chart ...................... 117 Analysis > Background Colour .............. 118 Analysis > Show Headers .................... 118 Analysis > Show Gridlines ................... 118 Analysis > View Toolbar ...................... 118 Analysis > Format ............................... 118 Analysis > Format > Alignment .......... 119 Analysis > Format > Font ................... 119 Analysis > Format > Border ............... 119 Analysis > Format > Pattern ............... 119 Analysis > Format > General ............. 119 Analysis > Format > Fixed ................. 120 Analysis > Format > Fixed (1) to (5) .... 120 Analysis > Format > Percent % ........... 120 Analysis > Format > Scientific ............ 120 Analysis > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd) ................................. 120 Analysis > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss) .. 120 Analysis > Format > Custom Number .. 120 Analysis > Format > Default Font ........ 120 Analysis > Calculation ......................... 121 Analysis > Sort ................................... 121 Analysis > Define Name ...................... 122 Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection ............................................ 122 Analysis > Insert Page Break ................. 122 Analysis > Remove Page Break .............. 123 Analysis > Publish ............................... 123 Analysis > Properties ........................... 123
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12 2-13
The Program Menu DT5/6xx ..................124 Program > Send To Connection ..............124 Program > Send To Card On Connection 124 Program > Arrange Channels.................125 Program > Next Analogue Channel ........125 Program > Next Digital Channel.............125 Program > Next HSC Channel ...............125 Program > Edit Mode ............................125 Program > View Toolbar........................125 Program > Properties.............................125 The Program Menu DT8xx......................126 Program > Send To Connection ..............126 Program > Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job................................126 The Reports Menu..........................................127 Reports > Alarms ..................................127 Reports > Alarms > Full ...................... 127 Reports > Alarms > Today .................. 127 Reports > Alarms > Week To Date ...... 127 Reports > Alarms > Month To Date ...... 127 Reports > Errors ....................................128 Reports > Errors > Full........................ 128 Reports > Errors > Today.................... 128 Reports > Errors > Week To Date ........ 128 Reports > Errors > Month To Date........ 128 Reports > Log Files ...............................128 Reports > Log Files > Schedule ........... 128 Reports > Log Files > Action ............... 128 Reports > Database Reports ..................129 The Tools Menu .............................................130 Tools > Internal Cards................................130 Tools > Memory Cards ..............................130 Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx Series ...130 The Copy Option .............................. 131 The Translate Option.......................... 131 The Create Replay File Option ............ 132 Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx Series .......132 The Window Menu........................................134 Window > Cascade..............................134 Window > Tile Vertical..........................134 Window > Tile Horizontal......................134 Window > Arrange Icons ......................134 Window > Project Windows (List) ...........134 Window > More Windows ....................134 The Help Menu .............................................135 Help > About DeLogger .........................135 The Taskbar Menu .........................................135
Contents Detailed
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 3 WINDOWS
3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 The Project Window ......................................136 The Form Window .........................................136 Formula One Workbook Designer ...............138 The Chart Window ........................................139 The Text Window ..........................................144 The Mimic Window .......................................145 Mimic Attribute Dialog Boxes .................146 The Spreadsheet Window ..............................149 The Spreadsheet Worksheet .......................150 The Spreadsheet Graph Area ....................151 Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes .................................................152 Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes 159 Using the Mouse with Worksheets ...............160 The Analysis Window ...................................161 The Analysis Worksheet ............................162 The Analysis Chart Area ...........................163
PART B Nuts & Bolts

CHAPTER 5 ACTIONS
5-1 5-2 Actions Overview.......................................... 179 AutoRun DeLogger Pros Startup Action179 Using Actions ............................................... 180 Defining New Actions ........................... 180 Editing Actions ..................................... 181 Deleting Actions ................................... 181 Creating Macro Scripts ......................... 181 Running Actions ................................... 182 Action Macro Commands ............................. 184 Macros for Managing Connections......... 184 Macros for Commanding a dataTaker..... 185 Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker ............................................ 187 Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows ............................................ 189 Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects ............................................... 190 Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions .................................. 192 Macros for Interacting with a User .......... 194 Miscellaneous Macros........................... 195 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) .............. 196 Adding a New Schedule ....................... 197 Editing a Schedule................................ 197 Setting the Activity of a Schedule ............ 197 Running a Schedule Now ...................... 197 Global Pause ....................................... 197
5-3
3-7
3-8 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Window ...........164 3-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window ...............165 3-10 The Event Logs Window .................................167
CHAPTER 4 TOOLBARS
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 Repositioning Toolbars ...................................168 The System Toolbar........................................169 The Connection Toolbar .................................169 The dataTaker Toolbar ...................................169 The Configuration Toolbar ..............................170 The Status Bar ...............................................170 The Project Bar .............................................171 The Connections Sub-Bar............................172 The Actions Sub-Bar...................................172 Window Toolbars..........................................173 The Form Toolbar ......................................173 The Chart Toolbar .....................................174 The Text Toolbars ......................................174 The Mimic Toolbar ....................................176 The Spreadsheet Toolbar............................176 The Analysis Toolbar ................................177 The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar.........177 The DT8xx Program Builder Toolbar ............177
5-4
CHAPTER 6 REPORTS
6-1 6-2 6-3 Reports Introduction ....................................... 199 Report Tools and the Data Database................ 199 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports .......... 200 Installed Reports ................................... 200 Secondary Reports................................ 200 Global Formulas ........................................... 202 DIY Installed Reports ...................................... 202
4-8
6-4 6-5
CHAPTER 7 DELOGGER
7-1 7-2
UTILITY SOFTWARE
UM-0070-A0
Schedule Utility ......................................... 203 SiteAdmin Utility .......................................... 203 Administration Menu............................. 204 Administration > Pack Database ........... 204 Administration > Session Administration 204 Administration > Log File Administration 205 Administration > Archive Data Database 205 Reports Menu....................................... 206 Reports > Site Listing .......................... 206 Reports > Action Listing ...................... 206 Reports > Port ................................... 206 Closing SiteAdmin ................................ 206
10
7-3 7-4
iUser Utility .................................................. 207 Replay File Utilities ........................................ 207
PART C Appendixes
APPENDIX 1 Keyboard Shortcuts 239
Menu-Specific Shortcuts .............................239 General Shortcuts......................................239
CHAPTER 8 SAVING
8-1
WHAT, WHEN, WHERE
Whats Saved When..................................... 208 Automatic Saves....................................... 208 Manual Saves .......................................... 208 Whats Stored Where ................................... 209
8-2
CHAPTER 9 ADVANCED
9-1
APPENDIX 2 Worksheet Functions ......................... 240
TOPICS
9-2 9-3
9-4
The Data Hub ............................................... 210 Data Channels in the Data Hub .................. 211 Data Hub Functions .................................. 213 Setting a Channels Properties in the Data Hub ............................................ 213 Virtual Data Channels ............................... 215 The Virtual Job Data Hub ...................... 215 Store Channels .................................... 216 Calculated Channels ............................ 218 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager .. 221 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)....................... 222 DDE Concepts .......................................... 222 Server and Client ................................. 222 DDE Terminology ................................. 222 DDE Message Structure ......................... 223 The ChannelName DDE Item ................. 223 DeLogger Pro Topics and Items................... 224 DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel ........ 224 Excel Procedures .................................. 225 Databases.................................................... 226 Database Delicacies ................................. 226 DeLoggers Default Databases.................... 226 Database Size and Performance Issues ....... 227 Alternative Databases ............................... 227 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing ....................... 229 Intranet (Local) Publishing ......................... 230 Internet (WWW) Publishing ...................... 231 Publishing Frequency ................................ 232 Publishing Reports .................................... 232 Personalizing the Data Site ........................ 232 DeLogger OPC Server ................................... 233 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser) .............................................. 235 Access Rights to Windows..................... 235 Configuring the Windows Registry ......... 236 iUser Setup Upgrade ............................ 236 DeLogger Messaging .................................... 237
Index ................................................ 285
9-5
9-6 9-7
9-8
Contents Detailed
11
UM-0070-A0

PART A covers all of the tools and commands of dataTakers DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro software: Chapter 1: The Big Picture gives you an overview of DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro. Chapter 2: Menus begins on page 19. Chapter 3: Windows begins on page 136. Chapter 4: Toolbars begins on page 168.
Pro Only
The Pro symbol is used throughout this manual to indicate commands and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger Pro.
UM-0070-A0
12
PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars
CHAPTER 1
THE BIG PICTURE

1-1
MAIN WINDOW (PROJECT WINDOW)

Configuration toolbar see page 170 dataTaker toolbar see page 169 Connection toolbar see page 169 System toolbar see page 169 Menu bar see page 19 The title bar contains standard Windows controls (minimize, maximize,) and the name of the front-most DeLogger window. DT5/6xx program builder window. Here you create a program ready to send to a DT50, 500 or 600 series dataTaker. See page 164. DT8xx program builder window. Here you create a program ready to send to a DT800 dataTaker. See page 165.
In DeLogger, you open and work with one project at a time. This is why DeLoggers main window is called the project window (Figure 1).
Toolbar gripper (handle) see page 168 Project bar see page 171
Minimized DeLogger windows Double-click a windows tab to maximize /restore the window (tick Support Tabbed MDI in Figure 28 to turn on these tabs).
FIGURE
Event logs window Watch the status bar for prompts see page 167 when you pause the mouse over a button or a menu item. See page 170. 1 The menus, toolbars, sub-windows and other tools that constitute DeLoggers main (project) window
Activity indicators see page 170

UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE
1-1 Main Window (Project Window)
13
1-2
DOCUMENT WINDOWS
Dynamic data views these DeLogger windows display realtime data and historical data live. Print Trigger actions Web publish
Figures 2, 3 and 4 show the eight types of windows you can open within DeLoggers main window.
Form window: view each channels latest data and other information, one row per channel see page 136
Chart window: view live trend plots (data versus time) like traces on a chart recorder see page 139
Print Web publish
Text window: view incoming data in the display screen; type commands to send to the dataTaker in the entry screen see page 144 Load text file (.cmd, .dxc or .txt) Load program builder as text
Capture data to disk as it arrives (as a text file .txt) Save screen buffer (.txt or .csv) Print Save text file (.cmd, .dxc or .txt) Send program to the dataTaker Print
Mimic window: view data on meters, use buttons to perform actions, and add background graphics see page 145
Print Trigger actions Web publish
Historical data
Note: You can open more than one of each of these window types in any DeLogger project (choose New from the File menu). External connection Internal connection File and database connections for historical data Serial, network, modem and auto-answer modem connections for realtime and unloaded data
Database session
Replay file (.dlr)
FIGURE 2
UM-0070-A0
DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 1 of 3 the four dynamic data views
14
Spreadsheet window: load a replay file or database session one row per timestamp, one column per channel. Then manipulate the data, save it in a variety of formats, or export it. DeLogger Pro also produces presentation-quality 2D and 3D graphs of the data. See page 149. Load replay file Load database session Worksheet area Analysis window (DeLogger Pro only): as for spreadsheet window, except produces 2D charts for data analysis. See page 161. Load replay file Load database session Historical data Worksheet area Chart area Graph area
Static data views load historical data into these DeLogger windows, then use standard worksheet tools to organize, calculate and analyze the data, and graph it. Load into Excel (opens Excel) Export worksheet Print
Load into Excel (opens Excel) Export worksheet Print Note: You can open more than one of each of these window types in any DeLogger project (choose New from the File menu).
Database session
Replay file (.dlr)
Internal connection File and database connections for historical data
FIGURE 3
DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 2 of 3 the two static data views
DT5/6xx program builder window: create a program and send it to a DT5/6xx dataTaker. See page 164. Send program to the dataTaker
DT8xx program builder window: create a program and send it to a DT8xx dataTaker. See page 165.
Send program to the dataTaker
Note: You can open more than one of each of these window types in any DeLogger project (choose New from the File menu).
FIGURE 4
DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 3 of 3 the two program builders
1-2 Document Windows
15
UM-0070-A0
1-3
VIEWING AND SAVING DATA
Figure 5 gives you an overview of the ways you can use DeLogger to view and save data returning from a dataTaker in real time logged data unloaded from a dataTakers memory.
TRANSFER REALTIME DATA REALTIME DATA
Database channel logging session Realtime See page 60. Database channel logging session Logged See page 60. Logging session Logging session
DYNAMIC DATA VIEWS
Form window
REPLAY DATA
Chart windw
UNLOAD DATA REPLAY DATA
UNLOAD LOGGED DATA
See Initiating Unloads on page 61.
Text window
REPLAY DATA CAPTURE/SAVE DATA
UNLOAD LOGGED DATA
dataTaker > Unload only See page 64.
Unload session
REPLAY DATA
Mimic window
Replay file (.dlr)
CSV file (.csv)
LOAD SESSION
Session
LOAD FILE
STATIC DATA VIEWS
Spreadsheet window
Replay file (.dlr) Analysis window
FIGURE 5
Viewing and saving data
UM-0070-A0
16
1-4
PROJECTS, PROGRAMS, SCHEDULES AND CHANNELS

PROJECT B Program Builder (Program ) Schedule A (every 5 seconds) Channel 1 (details) Channel 2 (details) Schedule B (every hour) Channel 1 (details) Channel 3 (details) Schedule C (every day) Channel 1 (details) Program Builder (Program ) Schedule () Channel (details) Schedule K () Channel (details) Channel (details) Other commands Comments Schedule () Channel (details) Other commands Comments Schedule () Channel (details) Channel (details)
Figure 6 shows DeLoggers hierarchy of project > program (job) > schedule > channel.
PROJECT A Program Builder 1 (Program 1)
A DT5/6xx program can contain up to four schedules (timetables, agendas). They are labelled A, B, C and D. A DT8xx program can contain up to eleven schedules. They are labelled A, B, C, D, E,K.
Schedule () Channel (details) Channel (details) Schedule () Channel (details) Other commands Comments
A channel can be scanned by more than one schedule.
Program Builder 2 (Program 2) Schedule Channel (details) Schedule Channel (details) Other commands Comments Program Builder (Program ) Schedule Channel (details) Other commands Comments
Hierarchy: project >
program (job) >
schedule >
channel
PROJECT Program Builder (Program ) Schedule () Channel (details) Other commands Comments
DeLoggers conceptual hierarchy a project contains programs (jobs), a program contains schedules, a schedule contains dataTaker channels
FIGURE 6
1-4 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels
17
UM-0070-A0
1-5
DELOGGERS FOLDERS
DeLoggers installation folder Data database and Admin database (see Databases on page 226) Excel DDE add-ins (see DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange) on page 222) Excel & HTML files exported from DeLogger (see Spread > Load Into External Spreadsheet on page 106) dataTaker firmware files (see dataTaker > Upgrade Firmware on page 76) Screen captures (see General Shortcuts on page 239) Setup for initializing a new DeLogger user (see Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP FoxPro menus for the SiteAdmin utility Messaging components (see DeLogger Messaging on page 237) OPC server components (see DeLogger OPC Server on page 233) DeCopy/DeImage image file destination (Windows 95, 98 or ME only) Clip art (see Mimic > Picture on page 101) Your DeLogger project folders and files (see Figure 14 on page 22) Web publishing folders and generated files (see DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229) DeLogger replay files (see Connections > Play on page 40) Installed reports (see Installed Reports and Secondary Reports on page 200) Sound files used by DeLogger System-related files Web publishing templates (see Figure 297 on page 230 and Personalizing the Data Site on page 232) DeLogger add-on tools Automatic unload destination (used by early dataTakers only) For future use VC++ redistributable files
Figure 7 shows whats inside the DeLogger folder after a typical installation.
FIGURE 7
Contents of the DeLogger folder (folders only; individual les not shown)
UM-0070-A0
18
CHAPTER 2
MENUS
2-1
MENU OVERVIEW
Pro Only The Pro symbol indicates menu and dialog box items that are only available in DeLogger Pro.
7 8 9 10 11 2 3 4 5 6
This chapter covers DeLoggers menus, from left to right. Each menus commands and submenus are presented in descending order of appearance on the menu.
1
Menu bar
1
Page 21
Page 34
Page 37
Page 38
Page 51
Page 63
DT8xx only
DT5/6xx only DT8xx only
FIGURE 8
DeLoggers menus (1 of 2)
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-1 Menu Overview
19
UM-0070-A0
10
11
Menu bar
7
Page 77
Page 85
Page 91
Menu 7 changes according to which DeLogger window is front-most.

7
Page 97
Page 104
Page 115
10 7
11
Page 124
Page 126 Page 135
Page 127
Page 130
FIGURE 9
UM-0070-A0
DeLoggers menus (2 of 2)
Page 134
20
2-2
THE FILE MENU

File > New
Choose File > New to create a new DeLogger project, or to create a new document within the current project. In the New Document dialog box that opens, click the appropriate button for the document type you want.
The File menu contains DeLogger project-related commands.
Create a new project. Create a new DT5/6xx program builder. Create a new DT8xx program builder.
Create a new form, chart, mimic, text, spreadsheet or analysis window. Within the currently-open project Click a button to create a new project, or to add a new document to the currently-open project.
FIGURE 11
FIGURE 10
DeLoggers File menu
Some of these commands are duplicated by buttons on DeLoggers system toolbar see page 169.
You can also create new documents using the system toolbar see Figure 253 (page 169) DeLogger Pros project bar see Figure 258 (page 171). When you add a new document, DeLogger automatically saves the projects master le (see .dlw File on page 22).
One Project at a Time You can have only one project open at a time in DeLogger. Therefore, if you click the Project button (Figure 11) while a project is already open, DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project before it can open the new one (Figure 12).
FIGURE 12
Warning messages when changing projects

UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
21
Naming a New Project When you create a new project (Figure 11), the New Project dialog box opens requiring you to name the project.
File > Open

Choose File > Open to open a DeLogger project. If a project is already open, DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project before it can open another see One Project at a Time on page 21. The Open dialog box appears (Figure 15), ready to open Project Files (*.dlw) le types in DeLoggers Project folder.
FIGURE 13
Name the new project here
When you type a name in the New Project dialog box and click OK, DeLogger creates a corresponding folder containing a default set of project les in \DeLogger\Project see Figure 14.
DeLoggers installation folder
FIGURE 15
Open the folder of the project you want.
In the dialog box, open the folder of the project you want, select its .dlw le, and click Open (Figure 16).
Your project folders
FIGURE 16
Open the .dlw le for the project you want.
The project opens in DeLoggers workspace with its windows displayed exactly as they were when you last closed the project (see Whats Saved When on page 208).
For each new project you create, DeLogger generates a folder (in DeLogger\Projects) containing a default set of files.
.dlw File Each project has a .dlw le, its project master le, which stores housekeeping information for that project, such as data hub channel details and document window details (types, sizes, positions,). To open a project, you open its .dlw le from within DeLogger (Figures 15 and 16).
Figure 14 shows this le and the other les contained in a typical DeLogger project. See also Saving Data Hub Details (Project-Specic) on page 208, and Saving Project Details on page 209.
This projects project master file (see .dlw File on page 22)
FIGURE 14
UM-0070-A0
Typical project folders and les
22
File > Close

Choose File > Close to close the current project. DeLogger warns you that the project has been modied and asks if you want to save the changes.
File > Project Properties

Opens a dialog box in which you remove (de-activate) documents from the current project (they are not deleted; you can restore them later) rename documents open documents that were closed using their Close button (you can also do this using the project bar see Figure 258) specify alternative administration and/or data databases to be used by the current project.
FIGURE 17
Closing a project save changes?
For information on what DeLogger saves when you click Yes in the dialog box above, and what it saves automatically (whether you click Yes or No in the dialog box above), see Whats Saved When on page 208.
File > Save Project

This command saves all of the current projects les its .dlw master le, and its document windows along with their contents, settings, locations and states. The DeLogger Busy Indicator (Figure 257 on page 170) ashes red to conrm the save operation. When closing a project or exiting DeLogger, clicking Yes when asked if you want to save changes is equivalent to choosing the Save Project command. See also Saving Project Details on page 209.
See Setting Up an Alternative Database on page 227.
FIGURE 18
Project Properties dialog box
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
23
UM-0070-A0
File > Performance

This command opens the DeLogger Performance dialog box, which contains options that allow you to ne-tune how your computer services DeLogger, other programs, and its own communications and system tasks.
Laptop is the safest, most robust setting. It ensures that DeLogger communication (which is mainly data retrieval) is processed reliably but at the possible expense of other DeLogger functions. However, if you have a fast computer and want smoother or faster DeLogger operation, try changing to Desktop or Server. This reallocates computer resources for improved performance of many DeLogger tasks (smoother updating in DeLoggers views, for example). When changing to a faster setting, be aware that this could cause data corruption and system crashes, which are typical symptoms of a computer unable to keep up with the tasks asked of it.
For lowperformance computer For highperformance computer
Select the size of DeLoggers input buffer. The default is Standard Program Size, which allows for STATUS10 and STATUS14 returns to be up to 8kB. For large dataTaker programs that generate large STATUS14 returns, select Large Program Size, which allows for STATUS10 and STATUS14 returns to be up to 16kB (although this may reduce DeLoggers performance). See also Data Hub Automatic Updating on page 212. Balances the relative priority of DeLoggers data retrieval and data display tasks. Data retrieval is handled by several individual process tasks. Data display is handled by a single display task that services all the dynamic data views. When set to High (the default), data retrieval is given higher priority than data display. Use this setting when secure data retrieval is more important than immediate display updating. When set to Normal, data retrieval is given the same priority as data display. Use this setting when you want immediate display updating. (Only useful for low input data rates if the rate of data input to DeLogger is too high, it may hinder display updating.)
FIGURE 19
Fine-tuning DeLoggers performance
UM-0070-A0
24
File > Page Setup

When printing a form, spreadsheet or analysis window from DeLogger Pro, the Page Setup dialog box gives you control over headers and footers, margins, page order, centering, scaling, grid lines, and row and column headings.
Font Codes
&B &I &U &S &"fontname" &nn
Use a bold font Use an italic font Underline the header Strikeout the header Use the specied font Use the specied font size (must be a twodigit number)
Worksheet Codes
&A, the default header code, prints the worksheet name. &P, the default footer code, prints the page number.
FIGURE 20
&D &T &F &A &P &P+n &Pn && &N
Prints the current date Prints the current time Prints the workbook name Prints the worksheet name Prints the page number Prints the page number plus n (a number) Prints the page number minus n (a number) Prints an ampersand Prints the total number of pages
Page Setup dialog box (only available for form, spread and analysis windows in DeLogger Pro)
Any plain text and/or special formatting codes you enter in the Header eld and the Footer eld of the Page Setup dialog box is added to every page of your printout.
Header and Footer Formatting Codes Formatting codes allow you to align and format header and footer text, and to insert information from the current worksheet.
There are three types of formatting codes and they must be entered in the following order: alignment codes font codes worksheet codes Enter codes in upper or lower case. Separate them with a space.
Alignment Codes
&L &C &R
Left-aligns the characters that follow Centers the characters that follow Right-aligns the characters that follow
Headers and footers are centered by default. Using an alignment code restarts a section.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
25
UM-0070-A0
File > Print

To print the contents of any of DeLoggers windows (except a DT800 program builder, which cannot be printed), bring the window to the front and choose File > Print. This opens one of the dialog boxes shown in Figure 21.
For chart, text and DT5/6xx program builder windows
use to print the mimic window to be the computers default printer before you choose File > Print.
Tick Maintain Aspect Ratio to retain the screen width-toheight ratio of the image on the printout. Tick Border to print a border around the page. Tick Plotting Area Background to fill-in the background of mimic objects with a shade that contrasts to the active plot. Tick Graph Window Background to print a light gray background behind each mimic object (similar to the background displayed when an object is selected on-screen in edit mode).
For form, spread and analyse windows
Select Exact Size to print the mimic window at a position on the page where the top-left corner is as defined in the Left and Top fields. Select Proportionate to scale the mimic window to fit the page (if necessary). Select Print Graphs to Max Size to print the mimic window the same size as on the screen. Opens the Print Preview dialog box For mimic windows (see Figure 22)
FIGURE 22
The mimic window print dialog box
FIGURE 21
Print dialog boxes
Before you print any window, set your printer and paper details (see File > Print Setup below). You can also preview the print job (see File > Print Preview next).
Printing a Mimic Window The mimic window is a complete module and has its own dialog box for printing see Figure 22 (it doesnt use the standard Microsoft Windows Print dialog box). When you click OK in Figure 22 to print the front-most mimic window, DeLogger uses the computers default printer1. Therefore, if your system has more than one printer installed, you must set the printer that you want to
1
Default printer: choose Start > Control Panel > Printers, right-click the printer you want to use, then choose Set as Default in the menu that pops up.
UM-0070-A0
26
File > Print Preview

Before printing, you can check that the current form window chart window text window entry screen only spread window analysis window DT5/6xx program builder window will print as you want by choosing File > Print Preview. There is no print preview for text window display screens, mimic windows or DT800 program builder windows.)
DT5/6xx program builder print preview
The print preview window replaces DeLoggers main window.Therefore you must close the Print Preview window in order to continue working in DeLogger. Some sample print previews are shown in Figure 23.
Form, spread or analyse window print preview
Chart window print preview View one page at a time, or two pages at a time.
FIGURE 23
Typical print preview windows
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
27
UM-0070-A0
File > Print Setup

Before printing, you must specify the printer you want to use along with its paper size, paper source and paper orientation. To do this, choose File > Print Setup.
FIGURE 24
Print Setup dialog box
UM-0070-A0
28
File > Customize

Choose File > Customize to set your preferences for many aspects of DeLogger Pros appearance.
Customize the background of DeLoggers workspace. See Figure 26. Customize DeLoggers startup splash screen. See Figure 27. Customize the document tabs you see in DeLoggers MDI (Multiple Document Interface) that is, its main window. See Figure 28. Hide/show DeLoggers main toolbars and tooltips, create your own toolbars, and change their appearance. See Figure 29. Customize DeLoggers system tray icon. See Figure 30. Specify whether window and toolbar sizes and positions are automatically remembered when you quit DeLogger (and reinstated the next time you launch DeLogger). Also turn off the display of the above pages in the Customize dialog box. See Figure 31.
FIGURE 25
Changes you make here are made current when you click Apply or OK in the Customize dialog box, and are automatically saved to the Windows system registry when you quit DeLogger (even when you click No in the Do you wish to save the changes? exit dialog box).
Customize DeLogger Pros appearance
Tick to apply an image (for example, a logo or a layout) as a background to DeLoggers workspace, menu bar and toolbars. Tick to restrict the background image to the workspace only. Choose either to Tile the image or Stretch it to fill the background, or to place it in one of nine locations (and, if the image doesnt completely cover the background, choose a color).
Choose the bitmap image file to be used as the background.
Click Apply to preview your changes.

FIGURE 26
Customize dialog box (page 1) Background Painter
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
29
UM-0070-A0
When ticked, an image (as specified below) is displayed while DeLogger starts up. Show the image for a fixed time during startup, or until startup is complete.
Choose the image file to be used as the splash window.
If you want a color in the splash window image file to appear "transparent", specify the color by doing one of the following: Select, from a palette, a Color nearest to the color you want to appear transparent. If necessary, expand the Color tolerance until you achieve the transparent effect (use the Preview button). Select None for no transparent effect. Enter the coordinates of pixels that are the color you want to appear transparent. (Open the image file in a pixel-capable program such as MS Paint, move the pointer to the color, and read the coordinates on the status bar.) Use the Preview button to check the effect.
FIGURE 27
Customize dialog box (page 2) Splash Window
Show or hide a tab for each window in DeLoggers workspace. Figure 1 explains the use of tabs. Choose where the window tabs appear in the workspace.

FIGURE 28
UM-0070-A0
Customize dialog box (page 3) Tabbed MDI (the tabs in DeLoggers main window)
30
Show Show Show Show
or or or or
hide hide hide hide
the the the the
system toolbar. connection toolbar. dataTaker toolbar. configuration toolbar.
These tick boxes duplicate the commands on the View > Toolbars submenu (see page 37).
These buttons are not yet supported.
Show or hide the small information windows that pop up when you move the pointer over a toolbar button. Add or remove bevelled edges to toolbar buttons. Show or hide the toolbar grippers (handles) when Cool Look is turned on. Change the width of the toolbar borders.
FIGURE 29
Customize dialog box (page 4) Toolbars
DeLogger icon context menu
Windows taskbar
System tray
Tick to display the DeLogger icon in Windows system tray. Then you can left- or right-click the icon to pop up a DeLogger context menu. Define the tray icons tooltip text.
Either select the default system tray icon, or locate another.

FIGURE 30
Customize dialog box (page 5) Tray Icon
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
31
UM-0070-A0
When ticked, these characteristics are automatically saved, then automatically reinstated the next time you start DeLogger. See Text Screen Splitter on page 91.
Show or hide these five pages of the Customize dialog box (that is, customize the Customize dialog box).
FIGURE 31
Customize dialog box (page 6) Workspace State
UM-0070-A0
32
File > Register Product

Opens a dialog box in which you enable DeLogger Pro by entering your Pro serial number.2
Type your Pro serial number here.

FIGURE 32
Enabling DeLogger Pro
File > Recent Project Files (List)

Choose a project le from this list to open the project. DeLogger warns you that it must close the current project rst (see One Project at a Time on page 21).
File > Exit

This command quits (shuts down) DeLogger. Youre asked if you want to save changes see Whats Saved When on page 208.
If youre using DeLogger (not Pro), the serial number eld (Figure 32) contains 0000-0000, DeLoggers default serial number.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-2 The File Menu
33
UM-0070-A0
2-3
THE EDIT MENU

Form .dlf Chart .dlc Text .dlt Mimic .dlm Spread .dls Analyse .dla Prog .dlp Prog .dl8
The entries that appear on the Edit menu change according to which DeLogger window is front-most (Figure 33).
FIGURE 33
DeLoggers Edit menu
Edit > Undo

Undoes your last action.
Edit > Paste

Copies the contents of the clipboard into DeLogger.
Edit > Redo

Redoes/re-applies your last action (multiple redo).
Edit > Paste Values

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Pastes previously-copied worksheet values (one or more cells) into the current worksheet.
Edit > Cut

Deletes the selected text or object from DeLogger after copying it to the Windows clipboard.
Edit > Copy

Copies the selected text, object or worksheet cell values to the clipboard.
UM-0070-A0
34
Edit > Clear

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Opens a dialog box that allows you to clear cell formatting and/or values. To remove the formatting of the selected cells, select Formats the data values from the selected cells, select Values both formatting and values from the selected cells, select All.
Edit > Copy Down

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Copies the upper cell(s) in a selected group of cells into all of the lower cells in the group.
Edit > Copy Right

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Copies the left cell(s) in a selected group of cells into all cells to the right in the group.
Edit > Find

FIGURE 34
DeLoggers worksheet Clear dialog box
Edit > Insert

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Opens a dialog box that allows you to insert blank cells, rows or columns. Selected cells, rows or columns are displaced (shifted), not removed. To insert blank cells, select a range of cells of the size you want to insert and where you want them inserted, then choose Insert. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 35), select either Shift Cells Right or Shift Cells Down to specify where you want the displaced cells to go, then click OK. To insert blank rows or columns, select the number of rows or columns you want to insert (or just a few representative cells) where you want them inserted, then choose Insert. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 35), select either Entire Row or Entire Column, then click OK. New blank rows are inserted above the selected rows; new blank columns are inserted to the left of the selected columns.
Opens a dialog box that allows you to nd strings (values, text or formulas) in cells within the current form, spread or analysis worksheet in the current text window entry screen. You can also bookmark them if you want (see Figure 220 on page 144).
For worksheets For text windows (entry screen)
Marks every line containing the Find What text with a bookmark icon at the left-hand end of the line
FIGURE 35
DeLoggers worksheet Insert dialog box
FIGURE 36
DeLoggers Find and Replace dialog boxes
Edit > Delete

For form, spread and analysis windows only. Removes the selected cells, rows or columns.
Edit > Replace

Opens a dialog box that allows you to nd and replace strings (values, text or formulas) in cells within the current form, spread or analysis worksheet in the current text window entry screen. See Figure 36.
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-3 The Edit Menu
35
Edit > Go To Matching Brace

To locate the mate of a brace character ( or ) in a text windows edit screen, click the I-beam cursor on either side of the brace then choose Go To Matching Brace. The cursor jumps to the matching brace. See also Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching Brace on page 96.
Edit > Select All

For DT5/6xx program builder windows only. Allows you to select all channel icons on the front-most schedule tab at once.
UM-0070-A0
36
2-4
THE VIEW MENU

View > Show Message Events
When Show Message Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Messages tab whenever a DeLogger event occurs. You can alter the amount and scope of this reporting using the Conrmation Level slider (Figure 57). In addition, DeLogger considers some messages to be important enough to present you with the Messages tab even when Show Message Events is un-ticked. Instead of pop-up alert boxes, this is DeLoggers way of warning you of serious problems that will affect the outcome of the current operation (for example, being unable to open a le).
FIGURE 37
DeLoggers View menu
View > Status Bar

Shows or hides DeLogger Pros status bar (Figure 257 on page 170).
View > View Events

Shows or hides the event logs window (Figure 249 on page 167).
View > Project Bar

Shows or hides DeLogger Pros project bar (Figure 258 on page 171).
View > Toolbars

Commands on this submenu show or hide the system toolbar (Figure 253) the connection toolbar (Figure 254) the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255) the conguration toolbar (Figure 256).
View > Show Alarm Events

When Show Alarm Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Alarms tab whenever a dataTaker alarm is received.
View > Show Error Events

When Show Error Events is ticked, DeLogger opens3 the event logs window at the Errors tab whenever a dataTaker error is received.
Or, if the event logs window is already open, brings it to the front.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-4 The View Menu
37
UM-0070-A0
2-5
THE CONNECTIONS MENU

Connections > Connect
Opens a dialog box that lists the available serial, network, modem and auto-answer modem connections. (For le and database connections, see Connections > Play on page 40.) In the dialog box (Figure 39), make a selection then click OK to begin the connection process.
FIGURE 38
DeLoggers Connections menu
A DeLogger connection (or, more accurately, connection denition) is simply a group of communications settings; a user-dened and user-named software tool that you use to automate the process of linking DeLogger to a data site. See the Data Site Extras panel below, and Figure 43). DeLogger supports six types of connections and installs with several connections already dened. You can modify these, or create as many others as you want (see Connections > Properties beginning on page 42).
Serial, network and modem connections appear here. Auto-answer modem connections appear here.
Multiple Connections You can connect DeLogger to more than one data site at a time: DeLogger is limited to three connection types (serial, network and le): it supports a maximum of four serial connections, and an unlimited number of network and le connections at the one time. DeLogger Pro supports any number of all six connection types.
Select a connection. Only available (not currently active) connections appear in the list. See the Extras panel below.
FIGURE 39
DeLoggers Connect dialog box
You can also open this dialog box using the Connect button on the connection toolbar see Figure 254 (page 169) the F2 key on your keyboard a right-click menu in DeLogger Pros project bar see Figure 258 (page 171).
Data Site
A data site is any source of data that you connect to DeLogger. For example: a DT500 connected by a serial comms cable a DT800 connected by an Ethernet network or by a modem link a DeLogger replay le (a source of historical data) a DeLogger Pro database session (another source of historical data) The six types of DeLogger connections are serial External DeLogger connections; network (Ethernet) for realtime data and unloaded modem data from dataTakers auto-answer modem le Internal DeLogger connections; for database. replay (historical) data from replay files and database sessions See also Figure 43.
UM-0070-A0
Force the Connect

When the Force the connect option at the bottom of the Connect dialog box (Figure 39) is ticked, DeLogger does not validate or interrogate the device at the data site when connecting to it. Instead, DeLogger simply opens the computers comms port using the selected DeLogger connections baud rate and ow control settings. This is useful, for example when using unreliable links when using a pay-by-packet connection (saves unnecessary trafc) when the modems intercept certain characters (such as the DEL character used for dataTaker identication).
38
Connections > Manual Integrity Check

Forces DeLogger Pro to re-synchronise the contents of the appropriate data hub connection tab with the currentlyconnected4 dataTaker.
How the Data Hub Gets Its Information When a dataTaker is programmed, it creates an internal listing of every item specied in the program (real channel details, calculations, system information and much more). These items return information when the program is running.
This data-source list is available to any host software by means of the STATUS10 command (DT5/6xx) or the STATUS14 command (DT8xx). When connecting4 to a dataTaker, DeLogger automatically issues the appropriate5 STATUS command and creates the data hub listings from the responses (for example, see Figure 288).The value of this arrangement is that it allows dataTaker data loggers to be programmed by other means, and DeLogger is able to interrogate them during connection and know the data that will be returned.
Re-Synchronise However, the program in the dataTaker may change dynamically in a way that DeLogger Pro cannot detect, or other operational situations may develop where this synchrony between DeLogger Pro and the dataTaker is lost. This may be seen as data hub errors being reported in the Messages tab of the event logs window (Figure 249). The Connections > Manual Integrity Check command provides the means of forcing DeLogger Pro to re-synchronise its data hub with the current dataTaker.
Connections > Disconnect

Opens a dialog box that lists the currently-active connections. Highlight a connection, then click OK to disconnect it.
DeLogger, DeLogger Pro and the Data Hub When DeLogger disconnects from a dataTaker, DeLogger clears the data hub listing for that connection. Then, when DeLogger next connects to that connection, it once again establishes the data hub listing for that connection. When there is no active connection, the channel choice lists for the various DeLogger views have no available channels.
However, when DeLogger Pro disconnects from a dataTaker, DeLogger Pro maintains the data hub listing for that connection. When there is no active connection, the channel choice lists for the various DeLogger views still show the available channels. When DeLogger Pro next connects to that same connection, it checks that the data hub listing matches the dataTaker in accordance with the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker tick box in the Conguration > Defaults dialog box (see Figure 57 on page 52, Connection Defaults on page 54 and Data Hub Automatic Updating on page 212).
FIGURE 40
DeLoggers Disconnect dialog box
You can also disconnect using the Disconnect button on the connection toolbar see Figure 254 (page 169) a right-click menu in DeLogger Pros Connections subbar see Figure 258 (page 171).
When theres more than one connected site, DeLogger asks you to select the connection by opening a dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 66 (page 63). So that DeLogger knows which command to use, you specify the dataTaker series when creating DeLogger connection denitions see the dataTaker eld in Figure 45, for example.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-5 The Connections Menu
39
UM-0070-A0
Connections > Play

Opens a dialog box that lists available replay connections that is, le and database connections.6 In the dialog box (Figure 42), make a selection then click OK to begin the connection process. If a default le or session is not specied in the connection denition Figure 54 or Figure 55 DeLogger asks you to select one. When the replay control panel opens (bottom of Figure 42), the channels in your chosen replay le or database session become available in the choice lists of the various DeLogger views. Choose the channels in the views you want, then click the replay control panels Play button to start the data ow.
6
The Play command is duplicated by the button on the Connection toolbar (Figure 254 on page 169). IMPORTANT File and database connections, and replay les and database sessions, are model-specic. (When you create le and database connections, you specify the model of dataTaker that the connection is intended for in the dataTaker eld in Figures 54 and 55.) Therefore, you must take care to play only DT5/6xx replay les using DT5/6xx le and database connections play only DT8xx replay les using DT8xx le and database connections.
For the other connection types, see Connections > Connect on page 38.
Historical Data, Replay Data

Historical data is stored data data logged in a dataTaker or its memory card, data saved in DeLoggers data database, or data saved in a text le (.txt) or a replay le (.dlr). The term is used to distinguish data that is not realtime data. Replay data is a specic type of historical data its historical data that is saved in a le (called a replay le; .dlr), or in a data set in DeLoggers data database in a format that DeLogger can replay to its dynamic data views (form, chart, text and mimic windows), just as if the data was arriving in real time (except that you can control the speed of the replay see the replay control panel in Figure 42), and load into its static data views (spreadsheet and analysis windows) for calculations, graphing, and so on.
DeLogger / DeLogger Pro Historical Data Transfer realtime data Logging session see Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions (page 60) Text file (.txt) see Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk (page 92) Logging session see Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions (page 60) Unload logged data Unload session Replay file (.dlr) CSV file (.csv)
FIGURE 41
UM-0070-A0
Each data set saved in DeLoggers data database is called a session see Logging Sessions on page 60 and Unload Sessions on page 64. You can save both realtime data and logged data unloaded from a dataTaker as a session see Figure 41. A replay le is just another data site: to link to it, you use a DeLogger le connection (Figure 54). A database session is just another data site: to link to it, you use a DeLogger database connection (Figure 55). As well as dataTaker data, historical data can contain conguration information, report entries, dataTaker alarms and dataTaker errors. See also Replay File Utilities on page 207. DeLogger can also replay dataTaker unload les (.dx8 and .dxu).
see dataTaker > Unload (page 64)
Creating historical data in DeLogger
40
File and database connections (replay connections) appear here.
Select a replay connection then click OK.

(To create these connections, see Figures 54 and 55.)
Not used
If theres no Default File (Figure 54) or Session(Figure 55)
assigned to the selected connection, the appropriate dialog box opens prompting you to select one.
See Figure 145 (page 105).
The Replay control panel opens.

Name of the file or session to be replayed
Drag the pointer to adjust replay speed. Replay progress bar Reset Pause Play
FIGURE 42
Date and time of the data point currently being replayed
(Re)playing historical data (that is, a replay le, a database unload session, or a database logging session)
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
41
UM-0070-A0
Connections > Properties

The Connections > Properties command opens the Connections dialog box in which you create and edit three types of connections in DeLogger serial, network and le connections an additional three types of connections in DeLogger Pro modem, auto-answer modem and database connections. This is covered in Figures 45 to 55.
Serial connection External data sites dataTakers (sources of realtime and unloaded data) Network connection Modem connection Auto-Answer Modem connection
SU PERVISION DATA
You use DeLogger connections to link DeLogger to data sites. You create the connections you need, and DeLogger stores each one as a record in its administration database. NOTE The term connection as used in DeLogger is actually a truncation of connection denition.
DeLogger / DeLogger Pro
Data hub
File connection
Database connection
Internal data sites Replay files and database sessions (sources of historical data)
FIGURE 43
DeLogger connection types (see also the Data Site Extras panel on page 38)
Figure 44 shows how to use the control buttons that are common to the tabs in the Connections dialog box, and to other database conguration dialog boxes.
Locate the database

record. (Some dialog boxes also have a Find field to help you do this.) record.
Click Edit to unlock the When youve made the Make changes to other
records then Close the dialog box. Create a New record. changes you want, click Accept. Your changes are immediately saved.
To locate an existing record, use the previous/next buttons, or type the first few characters of the records name in the Find field.
FIGURE 44
UM-0070-A0
Using the database dialog box controls
42
Connections Serial
To create and edit serial connections (direct comms cable, or direct-link radio modems) in DeLogger, choose Connections > Properties and click the Serial tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 45 explains. DeLogger stores each serial connection as a record in its administration database. You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that details these connection denitions see Reports > Site Listing on page 206.
Host RS-232 port
Serial (COM) port See Figure 44 (page 42). Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is intended for (so that DeLogger can apply the appropriate protocol to the connection). Set the Properties of the computers serial port. See Figures 46 and 47. When ticked, DeLogger ignores corrupt returned data (data records that fail error checks). When ticked, DeLogger does not check that the dataTaker it connects to matches the dataTaker series defined in the dataTaker field above. Only use when connecting to dataTakers with very old firmware versions that do not support Device Check.
RS-232 comms cable
Give every connection a unique name. Select the computers serial port to use for the connection. When ticked, DeLogger sends a line feed character followed by a 300ms pause before each command. This ensures that a sleeping dataTaker has time to wake up to receive the command.
DeLogger normally carries out a STATUS check when attempting to make a connection (see Data Hub Automatic Updating on page 212). Tick Skip STATUS check if you dont want DeLogger to do this (for example, if you want to establish the connection regardless of poor line quality or modem idiosyncracies that cause the STATUS check to fail). Un-tick Disconnect if STATUS check fails when you want DeLogger to carry out the STATUS check but not disconnect if the check fails.
FIGURE 45
Connection properties dialog box creating and editing serial connections
PC Serial Port Properties Clicking the PC serial port Properties button in Figure 45 opens a dialog box in which you specify the selected serial ports baud detection mode, baud rate and, for a DT8xx dataTaker, the type of ow control. Figures 46 and 47 explain.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
43
UM-0070-A0
DT5/6xx Automatic baud rate detection DeLogger attempts to connect to a dataTaker connected to the selected PC serial port beginning at the baud rate selected in the drop-down list. If the baud rate does not match that of the dataTakers RS-232 port, DeLogger re-attempts connection using the available baud rates in turn until it finds a match. DeLogger spends a longer period testing each baud rate in case the dataTaker is responding slowly to host communications (because of running a large program or scanning very quickly, for example). DeLogger tests each baud rate quickly.
Select a baud rate: For automatic baud rate detection, this is the first baud rate that DeLogger tries when attempting to match the dataTakers baud rate. For manual baud rate detection, this is the only baud rate that DeLogger uses.
FIGURE 46
Manual baud rate detection DeLogger attempts to connect to a dataTaker connected to the selected PC serial port ONLY at the baud rate selected in the drop-down list. The factory defaults are 57600 baud for DT800 9600 baud for DT5/6xx Series 3 4800 baud for DT5/6xx Series 2.
Baud Rate Settings dialog box DT5/6xx DT8xx
See Figure 46. Select Hardware if the dataTaker is set for hardware flow control (HWFC or RTS/CTS). Select Software if the dataTaker is set for software flow control (SWFC or XON/XOFF).
FIGURE 47
The factory default is Software flow control.
Baud Rate Settings dialog box DT8xx
UM-0070-A0
44
Connections Network
To create and edit Ethernet network connections in DeLogger, choose Connections > Properties and click the Network tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 48 explains. DeLogger stores each network connection as a record in its administration database. You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that lists these network connection denitions see Reports > Port on page 206. You can connect a DT8xx dataTaker directly to a TCP/IP or UDP network, but a DT5/6xx dataTaker requires a serial-to-Ethernet adaptor (such as a Lantronix Device Server).
Ethernet
Give every connection a unique name. Type the IP Address assigned to the dataTaker that this connection is intended for. We recommend Stream (TCP) mode. See Figure 45 on page 43.
Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is intended for. Type 3001 for a DT5/6xx using a serial-to-Ethernet adaptor, 8 for a DT800 using TCP/IP, or 7 for a DT800 using UDP. When ticked, DeLogger ignores corrupt returned data (data records that fail error checks).
FIGURE
Tick if you want DeLogger to initiate network SO_KEEPALIVE packets, which avoids the computer timing-out an idle TCP/IP connection between DeLogger and a DT800. (This is not necessary for a DT5/6xx dataTaker and its requisite serial-to-Ethernet adaptor.) 48 Connection properties dialog box creating and editing Ethernet network connections
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
45
UM-0070-A0
Connections Modem
To create and edit DeLogger Pro modem connections for remote DT5/6xx and DT8xx data sites, choose Connections > Properties and click the Modem tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 49 explains.
Host RS-232 port
Wired modem link
DeLogger Pro stores each modem connection as a record in its administration database.
Serial (COM) port
dataTakers modem
Wireless modem link
Host computers modem
Satellite link
Give every connection a unique name. Data site phone details Standard Windows dialing set-up Standard Windows device set-up Select the model of the dataTaker that this connection is intended for. Tick if you want DeLogger to accept incoming calls from the data site. After the remote site has dialed-in to DeLogger (and before disconnection), DeLogger sends any text in this field back to the site. You can use this, for example, to confirm successful dial-outs, or reset any local alarm annunciation. DeLogger does not verify the syntax.
FIGURE 49
UM-0070-A0
See Figure 50. See Figure 51. Assign dial-in and dial-out passwords see Figure 52. Tick if you want DeLogger Pro to delete the connected DT800s alarms (if theyve been automatically unloaded) prior to disconnecting. Tick MM-1 Support if a Modem Manager is installed at the data site.
See Figure 45 on page 43.
Connection properties dialog box creating and editing modem connections
46
FIGURE 52
DeLoggers Security (password) dialog box
FIGURE 50
Windows Dialing Properties dialog box
FIGURE 51
Typical Windows congure modem dialog box
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
47
UM-0070-A0
Connections Auto-Answer Modem

External data sites that are connected to DeLogger by modem (Figure 49) such as DT5/6xx or DT8xx dataTakers, or Modem Managers can dial in to DeLogger Pro for automatic unloading of their alarms7. If DeLogger Pro recognizes the remote device and dial-ins are allowed (see Auto-Answer Prerequisites below), DeLogger Pro automatically handles the call and supervises the unloading of alarms from the site. DeLogger Pros auto-answer modem connections manage this. To create and edit auto-answer modem connections, choose Connections > Properties and click the Auto Answer Modem tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 53 explains. DeLogger Pro stores each autoanswer modem connection as a record in its administration database. Note the following: You only need to create one auto-answer modem connection per modem. The modem specied in an auto-answer modem connection can be different from any modem already specied in a modem connection. In fact, its often preferable for DeLogger Pro to dial out using one modem and receive calls on another.
7
The Auto-Answer Process When a Modem Manager or DT800 dials in, DeLogger Pro compares its password (the site ID for a Modem Manager; the serial number for a DT800) with the modem connection passwords in the database (Figure 52). If a password match exists and if that record has Accept Incoming Calls enabled, DeLogger Pro automatically manages the call and unloads the alarms from the data site.
After unloading the alarms, DeLogger stays connected for 60 seconds in case there are any responses from the site. (You can adjust this delay using Regedit.exe to alter the key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\ DeLogger\MM01\ActionResponseDelay (dened in ms).
You can include an embedded action string in the alarm to unload data.
Auto-Answer Prerequisites Before DeLogger Pro can recognize the data site and unload its alarms, you must do the following: Create a modem connection for the site as described in Figure 49. You do this to enter the data sites details into the database so that DeLogger Pro can check the sites password, device type and other information when it receives a call from the site. In the modem connection you create for the site (Figure 49), be sure to tick Accept Incoming Calls (in the Site Details area of the dialog box).
Give every connection a unique name. Standard Windows device set-up specify the modem used (at the computer end of the link) by the remote device. See Figure 51.
FIGURE 53
UM-0070-A0
Connection properties dialog box creating and editing auto-answer modem connections
48
Connections File
To create and edit connections to DeLogger replay les, choose Connections > Properties and click the File tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 54 explains. You use le connections to play replay les see Connections > Play on page 40. DeLogger stores each le connection as a record in its administration database. IMPORTANT When creating a le connection, be sure to select the dataTaker model (in the dataTaker eld) that matches the replay le(s) you intend to play through it (replay les are model-specic). This is important because the model you select determines the protocol that DeLogger applies when playing replay les through the connection. We recommend that you create le connections named, say, MyFile500 and MyFile800, each with its appropriate model selected, to minimize possible confusion.
Give every connection a unique name. Select the model of the dataTaker that created the file(s) you intend to replay using this connection. Type the path to the replay file you want assigned to this connection, or click the Browse button and locate the file in the dialog box that opens. If you leave this field blank, DeLogger prompts you for a file when you use this connection see Connections > Play on page 40.
FIGURE 54
Connection properties dialog box creating and editing le connections
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
49
UM-0070-A0
Connections Database
To create and edit connections to DeLogger Pro database sessions (see Logging Sessions on page 60), choose Connections > Properties and click the Database tab in the dialog box that opens. Figure 55 explains. You use database connections to replay database sessions see Connections > Play on page 40. DeLogger Pro stores each database connection as a record in its administration database. IMPORTANT When creating a database connection, be sure to select the dataTaker model (in the dataTaker eld) that matches the session(s) you intend to play through it (database sessions are model-specic). This is important because the model you select determines the protocol that DeLogger applies when playing database sessions through the connection. We recommend that you create database connections named, say, MySession500 and MySession800, each with its appropriate model selected, to minimize possible confusion.
Give every connection a unique name. Select the model of the dataTaker that created the session(s) you intend to replay using this connection. Select the logging session you want assigned to this connection. If you leave this field blank, DeLogger Pro prompts you for a session when you use this connection see Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60.
FIGURE 55
Connection properties dialog box creating and editing database connections
UM-0070-A0
50
2-6
THE CONFIGURATION MENU
FIGURE 56
DeLoggers Conguration menu
Use the Conguration menu to specify and manage the following aspects of DeLogger: Defaults General DeLogger preferences for global settings, database channel logging mode lters and connection defaults Figure 57. Actions Create and edit action denitions to automate tasks and processes Figure 58. Create and edit reports ready to run on Reports the data database Figure 61. Settings for DeLogger Pros web Web Publishing publishing capability Figure 62. Manage data channels in Data Hub Channels DeLogger Pros data hub8 (set properties for primary and virtual channels, create virtual channels, and specify a channels visibility, conditions, dependancy, alarm and store settings) Figure 63. Database Channel Logging Sessions Dene up to 10 sessions (data sets). Each session can log data from one or more channels of any or all of the current connections into DeLogger Pros data database Figure 64.
See the Data Hub Extras panel on page 62.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-6 The Configuration Menu
51
UM-0070-A0
Conguration > Defaults

This command opens DeLoggers Defaults dialog box (Figure 57) in which you set global9 preferences, and congure a variety of DeLogger functions such as how DeLogger launches the logging of dataTaker errors and alarms the logging of dataTaker data interaction with connected dataTakers how much feedback DeLogger gives you in the Messages tab of the event logs window. To change these settings, enable the dialog box by clicking its Edit button, make the changes, then click the Accept button. When you click Accept, the settings are immediately saved. Finally, close the dialog box by clicking Close.
9
Load Existing Message Entries

The following happens when Load Existing Message Entries (in the Global Settings area of Figure 57) is ticked: Any DeLogger message events that occur are logged in the message.txt le in DeLoggers installation directory. When DeLogger starts, the entire message.txt le is loaded into the Messages tab of the event logs window (Figure 249). In the Messages tab, previous entries are shown in gray text and new entries are shown in black text. Any color attributes you see in the Messages tab are applied by DeLogger and are not contained in the messages.txt le. DeLogger automatically supervises message.txt (limits its maximum size) and, because its a simple text le, you
That is, common to all projects.
When Open Last Project is un-ticked, youre presented with the Welcome dialog box (instead of the last project you used) when you start DeLogger. See Load Existing Message Entries on page 52.
Tick if you want dataTaker errors or alarms automatically logged. See Logging Errors and Alarms on page 53.
See Figure 44 (page 42). Data filters for database channel logging sessions see Channel Logging Mode on page 53.
See Connection Defaults on page 54.
No feedback (DeLogger alerts you to critical events only)
FIGURE 57
UM-0070-A0
Conguring DeLogger global Defaults
Maximum feedback Use this slider to set the amount of feedback that DeLogger gives you in the Messages tab of the event logs window (Figure 249 on page 167). If youre a new DeLogger user, start with High (the default). Then reduce the setting as you become more familiar and confident with DeLogger.
52
can open it in a text editor (such as Notepad, WordPad or Word) for perusal or printing.
Channel Logging Mode

Using the data hub, you can log data arriving from a dataTaker into DeLogger Pros data database.11 And if you want, you can instruct the data hub to carry out conditional and dependancy checks12 on this data and apply an appropriate status ag13 (channel quality" invalid, partially-invalid, or valid). Each status ag is stored in the database along with its data point. This function allows you to specify the type of incoming data to be logged as sessions in DeLogger Pros data database. You set these general ag options in the Channel Logging Mode area of Figure 57:
Log All Data All selected channel data is logged regardless of its status. Log Only Valid and Data points can be agged as Partially Invalid Data partially-invalid if the result is obtained from a collection of data points of which some are invalid (that is, the data has failed conditional or dependancy checks). Log Valid/Partially As above but also allows data Invalid Data and that has failed a conditional test. Failed Conditional Log Valid/Partially As above but allows data that has Invalid Data and failed a dependancy test. Failed Dependant Log only changed If the new value of the data point data values is the same as its previous value, tick this option to stop the repeated data from being logged. This can be useful if you have a process that gives xed readings when not operational.
Logging Errors and Alarms

Tick Log Errors and/or Log Alarms (Figure 57) if you want errors and alarms generated by connected dataTakers to be logged. Later youll be able to display this information and run reports on it. If you dont tick these options, connected dataTakers still generate error and alarm messages but DeLogger doesnt collect them or display them (in the Errors tab and the Alarms tab of the Event Logs window Figure 249 on page 167). However, they can still be displayed in a text window. NOTE ACTIONS AND ALARMS If you want DeLogger to run an action10 when an alarm is received from a connected dataTaker, you must tick Log Alarms. NOTE ERROR AND ALARM LOGS To delete the error and alarm logs, you must use SiteAdmin see Administration > Log File Administration on page 205.
11
12
13
10
See Conguration > Actions on page 55.
Tick box
Radio buttons
To do this, you must dene one or more logging sessions see Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60. See the Conditional Settings and Dependant Settings screens in Figure 289 on page 213. Dont confuse this ag with those that appear in the Flags column of the Data Hub Channels dialog box (Figure 63) they are not the same.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
53
UM-0070-A0
Connection Defaults
In the Connection Defaults area of Figure 57, you can tell DeLogger to do the following when connecting to a dataTaker: Congure its data hub to reect the list of data values that the dataTaker is programmed to measure/ convert/calculate for each schedule. The list is then available to DeLoggers data view windows so that incoming data can be served to them from the data hub. Check if a DT800s rmware can be updated. Specify ULAST (unload last) tracking see ULAST List on page 64. Here are the options:
Synchronise channel This option determines the global list to dataTaker default behaviour when making a connection to a dataTaker. With it ticked, DeLogger issues status commands to enable it to synchronise to the program and channels dened within the dataTaker. See also Data Hub Automatic Updating on page 212, and DeLogger, DeLogger Pro and the Data Hub on page 39. Do not synchronise This option determines the global channel list if default behaviour when making a dataTaker has reset connection to a dataTaker. With it ticked, DeLogger does not synchronise to the dataTaker if there is no program even if the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker option is ticked. This stops the channel denitions from being removed from DeLogger if the dataTaker has been reset. Allow rmware When ticked, DeLogger automatically upgrade checking checks the DT800s rmware (operating system) version every time (DT800 only) a connection is made to it. Then, if your version of DeLogger is capable of supporting newer rmware, DeLogger prompts you to upgrade. If youre happy with your DT800s existing rmware or dont want to see these reminders, un-tick this option. Track ULAST unload from end of last unload (DT800 only) When ticked, DeLogger Pro stores (in the Windows system registry) the date and time of the last record of the last DT800 unload operation. Then, the next time you carry out an unload operation, this date and time is displayed in the DT800 unload dialog box (Figure 68 on page 65) so that you can select it as the start point of the next unload. ULAST information is also displayed in the Jobs tab of the DT8xx status dialog box (Figure 75) in the connections sub-bar (Figure 259) in the rst DT8xx unload dialog box (Figure 68). When ticked, DeLogger Pro adds a project-specic tag to each ULAST date/time pair that it stores, so that only the current projects ULAST values appear in the ULAST list in Figure 68. Users who apply multiple projects to a single dataTaker may nd this helpful.
ULAST is Project specic
UM-0070-A0
54
Conguration > Actions

DeLogger Pro has an inbuilt scripting capability. You use this to create scripts (macros) that instruct DeLogger Pro to perform actions (tasks or processes) automatically. Figure 59 shows the types of actions that DeLogger Pro can carry out. Actions can be as simple as running a sound le when you launch DeLogger (a siren alert, for example), or as complex as sequentially dialling a number of remote sites after midnight, downloading the data from each site, clearing the logged data from the dataTaker at each site, and preparing a plot or report of the logged data. The Conguration > Actions command opens the dialog box in which you create and edit DeLogger Pro actions (action denitions, to be precise). DeLogger Pro stores these actions in its administration database. Therefore they are global that is, available to all projects.
Every action you create must have a unique name. An action trigger (Figure 59) uses this name to identify its action. See Figure 44 (page 42). Select another action to run after completing this one.
For more information, see Actions beginning on page 179. You can use the SiteAdmin utility to create a report that lists the actions you create here see Reports > Action Listing on page 206. NOTE These actions are internal to DeLogger Pro. Dont confuse them with dataTaker alarm actions.
Action Triggers DeLogger Pro actions can be triggered as follows: Manually in the form and mimic windows by means of user-dened buttons. See Form > Object on page 81 Mimic > Buttons on page 101. Manually from the Actions tab of the project bar. See The Actions Sub-Bar on page 172.
If you want the action to play a sound, type the path to the sound file here, or click the Browse button and locate the file in the dialog box that opens. If you want the action to run a report, select the report here. Also select the report destination: a new Window, the Printer specified in the report, or a .htm file in DeLoggers Publish folder (see DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229).
If you want the action to run one or more DeLogger Pro macros, type the macros here, or click the Macro Builder button to open the Macro Builder dialog box (Figure 60). If you want the action to run a Windows executable file (.exe), type the path to the file here, or click the Browse button and locate the file in the dialog box that opens. Tick to run the .exe file minimized. Type any commandline parameters for the .exe file here. If you want the action to set or clear a channel on a digital output board installed in the computer, select the Digital Board and its Channel. Click Set if you want the action to set the output TRUE. Click Clear if you want the action to set the output FALSE. If a dataTaker alarm initiated the action, DeLogger Pro automatically sends any text you type here to the dataTaker that initiated the alarm. Use this to send commands back to the dataTaker in response to the action.
UM-0070-A0
FIGURE 58
Conguring DeLogger creating and editing an internal (DeLogger Pro) action
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
55
Action Triggers Form window and mimic window buttons Project bars Actions tab External (dataTaker) alarms Internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms Schedule utility Another action
FIGURE 59
TRIGGER
DeLogger Pro Actions Engine
Actions Run a DeLogger Pro macro. Play a sound.
Specify each actions output(s) in Figure 58.
TRIGGER
Run a DeLogger Pro report.

TRIGGER
Run a Windows program (.exe file). Set or clear a channel on a digital output board installed in the computer. If a dataTaker alarm initiated the action, respond to the dataTaker. Run another DeLogger Pro action (chain).
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
DeLogger Pro actions triggers and tasks
Externally by alarm messages from connected dataTaker data loggers. See Triggering Actions from External Alarms below. Internally by DeLogger Pro alarms. See Figure 290 on page 214. Automatically by the Schedule utility. See Schedule Utility on page 203. By another action See Chaining Actions below. Figure 59 illustrates these triggers, along with the tasks that an action can carry out.
for an action record with the same name. If it nds such a record, DeLogger Pro executes the actions settings as specied in the actions dialog box (Figure 58).
Chaining Actions An action can run another action, allowing for complex action chains to be created. Specify this using the Chain to eld in Figure 58.
See also Chaining Actions on page 180.
Triggering Actions from External Alarms dataTaker alarm messages can have the names of DeLogger Pro actions embedded within the message. The embedded action names must appear within {}braces in the alarm actionText. For example: Pump Failure{PumpOffAction}
DeLogger Pro scans incoming dataTaker alarm messages for embedded action names. When it locates one, DeLogger Pro checks its administration database
AutoRun Action See AutoRun DeLogger Pros Startup Action on page 179.
See also Creating Macro Scripts on page 181. List of DeLogger Pro macro templates (see Action Macro Commands beginning on page 184) Select a DeLogger Pro macro template from the list, then click the Paste button. Repeat to build a macro sequence. In each macro template, remember to replace any placeholders (the text between double quotes " ") with your own quantifiers. Do this here, or in the Macro Text field (Figure 58) when youve closed the Macro Builder.
FIGURE 60
UM-0070-A0
Macro Builder dialog box (click the Macro Builder button in Figure 58)
56
Conguration > Reports

This command opens the dialog box in which you create and edit secondary reports14 (report denitions, to be precise). You run secondary reports on any of DeLoggers databases. As Figure 61 shows, you supply one or more parameters (to dene the chunk of data for the report), and a printer (DeLogger Pro formats the data accordingly). These become the reports defaults. (You can temporarily change these later when you run the report.) Having created a secondary report, you can then employ it using either the Reports > Database Reports command (see page 129), or an action (see Conguration > Actions on page 55 and Actions on page 179). DeLogger Pro stores each secondary report as a record in its administration database. The parameters are criteria (in the form of text strings) that dene the information you want returned by the report, such as session names, DeLogger Pro global formulas (see Global Formulas on page 202), and internal DeLogger variables. See Report-Writing Guidelines beginning on page 202 (particularly step 4.) for more information about report parameters. NOTE For every Parameter eld in which you select a parameter in the secondary report, there must be a corresponding Crystal Reports formula dened in the installed report. For example, if a particular installed report only has elds for listing two data sets, then you can only specify two parameters in any secondary report based on this installed report.
Parameter Fields In the Parameter elds in the secondary Reports dialog box (Figure 61), you can either make selections from the drop-down lists or type the parameter text strings directly.
14
Printer Field If you leave the Printer eld blank in the secondary Reports dialog box (Figure 61), DeLogger Pro prints to the screen (and formats the report for the screen). Otherwise, select one of the computers printers from the list to be the reports default printer.
You could use this, for example, to create two secondary reports of the same sessions data a viewed session report and a printed session report.
That is, reports based on DeLogger Pro installed reports see Installed Reports and Secondary Reports on page 200. List of installed reports. Select the installed report on which you want to base the secondary report.
See Figure 44 (page 42). Go to previous/next record. Description of the secondary report (to help you remember what the report does). The description appears in the first screen of the Reports meu > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192). Type a short name for the secondary report. The name appears in the first screen of the Reports meu > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192). Select or type default report criteria here. You can change these when you run the report see the second screen of the Reports meu > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192). See also Parameter Fields above.
See Printer Field above.
FIGURE 61
Conguring DeLogger creating and editing a secondary report
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
57
UM-0070-A0
Conguration > Web Publish

This command opens the dialog box in which you congure DeLogger Pro to publish data views in HTML format to the following destinations: To a local folder (the Publish folder in DeLoggers installation folder), from where they can be made available to a connected intranet and viewed using browser software (IE 5.5 or later is preferred) called intranet (local) publishing. To the Internet or other web server using FTP called Internet (WWW) publishing. Data views you can publish in this way for browser viewing are form windows, chart windows, mimic windows, spreadsheet window charts and analysis window charts. See DeLogger Pro Web Publishing beginning on page 229 for more information.
FTP Delays As discussed in Manual and Automatic Web Publishing on page 229, the form, chart and mimic views can be set to publish on update (controlled by Publish Delay in Figure 62), or by manual triggering (also uses Publish Delay).
When triggered, the view is placed in a queue awaiting actioning. Then when the Publish Delay timer has expired, the queue is serviced and the html/jpeg les are produced and put in the local hard disks Publish folder. If selected for internet publishing, the names of the les are placed on the FTP queue and the FTP delay to send timer is started. When this timer expires, Delogger attempts a connection to the FTP server and transfers the queued les. Once the transfer is complete, DeLogger remains connected to the FTP server for a time controlled by FTP delay to disconnect. During this period any other les added to the queue are sent immediately. When the timer expires, the FTP connection is dropped and the sequence starts again. By using this method, updates can be grouped to save connection costs, which is important if using a dial-up link. See also Publishing Frequency on page 232.
See Figure 44 (page 42). Tick to enable publishing to an intranet (that is, to DeLoggers Publish folder). Tick BOTH to enable publishing to an Internet destination. The port number to use for FTP (default is 21). Tick Passive transfer mode if an NAT firewall exists between the client and the server. When ticked, messages relating to web publishing and FTP transfer are displayed in the Messages tab of the event logs window.
FIGURE 62
UM-0070-A0
See FTP Delays above.
Type the URL of the FTP site to which you want DeLogger Pro to copy its published files. For access to the destination server Location (path on destination server) for the copies of published files See FTP Delays above.
Conguring DeLogger Web Publish
58
Conguration > Data Hub Channels

This command opens the Data Hub Channels dialog box (Figure 63), which allows you to see the current contents of DeLogger Pros data hub (see the Data Hub Extras panel on page 62). Pressing the F5 key on your keyboard also opens this dialog box. The Data Hub Channels dialog box lists the channels that are available for each job that DeLogger Pro is currently connected to, be it a dataTaker, a replay le, or a database session. (To view a jobs details, click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the dialog box.) The dialog box also allows you to modify and process data channels in various ways. These concepts are covered fully in Data Channels in the Data Hub on page 211 Data Hub Functions on page 213 Virtual Data Channels on page 215.
The rate of each channels schedule Not used See Channel Flags below. Channel display settings see Screen 1 of Figure 289. Changes are automatically saved (in the projects .dlw file) when you Close the dialog box.
Figure 289 (page 213) Figure 293 (page 219) Clear (delete) the current job tab (and its channels) from the data hub. Cleared jobs no longer appear in the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro views. If cleared channels are specified in any of the views, DeLogger Pro generates error messages in the events log window. Take care when clearing jobs once cleared, they cant be recovered until DeLogger Pro makes that connection again. File connection Job tabs Serial connections Virtual channels Tick to prevent changes to the job currently visible in the dialog box (also prevents DeLogger Pro automatically updating the jobs details in the data hub if the connection is re-made).
FIGURE 63
Conguring channels typical job tabs in the Data Hub Channels dialog box
Channel Flags The following channel information codes appear in the Flags column of Figure 63:
All Channels Additional Codes for Virtual Channels
C D S A
Channel has conditional criteria dened (Screen 2 of Figure 289) Channel has dependant channel dened (Screen 3 of Figure 289) Channel is logging to database session Channel on DDE advise list
R L
Virtual channel has realtime input Virtual channel has logged input
RL Virtual channel has both realtime and logged inputs (ST) Virtual channel is store-type (CA) Virtual channel is calculated-type
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
59
Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions

Data presented to the data hub from any of the available external data sources (realtime data from a dataTaker, or logged data from a dataTaker15) can optionally be logged into DeLoggers data database . The Database Channels Logging Sessions command opens the dialog box (Figure 64) in which you organize this. Once in the database, the data can be replayed from the database into DeLoggers dynamic views (form, chart, text and mimic windows), just as if it were realtime data from a connected dataTaker (see Connections > Play on page 40) loaded from the database into DeLoggers static views (spreadsheet and analysis windows) presented in reports. Sessions on page 64 describes the other type. Once you activate a logging session, it immediately begins accepting data from its specied channels. If you quit DeLogger Pro, the data ow into the session resumes automatically when you restart DeLogger Pro. If you de-activate the session, data ow stops; if you later re-activate the session, data ow resumes (new data is appended to the existing data in the session). Compare this cumulative, long-term functionality of logging sessions with unload sessions (page 64), which create a unique, detached set of data every time you initiate them. You can have up to 10 logging sessions operating at the same time, and each must have a unique name; unique to any other logging session currently running, and unique to any other session that exists in the database. (By the way: while its true that you could also refer to the set of data contained in a replay le as a session, we apply the term to database data sets only.) See also the Historical Data, Replay Data Extras panel on page 40.
Logging Sessions When you log data into the database, you create a set of data known as a database channel logging session, or simply a logging session. This is one of the two types of sessions you can create in DeLogger Pro. Unload
15
See the Data Site Extras panel on page 38, Figure 41 on page 40, and Figure 43 on page 42.
Tick Active to activate the session, then click Apply to start the session. Once the session is running, un-tick Active then click Apply to temporarily suspend the session; re-tick Active then click Apply to re-start the session. You can run up to 10 concurrent (parallel) database channel logging sessions. Give the session a name. If you want, you can also Check that the name doesnt already exist in DeLoggers database this saves DeLogger Pro halting the logging run (because of a duplicate name) when you click Apply or OK. See Sessions Realtime or Logged on page 61.
Highlight a channel you want to include in the session, then click Add (or double-click the channel name). Ctrl+click and Shift+click selects multiple channels.
FIGURE
UM-0070-A0
Starts the current database logging session (if Active is ticked) and leaves the dialog box open for you to create or edit other sessions Not used Starts the current database logging session (if Active is ticked) and closes the dialog box 64 Conguring database channel logging sessions
60
The data sets resulting from logging sessions or from unload sessions are known throughout DeLogger by their individual session names. Although database channel logging session denitions are project-specic (the denitions are stored in each projects master le), the actual sessions (data sets) are global in that any project that has access to the database in which the sessions are stored can access them.
No realtime data arriving from the dataTaker is logged in the session. This allows you to send returning data to different destinations. For example, while realtime data is being returned from a dataTaker to DeLogger Pro dynamic views, historical (logged) data from a dataTaker can be received by a database logging session.
Initiating Unloads For database channel logging sessions, you initiate the unload of historical (logged) data from a dataTaker using any of the following methods: An alarm action that triggers an unload. See Action Trigger Externally by Alarm Messages from Connected dataTakers on page 182. A mimic or form window button action that triggers a macro (UNLOAD_SITE). See Action Trigger Manually by Buttons Placed in the Form View and Mimic View on page 182. A Schedule utility schedule that triggers an unload. See Action Trigger Automatically by the Schedule Utility on page 183. A dataTaker U command sent from a text window. Choosing dataTaker > Unload.16 See page 64. Deleting Sessions Although you can modify each sessions details in the Database Channel Logging Sessions dialog box (Figure 64), you cant delete a session or its data from here. You must use SiteAdmin to do this see SiteAdmin Utility on page 203. (You also use SiteAdmin to archive, back-up, wholly delete, copy, clear and pack DeLoggers data database.) Sessions Realtime or Logged For each session, you must choose to log one of the two following data types arriving from the dataTaker: Realtime data only data returning from the dataTaker as its measured is logged in the session. No data arriving from the dataTakers internal memory/store is logged in the session. Logged data only data returning from the internal memory/store of a dataTaker is logged in the session.17
16
Setting Up Database Channel Logging Sessions Work through the following steps to set up Database Channel Logging Sessions:
1. From the Conguration menu, choose Database Channel Logging Sessions. 2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 64), click an unused tab (1 to 10 across the top of the dialog box) to select the session to dene. You dont have to dene these sessions sequentially, but being orderly (always starting from 1) may reduce the occurrence of forgotten or neglected sessions, which could unintentionally add unwanted data to the database. 3. Tick Active to enable the session. The session can later be disabled, but left dened, by un-ticking this box. 4. Type a name for the session in the Session eld. The name must be unique, and is usually a brief title for the data source, such as PumpA-May2002 (including a time and/or date is a good idea). You can check the names uniqueness by clicking the Check button. 5. If you want, type a more information in the Notes eld. This may help you in the future to identify the data set youre about to log into the database, or prompt you concerning its purpose. 6. Choose the type of data you want to be logged by this session: Choose Real Time Data if you want realtime data from the dataTaker to be logged. Choose Logged Data if you want data unloaded from the dataTaker to be logged (stored).
17
Figure 69.
Allow data to be presented to the Data Hub for database logging (DT5/6xx, Figure 68) or Allow through to the Data Hub for database logging and ULAST tracking (DT8xx, Figure 68) must be ticked. In DeLogger Pro, data unloaded directly from dataTaker memory using the dataTaker > Unload command can also be logged into the database (as an unload session) see
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
61
UM-0070-A0
7. Select the channel(s) whose data you want logged by this session. The Available list in Figure 64 shows all channels of all current connections, except those hidden using the Channel Display screen in Figure 289 (page 213). Move the channels into the Selected list using one of the following methods: In the Available list, click a required channel then click Add (or simply double-click each required channel). For a bulk selection of adjacent channels, click the rst channel of the group and drag to the last channel or the group (or Shift-click the last channel), then click Add. For a bulk selection of non-adjacent channels, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the channels you want, then click Add. 8. When youve nished dening the session, click Apply to keep the dened session, or click Cancel to cancel the denition. When you click Apply, the session is immediately available for logging, and begins the session with the rst data point that arrives from the sessions channels. 9. To dene another logging session, repeat steps 3. to 8. above on another session tab. 10. When youve dened all the sessions you want, click OK to close the dialog box.
Session Names Must Be Globally Unique IMPORTANT Database channel logging session denitions are project-specic, but session names must be unique over all projects. When Does Database Logging Start and Stop? A sessions database channel logging starts when data is rst received from the sessions channels. It continues until the data ow ceases, or until you open the dialog box (Figure 64) again, un-tick Active on the sessions tab, then click Apply.
If you exit DeLogger Pro while logging sessions are still active, they automatically resume when the project is next run.
Macros for Logging Sessions See Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions beginning on page 192
Data Hub
DeLogger Pros data hub is a central marshalling point and repository for information about the data channels (channel data, calculations data, alarm states,) from each of the current connections to DeLogger Pro. The connections can be any of the six types (listed in the Data Site Extras panel on page 38). These primary data channels can be processed in various ways within the data hub before passing to DeLogger Pro. Virtual channels can be created based on these or on other virtual channels to similarly process data. Virtual channels can be the result of primary channel data tested for value or range the result of primary channel data clipped for oor and ceiling values dependant another channels value the result of direct calculations the result of successive primary channel data reduced statistically for average, maximum, minimum, standard deviation, and so on.
UM-0070-A0
The primary channels and the virtual channels in the data hub are made available to the DeLogger Pro views by means of their various channel choice lists. The data hub dialog box (Figure 63) is a listing of the channels that are available for each current DeLogger Pro connection/job. The contents and conguration of the data hub is specic to each project, and DeLogger Pro saves this information in the projects master le (see .dlw File on page 22). See The Data Hub beginning on page 210 and Connections > Manual Integrity Check on page 39.
62
2-7
THE dataTaker MENU

dataTaker > Data Logging
Starts or stops data logging in a connected dataTaker. The command opens a dialog box in which you select logging ON or logging OFF. Then when you click OK, DeLogger sends the appropriate command (LOGON or LOGOFF) to the dataTaker.
DT8xx only
The commands on this menu become active when DeLogger is connected to a dataTaker.
DT5/6xx DT8xx
DT5/6xx only DT8xx only
FIGURE 65
DeLoggers dataTaker menu
If youre connected to more than one dataTaker when you choose a command from this menu, DeLogger asks you to select the connection rst.
Select a connection then click OK.
FIGURE 67
Data Logging ON/OFF dialog boxes
In addition, if youre connected to a DT800, the dialog box allows you to set logging for individual schedules shows which schedules are currently logging. The Data Logging command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
FIGURE 66
Typical which connection? dialog box
NOTE The logging option radio button you see selected when you open the dialog box does not indicate the current logging status of the dataTaker.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-7 The dataTaker Menu
63
UM-0070-A0
dataTaker > Unload

To retrieve logged data from a connected dataTaker, choose Unload. In the dialog box sequence that opens (Figures 68 and 69), you specify the data you want to unload: by schedule by date/time by source (for DT5/6xx); by job and data type (for DT8xx) the unload destination: a comma-separated-variable le (.csv) or a replay le (.dlr) a database unload session The Unload command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169). During an unload, the Data Input Activity indicator on DeLoggers status bar (Figure 257) ashes purple.
Environment The Environment area (of the rst DT5/6xx unload dialog box Figure 68) contains the following options:
Use Current Environment When ticked, DeLogger uses the current channel list in the data hub for this connection. When un-ticked, DeLogger gets a new channel list from the dataTaker to interpret the incoming unloaded data. We recommend that you leave this option ticked. Allow data to be presented to the Data Hub for database logging When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made available to the data hub for logging in a database session (see Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60). Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger Pro is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specically want to log the unloaded data to a database logging session, leave this option un-ticked. Note that this is separate from the option of storing the unloaded data directly to a predened database unload session (Figure 69). Allow data to be presented to Views18 When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made available to DeLoggers dynamic views (form, chart, text and mimic windows), allowing the incoming unloaded data to be progressively displayed in various ways during the unload. Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specically want to view the unloading data, leave this option un-ticked.
End-of-Unload Action When an unload nishes (that is, when DeLogger sees the end-of-unload record sent by the dataTaker), DeLogger automatically runs an end_of_unload action for that connection (and reports this in the messages tab and the alarms tab of the event logs window).
It does this by adding the connection name to the string
end_of_unload_ and looking in the admin databases
action table to see if such an action exists. If it nds an action named end_of_unload_ConnectionName, it runs it. Otherwise, it does nothing. If you want to use this functionality to, say, clear data from a dataTaker after an unload, you must create an appropriate action (Figure 58) and name it end_of_unload_ConnectionName so that DeLogger automatically recognizes and runs it at the end of an unload.
Unload Sessions If you unload logged data from a dataTaker directly to a database session using the dialog box shown in Figure 69 (DeLogger Pro only), you create a data set in DeLogger Pros data database called an unload session. This is one of the two types of sessions you can create in DeLogger Pro. Logging Sessions on page 60 describes the other type.
Compare this one-off data dump functionality of unload sessions with logging sessions (page 60), which allow you to accumulate data into the same session through multiple DeLogger Pro restarts and session de-activate/re-activate operations over a long period of time.
ULAST List DeLogger can remember the last item of data returned from a DT800 during an unload19. This is called ULAST tracking (unload last). DeLogger maintains a ULAST for each schedule.
The ULAST list (in the Range of Data to Unload area of the rst DT8xx Unload dialog box Figure 68) shows the date and time of the last record of the last DT800 unload for each schedule.
18
19
This option is present on both the DT5/6xx and DT8xx unload dialog boxes (Figure 68). If youve ticked Track ULAST in the Connection Defaults area of Figure 57 (page 52). See also Track ULAST in the table under Connection Defaults on page 54.
UM-0070-A0
64
DT5/6xx DT8xx
See ULAST List on page 64. See Allow Through to Data Hub on page 66. See Environment on page 64. See Environment on page 64.
Tick if you want to unload the logged data to a file. Choose the file type and destination (a new file, or append to an existing file). Comma-separatedvariable file (.csv) Replay file (.dlr) see the Extras panel Historical Data, Replay Data on page 40.
The unload starts when you click Finish.
Continued in Figure 69
FIGURE 68
Unloading logged data (1 of 2)
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
65
UM-0070-A0
Tick if you want to unload the logged data to a session in DeLogger Pros data database. Then DeLogger Pro automatically inserts appropriate details, including the current date and time, as the Session Name.
Compare the unload sessions you create here with the logging sessions you create in Configuration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60. In particular, see Logging Sessions on page 60 and Unload Sessions on page 64. From Figure 68
The unload starts when you click Finish.

FIGURE 69
Unloading logged data (2 of 2)
You can use this as the starting point for a new unload as follows: 1. Select the begin Time radio button (in the Range of Data to Unload area of Figure 68). This activates the begin Time and Date elds. 2. Double-click the row in the ULAST list that you want to use as the start date/time for the next unload. This places the last date and last time in the appropriate begin elds.
the Data Hub for database logging option in the
DT5/6xx unload dialog box.) When ticked, DeLogger Pro tracks the last data record unloaded during any unload (this is the ULAST record), and allows a subsequent unload to begin at the next record after the ULAST record. This overcomes data repetition, which would occur if each unload began at the start of memory (unless data is specically cleared from the DT800 memory following each unload).
Allow Through to Data Hub The Allow through to the Data Hub for database logging and ULAST tracking option near the bottom of the rst DT8xx unload dialog box (Figure 68) has two functions:
When ticked, incoming unloading data is also made available to the data hub for logging in a database session (see Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60). Enabling this option slows down the unload process, particularly if DeLogger Pro is running on an older/slower computer, because it requires additional processing of the incoming data. Therefore, unless you specically want to log the unloaded data to a database logging session, leave this option un-ticked. Note that this is separate from the option of storing the unloaded data directly to a predened database unload session (Figure 69). (This is identical to the Allow data to be presented to
UM-0070-A0
dataTaker > Quit Unload

During an unload, choose Quit Unload to stop the return of logged data. There may be a short delay between sending the command and the return of data actually stopping. This is because the Quit Unload command actually stops the copying of logged data into the dataTakers output buffer and any remaining records in the buffer still have to be returned to the host. The Quit Unload command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
66
dataTaker > Clear

The Clear command opens a dialog box that you use to erase various areas of a connected dataTakers memory. In DeLogger Pro, the Clear command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
DT5/6xx DT8xx
Clear (and reformat) the currently-inserted memory card. Clear the user startup job (then no job runs after a firm reset). Clear the user startup defaults (then the DT800 uses factory defaults after a firm reset).
FIGURE 70
Clearing areas of dataTaker memory
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
67
UM-0070-A0
dataTaker > Job To Run On Hard Reset

Species to the connected DT800 the job you want to have automatically loaded and run whenever the DT800 is powered-up or singlepush-reset. Choosing Job To Run On Hard Reset actually sends the RUNJOBONRESET"JobName" command to the current DT800, which sets up the ONRESET.DXC program le (in ash memory) to load the selected job whenever the DT800 powers up or is singlepush reset. Using this feature, you can congure a DT800 to startup as a dedicated instrument, to auto-restart following power failure, and so on. See Startup Job in Part H of the DT800 Users Manual. REMEMBER So that you can select it, the job that you want to make the ONRESET job must be loaded into the DT800 before the Job To Run On Hard Reset command is used.
dataTaker > Reset

Use DeLoggers Reset command to send a RESET command to a connected DT5/6xx dataTaker a RESET command or a SINGLEPUSH command to a connected DT8xx dataTaker.
Send a RESET command to a DT5/6xx.
DT5/6xx DT8xx
Send a RESET command to a DT8xx. Send a SINGLEPUSH command to a DT8xx. Select the job that you want the DT800 to load and run whenever it is poweredup or singlepush-reset. (The drop-down list contains the jobs that are currently defined in the DT800.)
FIGURE 71 FIGURE 72
Reset dialog boxes
In DeLogger Pro, the Reset command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
ONRESET dialog box
UM-0070-A0
68
dataTaker > Run

Use DeLoggers Run command to instruct a connected dataTaker to run (start/go) all of its current schedules, or selected schedules. See also dataTaker > Halt next.
dataTaker > Halt

Use DeLoggers Halt command to instruct a connected dataTaker to halt (stop) all of its current schedules, or selected schedules. See also dataTaker > Run above.
Statistical schedule RS Alarms schedule RA DT5/6xx DT8xx
Statistical schedule RS Alarms schedule RA DT5/6xx DT8xx
Statistical schedule RS
FIGURE 74
Halt dialog boxes
Statistical schedule RS
FIGURE 73
The Halt command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
Run dialog boxes
The Run command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
dataTaker > Set Date/Time

Choose Set Date/Time to set the dataTakers date and time to that of the host computer (as specied in the computers Date/Time control panel). This command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
69
UM-0070-A0
dataTaker > Status

When you choose Status, DeLogger interrogates the connected dataTaker (sends the STATUS command) and returns the information to you in the dialog box that opens. You cannot make any changes here the dialog box is view-only. The Status command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
DT5/6xx DT8xx
Current status of all the DT8xxs switches Current status (verbose) of the DT8xxs more-common switches (status only: switch states cannot be set here)
FIGURE 75
Status dialog boxes (the DT8xx dialog box has six tabs)
UM-0070-A0
70
dataTaker > Test

When you choose Test, DeLogger sends the TEST command to a connected dataTaker. A dialog box opens to display the results. You cannot make any changes here the dialog box is view-only.
Pass Fail
dataTaker > Memory Card

Opens a dialog box in which you perform supervisory tasks on the memory card inserted in the dataTaker that DeLogger is currently connected to. Figure 77 describes the DT5/6xx Card Options dialog box, and Figure 78 describes the DT800 Card dialog box.
DT5/6xx Shows the memory cards current Card ID (change CARDID by typing a new name and clicking Apply or OK). DT5/6xx Shows the number of stored data points and free data points in the memory card.
Overall result DT8xx

STORED DATA FREE DATA
Overall result
FIGURE 76
Test dialog boxes
STORED PROGRAM SPACE
FREE PROGRAM SPACE
The Test command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
Shows the number of program characters used and the program space available (number of characters) in the memory card. (To obtain the actual program listing, send STATUS8 to the dataTaker from the text windows entry screen.)
Tick, then click Apply or OK to clear the data from the Card Memory and/or clear the Card Program.
FIGURE 77
Memory card dialog box DT5/6xx
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
71
UM-0070-A0
DT8xx Selecting CARDID has no effect in the DT800. (The DT800 automatically opens a folder in the nserted memory card that is named after the DT800 serial number, and this cannot be changed by the user.) CARDCLEAR reformats the memory card, which clears all data, alarms and programs from the card. Caution: this option clears the data, alarms and programs of ALL dataTakers that the card has been inserted into. CARDUPDATE moves any data from temporary buffers within the DT800 into the cards data and alarm files, then flushes (clears) the buffers.
Click YES to reformat the card. DeLogger notifies you when these operations have been completed watch the Messages tab of the event logs window
Click OK to transfer the data and alarms to the card.

FIGURE 78
Memory card dialog box DT800
The Memory Card command is duplicated by the button on the dataTaker toolbar (Figure 255 on page 169).
dataTaker > Run Card Program

Starts the execution of the program stored in a memory card inserted into a connected DT5/6xx dataTaker. This command is not supported by DT8xx dataTakers.
UM-0070-A0
72
dataTaker > Prole

The Prole command opens a dialog box (Figure 79) in which you inspect the current prole settings (user startup defaults) of the connected DT800 and change these if required. Note: These settings are for the connected dataTaker, not for the computer on which DeLogger is running. This command is not supported by DT5/6xx dataTakers. they are written into its USER.INI le. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new prole. However, it may be necessary and it is recommended to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new prole. Two ethernet protocols are supported by the DT800 UDP and TCP/IP. Set the UDP Supported eld to YES for the UDP protocol, or set to NO for the TCP/IP protocol. Youll need to consult your network administrator for appropriate settings for IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway Mask. Usually only an IP Address needs to be entered into the DT800. For further discussion of Ethernet addresses, see the DT800 Ethernet Setup topic in Part I of the DT800 dataTaker Users Manual.
Background20 The DT800 supports user-denable proles that determine its startup/reset defaults for various communications capabilities, and its global settings.
These settings are stored in the USER.INI le within the DT800, and are used each time the DT800 performs a SINGLEPUSH reset. (If the DT800 performs a triple-push reset, or is powered-up from cold, then factory default settings stored in the DT800.INI le are used.)
Host Modem Tab

The Host Modem tab of Figure 79 displays the commands and responses that the DT800 will use to manage a modem connected to the Host RS-232 port. The default settings in the DT800 follow the Hayes AT standard, and will be suitable for most modems. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate elds then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI le. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new prole. However, it may be necessary and it is recommended to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new prole. Setting up and using modems with the DT800 is discussed in detail in the RS-232 Modem Connection to the Host Computer topic in Part I of the DT800 dataTaker Users Manual.
Host Port Tab

The Host Port tab of Figure 79 displays the current parameter settings for the Host RS-232 communications interface of the DT800. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate elds then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI le. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new prole. However, it may be necessary and it is recommended to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new prole. If the new prole includes changes that affect the current connection between DeLogger and the DT800 (for example, changing the baud rate while connected by means of the Host RS-232 port), the new prole will compromise the current connection. In such cases you must disconnect DeLogger then reconnect at the new settings. The allowable settings for each parameter are detailed in the DT800 Prole Details table20.
FTP Server Tab

The FTP Server tab of Figure 79 displays the current settings for the File Transfer Protocol server in the DT800. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate elds then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI le. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new prole. However, it may be necessary and it is recommended to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new prole. FTP is provided in the DT800 to allow data les to be downloaded using FTP client software (such as WS_FTP and CuteFTP) and most browsers (which have FTP client capability).
73
UM-0070-A0
Ethernet Tab
The Ethernet tab of Figure 79 displays the current parameter settings for the Ethernet communications interface of the DT800. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate elds then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where
20
See the User Startup Defaults topic in Part H of the DT800 dataTaker Users Manual.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
See Host Port Tab on page 73. See FTP Server Tab on page 73.
See Ethernet Tab on page 73. See PPP Tab on page 75.
See Host Modem Tab on page 73. See ISP Tab on page 75.
FIGURE 79
UM-0070-A0
The six tabs of the DT800 Prole dialog box
74
To enable FTP in the DT800, set the Supported eld to YES. You can also dene a User name and Password if desired. If youre FTP-unloading data through a local Ethernet of RS-232 connection, security may not be an issue and the default username ANONYMOUS and default password PASSWORD can be used. However, you may want security if the DT800 is connected to wider networks.
PPP Tab
The PPP tab of Figure 79 displays the current settings for Point-to-Point Protocol in the DT800. PPP provides the ability to transport TCP/IP data trafc over serial communications links, such as dial-up telephone lines using local and remote modems between a computer and a DT800. To change any of these settings in the DT800 from this dialog box, edit the appropriate elds then click OK. DeLogger sends the new settings to the DT800 where they are written into its USER.INI le. DeLogger then attempts to have the DT800 load the new prole. However, it may be necessary and it is recommended to perform a manual SINGLEPUSH reset of the DT800 to load the new prole. Usually only the IP Address for the host PC and Remote IP Address for the remote DT800 need to be dened. If security is an issue, then a User name and a Password can also be specied.
ISP Tab
The ISP tab is reserved for future use when e-mailing of messages from the dataTaker 800 is implemented.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
75
UM-0070-A0
dataTaker > Upgrade Firmware

This command initiates an upgrade of the rmware (the operating system) of a connected dataTaker. During this process youll need to locate the rmware upgrade le you want to use. Firmware upgrade les are named with the rmware version number followed by a .dxf extension (3040001.dxf, for example). One or more recent .dxf les are placed in the Firmware\MT folder in DeLoggers installation folder (see Figure 7) when you install DeLogger and, when you connect to a dataTaker, DeLogger alerts you if its MT folder contains a newer .dxf le than is currently running in the dataTaker. You can also obtain the latest .dxf le from www.dataTataker.com or your dataTaker representative.
Select the computers serial port to which the dataTaker is physically

connected, then click OK. DeLogger closes any existing connection to the dataTaker (that is, disconnects from the dataTaker) and opens a navigation dialog box at the Firmware\MT folder in DeLoggers installation folder. This is DeLoggers default location for firmware upgrade files (.dxf files).
Open the MT folder, then open the .dxf file you want to
use for the upgrade (youll usually want the latest, the one whose filename is the highest number). If the .dxf file you want to use is located elsewhere, navigate to it now and click Open.
The Upgrade Firmware dialog box opens and the
upgrade begins. During the upgrade, do not remove any cables, and do not reset or power-down the DT800. To watch the progress, expand the dialog box by clicking the Details button.
When the success dialog box opens, the upgrade is complete and the dataTaker has been restarted.
Click OK in the success dialog box to close it, then click

OK in the Firmware Upgrade dialog box. There is no DeLogger connection to the dataTaker after a firmware upgrade so, to use the dataTaker, youll need to reconnect.
FIGURE 80
The rmware upgrade process
UM-0070-A0
76
2-8
THE SEVENTH MENU

form window must be in run mode. See Form > Edit Mode on page 77.
DeLoggers seventh menu changes according to which type of window is front-most (see Figure 8 on page 19): Form for a form window page 77 Chart for a chart window page 85 Text for a text window page 91 Mimic for a mimic window page 97 Spread for a spreadsheet window page 104 Analysis for an analysis window page 115 Program for a DT5/6xx program builder window page 124 Program for a DT8xx program builder window page 126
Edit Menu Commands Remember that when a form window is front-most, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.
Form > Pause

This command stops and starts the input of data to the form window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.
Pause is only available when the window is in run mode
The Form Menu

When a form window (Figure 210) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Form.
(described in Form > Edit Mode next). The Pause command is duplicated by the the form toolbar (Figure 261). button on
If channel data isnt updating in the window, it may be because the window is paused.
Form > Edit Mode

A form window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between edit mode for conguring the window, and run mode for viewing live data as it arrives in the window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu). You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because Edit Mode is ticked on the Form menu the word Edit appears on the windows tab the word Edit appears after the lename in the windows title bar the word Edit appears after the form windows lename on the Window menu. If channel data isnt updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode. The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the on the form toolbar (Figure 261). button
FIGURE 81
DeLoggers Form menu
REMEMBER To congure and edit a form, the window must be in edit mode. To display live data, the
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-8 The Seventh Menu
77
Form > Column Template

This command opens a dialog box in which you select the columns to be displayed in the current form window.
Form > Background Colour

Use this command to choose and apply a background color to the entire form. The dialog box contains a palette of ready-made colors, or you can create your own.
You cant turn off the display of this column.
FIGURE 82
Column Template dialog box Hue
To get help on an item in the dialog box, click the Whats this? button then click the item.
Column Template is only available when the form window is in edit mode.
Click in the
matrix to select a color.
Form > Reset High

This command resets all values in the High Value column to zero. A High Value stays at zero until the next time data is returned for that channel. The Reset High command is duplicated by the on the form toolbar (Figure 261). button
Preview the custom color
FIGURE 83
Saturation
Drag to
select luminosity.
Add the custom color youve defined to the palette.
Form > Reset Low

This command resets all values in the Low Value column to zero. A Low Value stays at zero until the next time data is returned for that channel. The Reset Low command is duplicated by the on the form toolbar (Figure 261). button
Form background color dialog box
Background Colour is only available when the form
window is in edit mode.
Form > Show Headers

Shows or hides the row and column headers in the current sheet of the form window. Its only available when the form window is in edit mode. The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).
Form > Show Gridlines

Shows or hides the cell gridlines in the current sheet of the form window. Its only available when the form window is in edit mode.
UM-0070-A0
78
The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the form toolbar (Figure 261).
Form > Format > Alignment

This command opens the Alignment dialog box, in which you specify the horizontal and vertical placement of data in the selected cells, and enable word wrap.
Form > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the form toolbar (Figure 261).
Form > Format

When the form window is in edit mode, Format opens a submenu of commands for formatting the appearance of the currently-selected cells and the data in them. Remember to select the cells you want before using these commands (selection methods are described in Using the Mouse with Worksheets on page 160).
Turn Word Wrap on to wrap long strings of data onto multiple lines within a cell. (You may need to increase the row height to see the extra lines.)
Applies to adjacent cells General applies the default alignment thats appropriate for the type of data. That is, it causes data that the worksheet recognizes as numbers to be right-aligned text to be left-aligned dates to be right-aligned.
FIGURE 85
Alignment dialog box
The Left, Center and Right horizontal alignment options are duplicated by the buttons on the form toolbar (Figure 261). Note that in addition to the General horizontal format theres also a General data format see Form > Format > General on page 80.
Form > Format > Font

This command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells.
Data formats
FIGURE 84
Form > Format submenu
FIGURE 86
Font dialog box
These settings override the worksheets default font (for the selected cells only). See Form > Format > Default Font on page 81.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-8 The Seventh Menu 79
UM-0070-A0
Form > Format > Border

Choose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currentlyselected cells.
cells. This causes the spreadsheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as a number when the data contains only numeric characters text when the data contains one or more alpha characters a date when the data contains slashes and has the form nn/nn or nn/nn/nn (DeLogger assumes the current year, or the rst day of the month, if you omit either of these). Dont confuse this with the General horizontal alignment option see Form > Format > Alignment on page 79.
Outside border of the group of cells selected in the worksheet Individual sides of each of the cells selected in the worksheet (inside borders of the selected group)
FIGURE 87
Form > Format > Fixed

Formats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no
(zero) decimal places 22. For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235.
Borders dialog box
The Automatic button applies a default color from your current Windows color scheme (usually black21) to the dashed borders.
This command is duplicated by a button on the form toolbar (Figure 261 on page 173).
Form > Format > Pattern

Choose this command to apply a ll colour to the currently-selected cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.
Form > Format > Fixed (1) to (5)

These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679. These commands are duplicated by buttons on the form toolbar (Figure 261 on page 173).
Form > Format > Percent %

Displays numeric values in the selected cells as percentages. DeLogger Pro multiplies each number by 100 and appends the % character. If you enter a percentage into a cell (for example, you type 58.33%), DeLogger Pro recognizes the % symbol and therefore displays the value in percent format, but stores the value in numeric format (for example, as 0.5833).
FIGURE 88
Pattern dialog box
You can preview the effect in the Sample area of the dialog box (Figure 88). The Automatic button applies a default color from your current Windows color scheme (usually black45) to the dashed borders.
Form > Format > Scientic

Displays numeric values in the selected cells in scientic notation. For example, DeLogger Pro displays the value 0.00035 as 3.50E-04 when you apply the scientic format. If you type a number in scientic format (for example, you type 19.1E3), DeLogger Pro recognizes this as scientic format, and displays it as 1.91E+04 and stores it as 19100. You can use E or e when typing in scientic format.
22
Form > Format > General

Applies the General data format the default format thats appropriate for the type of data to the selected
21
The color is dened in Windows Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item dropdown list > Message Box > Font Color.
As you can observe in the formula bar, this formatting does not permanently reduce the precision of the original values.
UM-0070-A0
80
Form > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)

Applies the ISO23 date format to numeric data in the selected cells.
Form > Object

DeLogger Pro allows you to add two types of graphical objects to a worksheet; buttons and checkboxes. You use a button to initiate an action a checkbox to set a true or false state in a linked cell to control worksheet functions (for example, when a checkbox is ticked the worksheet calculates using formula AA, and when un-ticked the worksheet uses formula BB).
Form > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss)

Applies the ISO23 time format to numeric data in the selected cells.
Form > Format > Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000)

Applies the ISO23 date and time format to numeric data in the selected cells.
Form > Format > Locale Date/Time

Applies the date and time formats for your locale that is, the formats specied in your computers Regional Settings control panel.
Available when the form window is in edit mode
Form > Format > Custom Number

If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pros Form > Formats submenu (Figure 84) is suitable, the Custom Number command opens a dialog box that allows you to select others or build your own.
Available when an object is selected (that is, when its selection handles are visible) Ready-made formats Worksheet button Worksheet checkbox (selected) Create your own format. (Select a format above then edit it here, or type your own from scratch.)
FIGURE 90
Form > Object submenu
Filter the entries that appear in the Format list.

FIGURE 89
You can also create charts in a worksheet based on the data in selected cells see Creating a Chart in a Form Window on page 173.
Custom number format dialog box
Form > Object > Insert Button

To create a button on the current worksheet, select Insert button on the form toolbar Figure 261). The cursor changes to a crosshair. Click and drag25 in the worksheet to create the button.
Button from the Object submenu (or click the
Form > Format > Default Font

Opens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current form worksheet. If you have more than one form window, each with several worksheets24, every worksheet can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size. You can override the default font for selected cells see Form > Format > Font on page 79.
To make the button trigger an action, see Form > Object > Attach Action on page 82. To edit the buttons label, see Form > Object > Options on page 82.
Form > Object > Insert Checkbox

To create a checkbox on the current worksheet, select Insert Checkbox from the Object submenu (or click the
23 24
International Organization for Standardization; ISO 8601 Created after double-right-clicking in the form window see Formula One Workbook Designer on page 138.
25
To make the button or checkbox snap to cell boundaries, hold down the Alt key while dragging.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
81
UM-0070-A0
button on the form toolbar Figure 261). The cursor changes to a crosshair. Click and drag25 in the worksheet to create the checkbox.
Form > Object > Attach Action

Ctrl+click a form worksheet button to select it, then choose Object > Attach Action. In the dialog box that opens, type the name of the action to be run when the button is clicked.
Type the name of the action you want the button to trigger.
FIGURE 91
Your error text
The validation rule must return the logical values TRUE or FALSE. Do not use =. The error dialog box opens if the cell data tests FALSE.
Assigning an action to a form worksheet button
FIGURE 93
Validation Rule and error dialog boxes
Form > Object > Options

Ctrl+click a form worksheet button to select it, then choose Object > Options to edit the text that appears on the button.
The validation rule must be a logical expression that evaluates to either TRUE or FALSE. For example, the following rules could be used to validate data entered into cell D9: SUM(B5:B22)>D9 IF(D9>1,D9<60,D9>0) AND(D9>10,D9<20)
Type the button text here.

FIGURE 92
Form > Calculation

The Calculation command opens a dialog box that allows you to turn automatic worksheet recalculation on or off control the number of times a circular reference is calculated (iteration).
See Automatic Recalculation below.
Labelling a form worksheet button
Form > Validation Rule

You can validate data entry into a worksheet cell. This involves creating a formula to test the entered data (a validation rule), and creating a message to display if the validation test fails (error text). The formula must return either TRUE or FALSE: If the formula returns TRUE, the value is entered. If the formula returns FALSE, the validation is not entered and the validation text is displayed in an error dialog box. To do this, select the worksheet cell whose data you want to validate and choose Form > Validation Rule. Type the validation rule and the error text in the dialog box that opens (Figure 93), then click OK. The example shown in Figure 93 limits the range of values that cell B18 will accept to any number greater than 50. The numbers 50 and below cause the validation rule to fail (tests FALSE) and therefore generate the error message. You must then click OK in the error dialog box and change the data in cell B18 so that the rule tests TRUE.
UM-0070-A0
Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.

FIGURE 94
The iteration stops when either of these conditions is met.
Calculation dialog box
Automatic Recalculation In Figure 94, leave Automatic Recalc un-ticked because a DeLogger form window has its own mechanism that updates all of a connections channels (and related cells) in the worksheet at once. This is more effective (faster overall) than ticking Automatic Recalc, which forces updates only one cell at a time.
There may be some situation that requires Automatic Recalc to be ticked (such as data modelling within the form worksheet) but, in general, leave this option OFF.
82
Iteration If you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.
To change these defaults (100 and 0.001), type new numbers in the Maximum Iterations and Maximum Change elds in the Calculation dialog box.
Dont use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLoggers own use.
Form > Set Print Range From Selection

DeLogger prints the rst 64 rows of the current worksheet unless you specify an area for printing. To do this, select the rows or cells you want to print (they must be adjacent) and choose Set Print Range From Selection. Before printing, we recommend that you always use the
File > Print Preview command to check the print range.
Form > Dene Name

For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to an individual cell a range of cells a constant value a formula. Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number. The Dene Name command opens a dialog box (Figure 95) in which you can name the selected item (cell, range, constant or formula) edit the selected items reference type a constant or a formula and name it.
Type a name for the selected cell, range of cells, formula or constant here. Dont use spaces in the name. Add the contents of the Name field to the list.
This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved with the project when you choose File > Save Project 26.
Form > Insert Page Break

If a worksheet is larger than the print area dened in the Print Setup dialog box27, DeLogger automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks. You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Form > Insert Page Break. DeLogger inserts a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the selected cell and a vertical (column) break along the left edge of the active cell. In other words, the active cell becomes the upper-left corner of a new printed page. Darker gridlines indicate the manual page breaks (Figure 160).
Horizontal page break Active cell Vertical page break Manual page breaks are inserted at the top and left edge of the active cell.
FIGURE 96
Delete the selected name from the list.
When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet. Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks. The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see Form > Remove Page Break next), and are saved when you save the project.
26
All the user-defined names in the workbook are listed here.
If you selected a cell or a range of cells, its reference appears in the Formula area. You can edit the reference here. You can also type a formula or constant here and give it a name.
FIGURE 95
Dene Name dialog box
27
Or if you click Yes when asked if you want to save changes when closing a project or exiting DeLogger. The print area depends on the paper size, paper orientation and printer settings.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
83
UM-0070-A0
Insert Page Break is only available when the form window is in edit mode.
Form > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you specify the type of data you want displayed in the current form window Realtime, Logged or both turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid data28 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data29) enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML les) of the current form window enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current form window select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current form window. The command is only available when the form window is in edit mode.
Data filter: select the type of data you want displayed in the window. Tick if you want invalid and partiallyinvalid virtual channel data to be displayed in the window (primary/real data is always displayed). Tick to enable automatic web publishing for this window see Manual and Automatic Web Publishing on page 229. Tick to enable Internet publishing for this window see Internet (WWW) Publishing on page 231.
Form > Remove Page Break

Use this command to remove manual page breaks. To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Form > Remove Page Break. To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Spread > Remove Page Break. See Figure 97.
Active cell location for removing a horizontal page break
Active cell location for removing a vertical page break
Active cell location for removing a horizontal and a vertical page break together
FIGURE 97
The location of the active cell determines which manual page break is removed.
Remove Page Break is only available when the form
window is in edit mode.
Form > Publish

Publish becomes available when youve enabled web
publishing. See Conguration > Web Publish on page 58 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229. The Publish command is duplicated by the the form toolbar (Figure 261). button on
Select the model of dataTaker to be used if the window has any model-specific decisions to make.
FIGURE 98
Form window Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the on the form toolbar (Figure 261).
button
28
29
Invalid and partially-invalid data is virtual channel data that has failed data hub conditional or dependancy tests. Primary data is data direct from a dataTaker channel.
UM-0070-A0
84
The Chart Menu

When a chart window (Figure 214) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Chart.
Chart > Pause

Stops and starts the input of data to the chart window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.
(described in Chart > Edit Mode next). If channel data isnt updating in the window, it may be because the window is paused.
Chart > Edit Mode

A chart window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between edit mode for conguring the window, and run mode for viewing live data as it arrives in the window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Chart menu). You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because Edit Mode is ticked on the Chart menu the word Edit appears on the windows tab the word Edit appears after the lename in the windows title bar the word Edit appears after the chart windows lename on the Window menu. If data isnt updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode. The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the on the chart toolbar (Figure 263). button
FIGURE 99
DeLoggers Chart menu
REMEMBER To congure and edit a chart, the chart window must be in edit mode. To display live data, the chart window must be in run mode. See Chart > Edit Mode on page 85.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
85
UM-0070-A0
Chart > Chart Properties

Opens a dialog box containing ve tabs in which you dene the appearance and action of the current chart window. The Chart Properties command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263), and by doubleclicking anywhere in the chart window.
When ticked, you can drag the current charts time ruler from the left or right vertical axes, or drag its data ruler from the top or bottom horizontal axes see Figure 215. When ticked, small data windows appear (see Figures 214 and 215) that display information relating to the current cursor position. Show/hide the vertical and horizontal overview bars (along the chart axes) see Figure 214. Tick to enable diagonal scaling and shifting by dragging inside the trend area as shown in Figure 219. (Dragging along the scales is not affected.) Click to set the color of the three trend area auxiliary lines see Figure 217. Click to set the color of the overview bars background strips and range strips.
Dont confuse this command with the windows Properties command (covered in Chart > Properties on page 90).
The X-axis can display either real time/date (select time), or elapsed time (select duration). The currently-visible extremes of the charts time axis. To alter this range, edit the values in the from and to fields then click Apply or OK (or drag in the chart window see Figures 218 and 219). Click Capture to place the first and last data point values of the entire charted data set into the from and to fields.
Turn follow mode on or off see Figure 214. This tick box is equivalent to the follow mode button/ indicator in the lower-right corner of the chart window. Click to set the color of the time axis tick marks and text.
Select the data scale whose style or range you want to view or change. The Logarithmic Display option becomes available when you tick Logarithmic for this data axis in the Axis Properties dialog box see Chart > Edit Axis on page 89.
Click to set the color of the selected scales data axis tick marks and text. The currently-visible extremes of the selected scales time axis. To alter this range, edit the values in the from and to fields then click Apply or OK (or drag in the chart window see Figures 218 and 219).
Drag the dialog box aside so that you can see the chart window, then Apply the changes youve made without closing the dialog box.
FIGURE 100
The Chart Properties dialog box (1 of 2) tabs 1, 2 and 3
UM-0070-A0
86
Select which of the charts six data scales you want to adjust. Select a data scale group, such as the left side or the right side of the trend area. Select a column and row (within the selected scale group) for the data scale see Figure 216. When theres more than one data scale in a column, set the relative size of the selected scale. Select the curve whose style and auxiliary lines you want to set. Show or hide the curve. Show or hide the curves auxiliary lines see Figure 217. Set the position of the curves upper and lower auxiliary lines on the data axis.
You can also make these adjustments by dragging the scales handle in the chart window see Figure 216.
Resets the scale positions and sizes to one column and one row for each scale
Select the curve whose style and auxiliary lines you want to set. Apply a data point symbol to the curve (and its auxiliary lines). Click to change the color of the curve and its auxiliary lines.
Drag the dialog box aside so that you can see the chart window, then Apply the changes youve made without closing the dialog box.
FIGURE 101
The Chart Properties dialog box (2 of 2) tabs 4 and 5
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
87
UM-0070-A0
Chart > Select Channels

Opens a dialog box in which you assign a channel (from the current data hub list) to one of the current chart windows 12 curves, and assign each curve to one of the chart windows six data axes. You must do this for each channel you want to plot in the chart window. You can also rename the data axes, change them to logarithmic scaling (instead of linear) and manually set their upper and lower limits.
Select Channels is only available when the chart window
is in edit mode, and is duplicated by the the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
windows 12 curves.
button on
Tick to activate one of the current chart Assign a channel to the curve. Assign the curve to one of six Y axes (data
axes). You can assign more than one curve to each Y axis. To rename the Y axes (default names are Data 1, Data 2,Data 6), make them logarithmic or set their ranges, go to the Axis Properties tab see below.
List of channels currently held in the data hub
Access this tab using the Chart > Select Channels command, or the Chart > Edit Axis command.
Set upper and lower limits for each data axis (or choose Chart > Auto Re-Scale to have DeLogger optimize these limits fot you).
Tick to change the data axis from linear to logarithmic scaling. Rename the charts six data axes.
FIGURE 102
UM-0070-A0
The two tabs of the Chart Channels dialog box
88
Chart > Edit Axis

Opens the chart Axis Properties dialog box. Figure 102 describes its contents.
FIGURE 104
Typical compressed-mode envelope curve
Chart > Clear

Clears all trend graphs from the chart area.
FIGURE 103
Chart Channels Axis Properties dialog box
Edit Axis is only available when the chart window is in
edit mode, and is duplicated by the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
button on the
The Clear command is only available when the chart window is in edit mode, and is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
Chart > XY Chart Chart > Rotate

Rotates the chart windows axes so that new data appears at the top of the window and the chart moves downwards. The Rotate command is duplicated by the the chart toolbar (Figure 263). button on Correlates two sets of data: one on the X axis, the other on the Y axis (Figure 105). Also known as a scatter chart.
Chart > Auto Re-Scale

Re-scales the trend graphs horizontally and vertically so that the entire data set(s) t into the chart area. The Auto Re-Scale command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
Chart > Allow Compressed Mode

If Allow Compressed Mode is ticked, DeLogger automatically displays envelope curves instead of the normal curves when so many data points are displayed that they are no longer distinguishable (that is, when there are more data points to plot than screen pixels to display them). See Figure 104. Compressed mode compartmentalizes blocks of readings and displays the minima and maxima in envelope fashion. It avoids on-screen data loss due, for example, to the same screen pixel being used to display two close data points.
FIGURE 105
Scale handle Typical XY chart (three data sets)
To create a scatter chart, tick XY Chart on the Chart menu, put the chart window into edit mode, and choose Select Channels. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 102), assign a channel to one axis, assign a different channel to another axis, and click OK. Now in the chart window, drag one of the scales (by its handle) down onto the horizontal/time scale. Take the chart window out of edit mode and run data into it. DeLogger Pro retains the time scale across the bottom of the chart to show you the time range of the data plotted
89
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
on the XY chart above. You can adjust this time range to show more or less data as required. To return the chart window to normal operation, un-tick XY Chart on the Chart menu.
Chart > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you specify the type of data you want displayed in the current chart window Realtime, Logged or both turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid data30 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data31) enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML les) of the current chart window enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current chart window select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current chart window. The command is only available when the chart window is in edit mode.
Chart > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the chart toolbar (Figure 263 on page 174).
Chart > Scale Text Up

Increases the size of the axis text (seven steps in total). The Scale Text Up command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
Chart > Scale Text Down

Decreases the size of the axis text (seven steps in total). The Scale Text Down command is duplicated by the button on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
Chart > Publish

publishing. See Conguration > Web Publish on page 58 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229. The Publish command is duplicated by the the chart toolbar (Figure 263). button on
FIGURE 106
Chart window Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the on the chart toolbar (Figure 263).
button
Dont confuse this command with the Chart Properties command (see Chart > Chart Properties on page 86).
30
31
UM-0070-A0
90
The Text Menu

When a text window (Figure 220 on page 144) is frontmost, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Text.
Text > Display Screen > Filter Data

Opens a dialog box in which you select the schedules whose data you want to appear in the text windows display screen.
FIGURE 107
DeLoggers Text menu
Text > Display Screen

When you choose a connection from the Connection drop-down list at the bottom of the text window, data returning to DeLogger from that connection appears in the text windows display (upper) screen see Figure 220.
Text > Display Screen opens a submenu of commands
Available when dataTaker 80/800 Series is selected in the text windows Properties dialog box (Figure 114)
that become available when you click in the text windows display screen.
FIGURE 109
Text display screen schedule lter dialog box
The Filter Data command is duplicated by the on the text display toolbar (Figure 220).
button
FIGURE 108
Text > Display Screen submenu
Text Screen Splitter You can drag the divider between the display screen and the entry screen to change their relative sizes32, and you can click the Splitter View Mode button to ll the text window with the display screen.
REMEMBER To see live data in the text display screen, you must select a connection in the Connection list box at the bottom of the text window (Figure 220).
32
If you want DeLogger to remember these screen sizes, tick Remember splitter panes position in Figure 31 (page 32).
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
91
UM-0070-A0
Text > Display Screen > Display Data As

Opens a dialog box in which you choose the format of data displayed in the text display screen.
Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk

As data arrives in a text windows display screen, DeLogger can append the data to a text le. To initiate this choose Capture Data To Disk and, in the navigation box that opens, either type the name of a new .txt le, or select an existing .txt le to which you want the data appended. Click Save to close the navigation box and begin the data capture.
Makes the date and time more readable (DT5/6xx only) Replay format
Text format
CSV (comma-separatedvariable) format Convert date and time DT5/6xx DT8xx Replay format Text format CSV format 110 Text display screen data format dialog box
FIGURE 111
Select an existing text file, or type the name of a new file.
Text display screen data capture dialog box
While the capture process is active, Capture Data To Disk is ticked on the menu. Choose the command again to stop the capture and automatically save the text le. While Capture Data To Disk is active, the destination le is open in the computers memory and vulnerable if the computer crashes. As crash protection, DeLogger automatically saves the le to the hard disk as frequently as possible. Then if the computer crashes while the le is open, although the Windows operating system may consider the le to be corrupt, youll be able to retrieve most (if not all) of its contents. If you quit (exit) DeLogger with Capture Data To Disk active, the capture le is automatically opened (in append mode) the next time you start DeLogger. To insert your own text into the display screens text, see Text > Display Screen > Insert Text on page 93. The Capture Data To Disk command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264). The buttons appearance changes to pressed during the capture.
FIGURE
The Display Data As command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).
Text > Display Screen > Font

Opens a dialog box (Figure 86) in which you specify the typeface, style and size of text in the text windows display screen.
UM-0070-A0
92
Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer As

Opens a navigation box that allows you to save the contents of the text windows display screen33 as either a text le (.txt), or a comma-separated-variable le (.csv).
Text > Display Screen > Insert Text

To paste extra text at the current cursor location in the display screen, choose Insert Text. A dialog box opens in which you enter the text to be inserted.
FIGURE 113
Text display screen Insert Text dialog box
Once inserted, the extra text is saved along with the current data in the display screen if you choose Text > Display Screen > Save Screen Buffer As (above) or Text > Display Screen > Capture Data To Disk (page 92).
Text > Display Screen > Pause

FIGURE 112
Text display screen save contents dialog box
Pauses and un-pauses the ow of data into the text windows display screen. The Pause command is duplicated by the the text display toolbar (Figure 264). button on
You can choose this command at any time. When you save the project, the contents of the display screen are also saved, and then restored to the display screen the next time you open the project. You can paste extra text (at the current cursor location in the display screen) that is saved along with the contents of the display screen. See Text > Display Screen > Insert Text below. The display screen buffer is limited to approximately 15,000 lines. (When this number is exceeded, DeLogger automatically deletes the rst 2,500 lines.)
Text > Display Screen > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the text windows display screen toolbar (Figure 264).
Text > Display Screen > Clear Screen Buffer

Deletes the entire contents of the text windows display screen33. The Clear command is duplicated by the text display toolbar (Figure 264). button on the
33
That is, the contents of the text windows display screen buffer all the characters you can see and scroll to in the display screen.
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
93
Text > Display Screen > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you specify the type of data you want displayed in the current text windows display screen Realtime, Logged or both turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid data34 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data35) enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML les) of the current text windows display screen enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current text windows display screen select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current text windows display screen.
Data filter: select the type of data you want displayed in the window. Tick if you want invalid and partiallyinvalid virtual channel data to be displayed in the screen (primary/real data is always displayed). Tick to enable automatic web publishing for this window see Manual and Automatic Web Publishing on page 229. Tick to enable Internet publishing for this window see Internet (WWW) Publishing on page 231.
Text > Entry Screen

These commands become available when you click in the text windows entry screen.
FIGURE 115
Text > Entry Screen submenu
Edit Menu Commands Remember that you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with text in text entry screens. See Figure 33 on page 34.
Text > Entry Screen > Command Edit Mode

Toggles the text windows entry screen between two modes: Command-Edit Mode The entry screen behaves like a true text editor the Enter key takes you to the next line. The command is ticked when the screen is in command-edit mode. To-dataTaker Mode The entry screen behaves like a terminal emulator the Enter key sends the line containing the insertion point to the dataTaker (as well as taking you to the next line). The command is un-ticked when the screen is in to-dataTaker mode. The Command Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265). Be aware that although this button has the same icon as the Edit Mode button on other window toolbars, it does not perform the identical function.
Select the model of dataTaker to be used if the text display screen has any model-specific decisions to make.
FIGURE 114
Text display screen Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).
button
34
35
UM-0070-A0
94
Text > Entry Screen > Open Text File

Opens a navigation box that allows you to locate and open a command le (.cmd) a DeTransfer le (.dxc) a text le (.txt) in the text windows entry screen.
Text > Entry Screen > Save Text File

Opens a navigation box that allows you to save the contents of the text windows entry screen as a command le (.cmd) a DeTransfer le (.dxc) a text le (.txt).
FIGURE 118 FIGURE 116
Text entry screen Save Text File dialog box
Text entry screen Open Text File dialog box
The Open Text File command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
The Save Text File command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
Text > Entry Screen > Load DLP Text

Places as plain text (dataTaker command lines) the program from one of the following sources into the text windows entry screen: the current projects program builder windows all jobs in a connected DT800 the ONRESET job in a connected DT800 Select the program source in the dialog box that opens.
All jobs in a connected DT800 The ONRESET program in a connected DT800 Program builder windows in the current project dialog box
FIGURE 117
Text > Entry Screen > Send Line

Sends the current line of text (the line containing the insertion point) to the connection shown in the text windows Connection list box (Figure 220). The Send Line command is duplicated by the on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265). button
Text > Entry Screen > Send Highlighted

Sends text you highlight in the entry screen to the connection shown in the text windows Connection list box (Figure 220). The Send Highlighted command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
Text > Entry Screen > Send Program

Sends the entire contents of the entry screen (send all) to the connection shown in the text windows Connection list box (Figure 220). The Send Program command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
Text entry screen load dataTaker program text
Use this feature to view, analyze, edit and send all in plain text form a program that was originally created graphically (that is, in a program builder window). Program text you load in this way completely replaces the contents of the entry screen. The Load DLP Text command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
95
UM-0070-A0
Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons

The text windows entry screen has ve buttons to which you can assign text strings. When you click one of these buttons (see next topic), DeLogger Pro immediately sends the text string to the dataTaker at the connection selected in the Connection drop-down list (at the bottom of the text window). These buttons are an easy way of sending frequently-used commands. Choose Set User Buttons to open the dialog box in which you assign text to the ve buttons.
Text > Entry Screen > Clear Entry Buffer

Deletes the entire contents of the text windows entry screen36. The Clear Entry Buffer command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265). In case of emergency, the Undo command on the Edit menu returns the screens contents (or use the button on the text entry toolbar).
Text > Entry Screen > Go To Matching Brace

To locate the mate of a brace character ( or ) in a text windows edit screen, click the I-beam cursor on either side of the brace then choose Go To Matching Brace. The cursor jumps to the matching brace. The Go To Matching Brace command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265), and the Go To Matching Brace command on the Edit menu (page 36).
Type the text to send when you click the button.

FIGURE 119
Text > Entry Screen > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the text windows entry screen toolbar (Figure 265).
Text entry screen Set User Buttons dialog box
The Set User Buttons command is duplicated by the button on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
Text > Splitter View

Alternates the text window between splitter view (splits the window to show both the display screen and the entry screen) and display-screen-only view. The Splitter View command is duplicated by the button on the text display toolbar (Figure 264).
Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons

The commands on the User Buttons submenu each send a user-dened text string to the current dataTaker. See Text > Entry Screen > Set User Buttons above.
FIGURE 120
Text > Entry Screen > User Buttons submenu
The User Button 1 to User Button 5 commands are duplicated by the buttons on the text entry toolbar (Figure 265).
36
That is, the contents of the text windows entry screen buffer all the characters you can see and scroll to in the entry screen.
UM-0070-A0
96
The Mimic Menu

When a mimic window (Figure 221) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Mimic.
Selecting, Moving and Resizing Mimics Single-click anywhere within a mimics panel to select the panel. Shading lls the panel and handles appear. Once a mimic panel is selected, you can move it by dragging the shaded area using the arrow keys (nudging37) resize it by dragging its handles using Ctrl+up/down/left/right arrow key to scale up by moving the panels top/bottom/left/right border using Ctrl+Shift+up/down/left/right arrow key to scale down by moving the panels top/bottom/left/right border. Mimic Context Menus (Right-Click Menus) When the mimic window is in edit mode, right-clicking in a blank area of the window pops-up a context menu (Figure 122) that allows you to create mimics and add pictures directly.
FIGURE 122
Right-click the blank mimic work area.
In addition, right-clicking an existing mimic panel or picture pops-up a context menu containing frequentlyused commands (Figure 123).
FIGURE 121
DeLoggers Mimic menu
The Mimic menu contains commands for creating and editing various meters, indicators and buttons that you can use to display live data (realtime and replay data) and perform actions. REMEMBER To create and edit mimics, the mimic window must be in edit mode. For the mimics to display live data, the mimic window must be in run mode. See Mimic > Edit Mode on page 102.
FIGURE 123
Right-click an existing mimic.
Location of New Mimics When you create a new mimic, DeLogger always places it at the top-left corner of the mimic window.
Mimic Attributes (Double-Click Dialog Boxes) Once youve created a mimic, you can modify many of its attributes (range, ticks, colors, axis details,) in dialog boxes that you open by double-clicking a particular area of the mimic. See Mimic Attribute Dialog Boxes beginning on page 146.
37
Advanced users only: use Regedit.exe to set the arrow key nudge distance by modifying the registry key
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\ Mimic\GridGranularity (pixels).
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
97
UM-0070-A0
Mimic > Needle Meters

Panel (with border) containing one needle meter Panel (with border) containing four needle meters
Mimic > Arc Meters
Panel (with border) containing two arc meters Arc meters
FIGURE 126
Panel (without border) containing two needle meters

FIGURE 124
You add arc meters to the current mimic window by creating arc meter panels. Each panel can contain up to ve arc meters, and appear with or without a border. Each arc meter displays one data channel. To add an arc meter panel, choose the Arc Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab species the details of one meter within the panel.
Each arc meter displays one channel. Create up to five meters on a panel. Assign a channel to the arc meter. Add a border to the panel.
Needle meters
You add needle meters to the current mimic window by creating needle meter panels. Each panel can contain up to ve needle meters, and appear with or without a border. Each meter on a panel can display up to ve data channels (that is, ve needles per meter). To add a needle meter panel, choose the Needle Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab species the details of one meter within the panel.
Create up to five meters on a panel. Assign a channel to create a needle on the meter. Add a border to the panel.
See Figure 125.

FIGURE 127
Arc meters dialog box
You can add as many arc meter panels as your computers resources allow. The Arc Meters command is duplicated by the on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button
Display up to five channels (five needles) on each meter.
Mimic > Pie Meters
Text that appears below the meter Units, and date and time can also appear below the meter. FIGURE 125 Needle meters dialog box
Panel (with border) containing two pie meters Pie meters
FIGURE 128
You can add as many needle meter panels as your computers resources allow. The Needle Meters command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266 on page 176).
UM-0070-A0
You add pie meters to the current mimic window by creating pie meter panels. Each panel can contain up to ve pie meters, and appear with or without a border. Each pie meter displays one data channel.
98
To add a pie meter panel, choose the Pie Meters command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab species the details of one meter within the panel.
Each pie meter displays one channel. Create up to five meters on a panel. Assign a channel to the pie meter. Add a border to the panel.
To add a temperature meter panel, choose the Temperature Meter command. In the dialog box that opens, specify the details of the meter within the panel.
Each temperature meter displays one channel. One temperature meter per panel Assign a channel to the temperature meter. Add a border to the panel. See Figure 125.
FIGURE 131
See Figure 125.

FIGURE 129
Pie meters dialog box
Temperature meter dialog box
You can add as many pie meter panels as your computers resources allow. The Pie Meters command is duplicated by the on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button
You can add as many temperature meter panels as your computers resources allow. The Temperature Meter command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
Mimic > Temperature Meter
Mimic > Annunciator

Annunciator panel
Temperature meter panel (with border)
A channels annunciator thresholds are determined by alarm values you set in the data hub (Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels > Properties button).
FIGURE 130
Temperature meter
You add temperature meters to the current mimic window by creating temperature meter panels. Each panel contains one temperature meter, and can appear with or without a border. Each temperature meter displays one data channel.
Low-Low FIGURE 132
Low
Normal
High
High-High
states/colors
An annunciator panel and its ve possible
An annunciator is a panel that changes color according to alarm values (thresholds) that you set for a channel in the data hub see the Alarm Settings screen in Figure 290 on page 214. Note that these data hub alarms are not the same as alarms you incorporate into a program and send to a dataTaker. Each panel contains one annunciator, and each annunciator displays one channels data hub alarm states. To add an annunciator panel, choose the Annunciator command and, in the dialog box that opens, select the
CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-8 The Seventh Menu 99
UM-0070-A0
channel for which you previously activated one or more alarm thresholds in the data hub.
One annunciator per panel Assign a channel to the annunciator.
To add a digital panel, choose the Digital command and, in the dialog box that opens, select the channel to be displayed.
One digital meter per panel Assign a channel to the digital meter.
Select the precision of the annunciator (decimal places).

FIGURE 133
Select the number of decimal places to display in the digital meter.

FIGURE 135
Annunciator dialog box
Digital dialog box
You can add as many annunciator panels as your computers resources allow. The Annunciator command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
You can add as many digital panels as your computers resources allow. The Digital command is duplicated by the the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button on
Mimic > Digital

Digital panel A channels digital thresholds are determined by alarm values you set in the data hub (Configuration menu > Data Hub Channels > Properties button).
Mimic > LED Indicators
Panel (with border) containing four LED indicators

Low-Low FIGURE 134 Low Normal High High-High FIGURE 136
A LED indicator panel
A digital panel and its ve possible states/colors
A digital meter is a panel containing a channels current value. If youve used the data hub to set one or more alarms for the channel, the displayed value changes color according to alarm threshold(s) see the Alarm Settings screen in Figure 290 on page 214. Note that these data hub alarms are not the same as alarms you incorporate into a program and send to a dataTaker. Each panel contains one digital meter, and each meter displays one channels current value (and optional data hub alarm states).
You add LED indicators to the current mimic window by creating LED panels. Each panel can contain up to ve LEDs, and appear with or without a border. Each LED shows red or green depending on whether the current value of its channel is above or below a user-dened threshold.
UM-0070-A0
100
To add an LED indicator panel, choose the LED Indicators command. In the dialog box that opens, each tab species the details of one LED within the panel.
Create up to five LEDs on a panel. Assign a channel to the LED. Add a border to the panel.
You can add as many button panels as your computers resources allow. To move a button panel, drag it by its shaded border. To open its context menu, right-click its border. The Buttons command is duplicated by the the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button on
Mimic > Picture

You can import graphics les into a mimic window to use as a window background or, for example, to build a process owchart that incorporates DeLogger mimics and buttons. To do this, choose Picture and, in the dialog box that opens, locate the image you want to import. DeLogger supports bitmap (.bmp) and Windows Metale (.wmf) graphics le types.
See Figure 125.
The LED is green when the channel data is below the value you type in Threshold, and red when above. To reverse this action, Tick Above Threshold = Green LED. FIGURE 137 LED indicator dialog box
You can add as many LED panels as your computers resources allow. The LED Indicators command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
Mimic > Buttons

Panel containing three buttons
FIGURE 138
Type the path to the picture you want, or click the Browse button and then (in the dialog box that opens) navigate to the file.
A button panel
FIGURE 140
Picture dialog box
A button can send text (a command, for example) to a connected data site, or initiate a DeLogger action, or do both from a single click. You add buttons to the current mimic window by creating button panels. Each panel can contain up to ve buttons. To add a button panel, choose the Buttons command. In the dialog box that opens, specify the label you want to appear on the button text you want sent (and the target data site) when you click the button an action you want run when you click the button.
Create up to five buttons on a panel. Button label Send this text to this destination when the button is clicked. Run this DeLogger action when the button is clicked.
FIGURE 139
DeLogger places the picture in the upper-left corner of the mimic window. After single-clicking the picture to select it, you can resize it (using the handles) drag it to a new location. A selection of pictures is provided in DeLoggers Picture folder (see Figure 7 on page 18). You can add as many pictures as your computers resources allow. The Picture command is duplicated by the the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button on
Mimic > Pause

This command stops and starts the input of data to the mimic window. While Pause is ticked on the menu, data is not updated in the window.
(described in Mimic > Edit Mode next). The Pause command is duplicated by the the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button on
Button panel dialog box
If channel data isnt updating in the mimic window, it may be because the window is paused.
101
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
Mimic > Edit Mode

A mimic window has two modes: edit mode and run mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between edit mode for creating and editing mimics, and run mode for updating mimics with live data as it arrives in the window (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu). You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because Edit Mode is ticked on the Mimic menu the word Edit appears on the windows tab the word Edit appears after the lename in the windows title bar the word Edit appears after the mimic windows lename on the Window menu. If channel data isnt updating in the window, it may be because the window is in edit mode. The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button
Mimic > Arrange

Every mimic panel is created on its own invisible layer. A new mimic is automatically placed in front of (on top of) any existing ones.
Mimic > Edit Panel

Use Edit Panel when you want to alter a mimic panel (for example, add or remove a meter from the panel, assign a different channel, or change a meters label). Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Edit Panel. The panels dialog box opens allowing you to make changes to the mimic details.(The Panel Border setting cannot be changed.)
Edit Panel applies to the currently-selected or to the last-selected if nothing is selected mimic panel or picture.
FIGURE 141
Mimic > Arrange submenu
The Arrange command is also available on a context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel. NOTE Clicking a mimic panel or picture (when the window is in edit mode) automatically brings it to the front.
Mimic > Arrange > Back One

Moves the selected mimic panel one layer back/down.
The Edit Panel command disguised as Properties is also available on a context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel.
Mimic > Arrange > Forward One

Moves the selected mimic panel one layer forward/up.
Mimic > Arrange > Send To Back

Moves the selected mimic panel to the back/bottom of the layer stack.
Mimic > Arrange > Bring To Front

Moves the selected mimic panel to the front/top of the layer stack.
UM-0070-A0
102
Mimic > Lock

Locks the selected mimic panel against deletion and layer changes. To unlock a mimic panel, right-click the mimic and, in the context menu that pops up, choose (un-tick) Lock.
Mimic > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you specify the type of data you want displayed in the current mimic window Realtime, Logged or both turn on the display of invalid and partially-invalid data38 (in addition to the standard display of primary/real data39) enable automatic web publishing (publishing HTML les) of the current mimic window enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current mimic window select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current mimic window. The command is only available when the mimic window is in edit mode.
Mimic > Delete

Deletes the selected mimic panel. If the panel is locked, you must unlock it before you can delete it. The Delete command is also available as Remove on the context menu that pops up when you right-click a mimic panel.
Mimic > Scale Text Up

Increases the size of text in the selected mimic panel (by one point each time you choose the command). Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Scale Text Up. The Scale Text Up command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
Scale Text Up applies to the currently-selected or to the last-selected if nothing is selected mimic panel.
Mimic > Scale Text Down

Decreases the size of text in the selected mimic panel (by one point each time you choose the command). Put the mimic window into edit mode, single-click the mimic panel to select it, then choose Scale Text Down. The Scale Text Down command is duplicated by the button on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
Scale Text Down applies to the currently-selected or to
the last-selected if nothing is selected mimic panel.
Mimic > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
FIGURE 142
Mimic window Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the on the mimic toolbar (Figure 266).
button
Mimic > Publish

publishing. See Conguration > Web Publish on page 58 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229. The Publish command is duplicated by the the mimic toolbar (Figure 266). button on
38
39
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
103
UM-0070-A0
The Spread Menu

When a spreadsheet window (Figure 225) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Spread.
Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Menu In DeLogger Pro, right-clicking in the chart area of the spreadsheet window pops-up a menu that you use to modify the charts general appearance, its data series and some characteristics of specic chart elements, and carry out le-related operations (Figure 144).
Modify a spreadsheet charts type, style, layout and axes. Modify a spreadsheet charts data.
Format specific chart elements.
File-related operations
FIGURE 144
Right-click the spreadsheets chart. See also Figure 228 (page 151).
For more information, see Spreadsheet Chart RightClick Dialog Boxes beginning on page 152.
FIGURE 143
DeLoggers Spreadsheet menu
The Spread menu contains commands for working with static data that you import into a DeLogger spreadsheet window from various sources: a replay le (.dlr, .dcp or .dx? le types40) a text (.txt), Excel (.xls) or Formula One41 (.vts) le DeLoggers data database If youre using DeLogger Pro: Click in the worksheet area of the window to make the majority of the Spread menu commands available. Click in the chart area of the window to make the Chart Type and Publish commands available.
40
Spreadsheet Chart Double-Click Dialog Boxes In addition to the right-click menu, you can double-click individual spreadsheet chart elements (title, data series trace, plot42, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,). This opens dialog boxes that give you comprehensive control of the particular elements characteristics.
For more information, see Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes beginning on page 159.
Edit Menu Commands Remember that when a spreadsheet window is frontmost, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.
41
.dlr DeLogger replay le .dcp DeCipher Plus le .dxd DT800 logged data le .dxa DT800 logged alarms le See Formula One Workbook Designer on page 138.
UM-0070-A0
104
Spread > Load Session From Database

Loads a session43 from DeLogger Pros database into the current spreadsheet windows worksheet. Select the session in the dialog box that opens (Figure 145). If youre using DeLogger Pro and therefore have a chart area visible on the right of the worksheet area (Figure 225), click in the spreadsheet to make Load Session From Database available. The Load Session From Database command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Load Session From File

Loads a replay le into the current spreadsheet windows worksheet. Select the replay le in the dialog box that opens.
FIGURE 146
Load replay le dialog box
If youre using DeLogger Pro and therefore have a chart area visible on the right of the worksheet area (Figure 225), click in the spreadsheet to make Load Session From File available. The Load Session From File command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
42 43
Plot: the group of data series traces An existing unload session or a logging session see Logging Sessions on page 60. Select the Database containing the session whose data you want to load into the current worksheet. Usually youll only have data in the Current database unless youve previously archived it (seeAdministration > Archive Data Database on page 205). Select the Session you want to load into the current worksheet. SQL (Structured Query Language) statements can also be typed into this field to retrieve data from sessions in the selected database: see any general SQL text for statement syntax. Usually the data in a session comes from a single connection, but it can be provided by more than one. Select the Connection that contributed data to the session, or select * to load data from all connections. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.) Usually there is only one job, named JOB1. Select the Job from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all jobs. Select the Schedule from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all schedules. Select the channel Label for which you want to load data, or select * to load data for all channel labels. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.) Click Get Dates. DeLogger Pro searches the data set defined by your selections above and places its start and end date and time into these fields. You can edit these dates and times to further refine the data set to be loaded from the database.
Click OK to begin loading the specified session data into the current worksheet.
FIGURE 145
Load database session dialog box
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
105
UM-0070-A0
Spread > Import Sheet

Imports worksheet-formatted data into the current spreadsheet window.
44
The Excel spreadsheet is automatically named with the time at which you choose Load Into External Spreadsheet (in ISO format for example, 110436.xls if the time is 11:04am) automatically saved in DeLoggers Export folder (see Figure 7 on page 18). The Load Into External Spreadsheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
FIGURE 147
Import worksheet le dialog box
The Import Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Export Sheet

Saves the contents of the current spreadsheet windows workbook as a Formula One (.vts), Microsoft Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm) or tabbed text (.txt) le.
FIGURE 148
Export worksheet le dialog box
The Export Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Load Into External Spreadsheet

Launches Microsoft Excel (if its installed on the computer) and opens a new Excel spreadsheet with the contents of the current DeLogger spreadsheet window (its worksheets and their data) loaded into it.
44
Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls) and tabbed text (.txt) les
Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars
UM-0070-A0
106
Spread > Chart Type

Use the Chart Type commands to choose the way data is presented in the chart area of the spreadsheet window. Click in the spreadsheet windows chart area to make these submenus available.
Spread > Update Chart

Forces an update of the chart, which may be necessary after certain user changes in the spreadsheet windows worksheet. The Update Chart command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Background Colour

Use this command to choose and apply a background color to the current worksheet in the spreadsheet window. The dialog box contains a palette of readymade colors, or you can create your own.
FIGURE 149
Chart Type submenus
There are additional chart types available. You access these by double-clicking beside the trace(s) in the chart, or by right-clicking in the chart area. See The Spreadsheet Graph Area on page 151.
2D Area Bar Line Step Combination Pie Horizontal bar HiLo Gantt Bubble Contour XY (scatter) Polar Radar
FIGURE 150
3D Area Bar Line Step Combination Pie Horizontal bar Cluster bar Gantt Doughnut Surface XYZ (scatter) Preview the custom color
FIGURE 151
Click in the
Hue matrix to select a color.
Saturation
Drag to
select luminosity.
Spreadsheet background color dialog box
Spreadsheet window chart types

UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
107
Spread > Show Headers

Toggles the display of row and column headers in the current worksheet of the spreadsheet window. The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Show Gridlines

Toggles the display of cell gridlines in the current worksheet of the spreadsheet window. The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the spreadsheet windows toolbar (Figure 267).
UM-0070-A0
108
Spread > Format

Use the commands on the Format submenu to congure the appearance of the selected worksheet cells and their contents.
Spread > Format > Alignment

FIGURE 153
Data formats
Dont confuse this with the General data format see Spread > Format > General on page 110.
Spread > Format > Font

FIGURE 152
Spread > Format submenu
This command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells. These settings override the spreadsheets default font (for the selected cells only). See Spread > Format > Default Font on page 111.
Spread > Format > Border

Choose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currentlyselected spreadsheet cells.
FIGURE 154
Borders dialog box
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
109
UM-0070-A0
Spread > Format > Fixed

Formats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no
(zero) decimal places.46 For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235.
Spread > Format > Pattern

Choose this command to apply a ll colour to the currently-selected spreadsheet cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.
This command is duplicated by a button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267 on page 176).
Spread > Format > Fixed (1) to (5)

These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679. These commands are duplicated by buttons on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Spread > Format > Percent %

FIGURE 155
Pattern dialog box
Spread > Format > Scientic

Spread > Format > General

Applies the General data format the default format thats appropriate for the type of data to the selected cells. By default, every new spreadsheet has the General data format applied to all of its cells. This causes the spreadsheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as a number when the data contains only numeric characters text when the data contains one or more alpha characters a date when the data contains slashes and has the form nn/nn or nn/nn/nn (DeLogger assumes the current year, or the rst day of the month, if you omit either of these). Note that theres also a General horizontal alignment option see Spread > Format > Alignment on page 109.
Spread > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)

Spread > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss)

Spread > Format > Custom Number

If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pros Spread > Formats submenu (Figure 152) is suitable, the Custom
45
The color is dened in the Windows Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item dropdown list > Message Box > Font Color.
46
47
As you can observe in the formula bar, this formatting does not permanently reduce the precision of the original values. International Organization for Standardization; ISO 8601
UM-0070-A0
110
Number command opens a dialog box that allows you
to select others or build your own.
Spread > Calculation

Ready-made formats

FIGURE 156
Create your own format. (Select a format above then edit it here, or type your own from scratch.) Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.
FIGURE 157
Spread > Format > Default Font

Opens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current DeLogger spreadsheet window. If you have more than one spreadsheet window, each can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size. You can override the default font for selected cells see Spread > Format > Font on page 109.
Calculation dialog box
Setting Automatic Recalculation If you want DeLogger Pro to recalculate all the formulas on all the spreadsheet window worksheets (and update the cell data) every time a cell is changed, tick Automatic Recalc in the Calculation dialog box. Doing this ensures that calculated data is always up-to-date.
However, for large worksheets and/or many formulas, these recalculations may slow DeLogger Pro down. If you notice this occurring, un-tick Automatic Recalc. (Later, youll need to enable Automatic Recalc to update the worksheets.)
Setting Iteration If you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
111
UM-0070-A0
Spread > Sort

You can sort selected cells in a spreadsheet windows worksheet, and specify up to 10 keys by which the data is sorted. To do this, select the cells that you want to sort then choose Spread > Sort. In the dialog box that opens, specify the criteria for the sort operation and click OK.
Sort by rows or by columns.
48
Spread > Dene Name

For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger Pro spreadsheet window worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to an individual cell a range of cells a constant value a formula. Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number. The Dene Name command opens a dialog box in which you can name the selected item (cell, range, constant or formula) edit the selected items reference type a constant or a formula and name it.
Data is first sorted by Key 1, then by Key 2, and so on. You can apply up to 10 keys to a sort operation.
For each sort key you want to use, type a Key Reference (to define the sort row/column) and select Ascending or Descending .
FIGURE 158
Sort dialog box
To set up the Keys area of the Sort dialog box for a sort operation: Choose Key 1, type (in the Key Reference eld) the reference of a cell in the rst row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key. If you want to sort possible duplicates that may arise in Key 1s row/column, you can specify a secondorder sort. To do this, choose Key 2, type the reference of a cell in the second row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key. Similarly, you can specify a third-order sort, and so on.
FIGURE 159
Dont use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLogger Pros own use.
48
That is, rearrange rows according to the contents of one or more columns, or rearrange columns according to the contents of one or more rows.
UM-0070-A0
112
Spread > Set Print Range From Selection

DeLoggers spreadsheet window prints all the data on the active worksheet unless you specify the cell range(s) you want to print. To do this, rstly select (by dragging) the required cells, then choose Spread > Set Print Range From Selection. The selected cells or ranges dont have to be adjacent. Ways of selecting contiguous and non-contiguous cells are covered in Using the Mouse with Worksheets on page 160. Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the print range. This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved when you save the project. The Set Print Range From Selection command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see Spread > Remove Page Break next), and are saved when you save the project.
Spread > Remove Page Break

Use this command to remove manual page breaks. To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Spread > Remove Page Break. To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Spread > Remove Page Break. See Figure 161.
Spread > Insert Page Break

If a worksheet is larger than the print area dened in the Print Setup dialog box49, DeLogger automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks. You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Spread > Insert Page Break. DeLogger inserts a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the selected cell and a vertical (column) break along the left edge of the active cell. In other words, the active cell becomes the upper-left corner of a new printed page. Darker gridlines indicate the manual page breaks (Figure 160).
Horizontal page break Active cell Vertical page break
FIGURE 160
FIGURE 161
Spread > Publish

publishing. See Conguration > Web Publish on page 58 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229. The Publish command is duplicated by the the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267). button on
Manual page breaks are inserted at the top and left edge of the active cell.
When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet. Before printing, we recommend that you always use the
File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks.
49
The print area depends on the paper size, paper orientation and printer settings.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
113
UM-0070-A0
Spread > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current spread window select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current spread window.
FIGURE 162
Tick to enable Internet publishing for this window see Internet (WWW) Publishing on page 231.
Spreadsheet window Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
button
UM-0070-A0
114
The Analysis Menu

The Analysis menu and analysis windows are only available in DeLogger Pro. When an analysis window (Figure 241) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Analysis.
Edit Menu Commands Remember that when an analysis window is front-most, you can use commands on the Edit menu to work with cells and cell data. See Figure 33 on page 34.
FIGURE 163
DeLoggers Analysis menu
The Analysis menu contains commands for working with static data that you import into a DeLogger analysis window from various sources: a replay le (.dlr, .dcp or .dx? le types50) a text (.txt), Excel (.xls) or Formula One51 (.vts) le DeLoggers data database
Analysis Chart Double-Click Dialog Box Double-click the analysis windows chart area to open the chart Properties dialog box Figure 100 (page 86).
50
51
.dlr DeLogger replay le .dcp DeCipher Plus le .dxd DT800 logged data le .dxa DT800 logged alarms le See Formula One Workbook Designer on page 138.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
115
UM-0070-A0
Analysis > Load Session From Database

Loads a session52 from DeLogger Pros database into the current analysis windows worksheet. Select the session in the dialog box that opens (Figure 164). The Load Session From Database command is only available when you click in the worksheet area of the analysis window, and is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
Analysis > Load Session From File

Loads a replay le into the current analysis windows worksheet. Select the replay le in the dialog box that opens.
FIGURE 165
Load replay le dialog box
The Load Session From File command is only available when you click in the worksheet area of the analysis window, and is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
52
An existing unload session or a logging session see Logging Sessions on page 60.
Select the Database containing the session whose data you want to load into the current worksheet. Usually youll only have data in the Current database unless youve previously archived it (seeAdministration > Archive Data Database on page 205). Select the Session you want to load into the current worksheet. SQL (Structured Query Language) statements can also be typed into this field to retrieve data from sessions in the selected database: see any general SQL text for statement syntax. Usually the data in a session comes from a single connection, but it can be provided by more than one. Select the Connection that contributed data to the session, or select * to load data from all connections. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.) Usually there is only one job, named JOB1. Select the Job from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all jobs. Select the Schedule from which you want to load data, or select * to load data from all schedules. Select the channel Label for which you want to load data, or select * to load data for all channel labels. (SQL statements can also be typed into this field.) Click Get Dates. DeLogger Pro searches the data set defined by your selections above and places its start and end date and time into these fields. You can edit these dates and times to further refine the data set to be loaded from the database.
Click OK to begin loading the specified session data into the current worksheet.
FIGURE 164
UM-0070-A0
Load database session dialog box
116
Analysis > Import Sheet

Imports worksheet-formatted data into the current analysis window.
53
Analysis > Load Into External Spreadsheet

Launches Microsoft Excel (if its installed on the computer) and opens a new Excel spreadsheet with the contents of the current DeLogger analysis window (its worksheets and their data) loaded into it. The Excel spreadsheet is automatically named with the time at which you choose Load Into External Spreadsheet (in ISO format for example, 110436.xls if the time is 11:04am) automatically saved in DeLoggers Export folder (see Figure 7 on page 18). The Load Into External Spreadsheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
FIGURE 166
Import worksheet le dialog box
The Import Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
Analysis > Update Chart

Allows you to adjust the trend layout manually. When you choose Analysis > Update Chart, a dialog box opens in which you can adjust the Y axis visible band and range.
The maxima and minima of the data sets (columns) are compared, and any sets that are withing the Banding % value are placed on the same axis. Others (maximum of 6) are placed on the next available axis.
Analysis > Export Sheet

Saves the contents of the current analysis windows workbook as a Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls), HTML (.htm) or tabbed text (.txt) le.
Range % controls the range of the Y data scales with respect to the data sets.
FIGURE 168
Adjust Y axis banding and range
The Update Chart command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
FIGURE 167
Export worksheet le dialog box
The Export Sheet command is duplicated by the button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
53
Formula One (.vts), Excel (.xls) and tabbed text (.txt) les
2-8 The Seventh Menu 117
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
Analysis > Background Colour

Use this command to choose and apply a background color to the current worksheet in the analysis window. The dialog box contains a palette of ready-made colors, or you can create your own.
Analysis > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the analysis windows toolbar (Figure 268).
Analysis > Format

Use the commands on the Format submenu to congure the appearance of the selected worksheet cells and their contents.
Click in the
Hue matrix to select a color.
Saturation
Drag to
select luminosity.
Preview the custom color

FIGURE 169
Data formats
Analysis worksheet background color dialog box

FIGURE 170
Analysis > Show Headers

Toggles the display of row and column headers in the current worksheet of the analysis window. The Show Headers command is duplicated by the button on the analysis windows toolbar (Figure 268).
Analysis > Format submenu
Analysis > Show Gridlines

Toggles the display of cell gridlines in the current worksheet of the analysis window. The Show Gridlines command is duplicated by the button on the analysis windows toolbar (Figure 268).
UM-0070-A0
118
Analysis > Format > Alignment

Analysis > Format > Pattern

Choose this command to apply a ll colour to the currently-selected analysis worksheet cells, with an overlaying pattern if required.
FIGURE 171
FIGURE 173
Pattern dialog box
Dont confuse this with the General data format see Analysis > Format > General on page 119.
Analysis > Format > General

Applies the General data format the default format thats appropriate for the type of data to the selected cells. By default, every new analysis worksheet has the General data format applied to all of its cells. This causes the worksheet to recognize data you enter into these cells as a number when the data contains only numeric characters text when the data contains one or more alpha characters a date when the data contains slashes and has the form nn/nn or nn/nn/nn (DeLogger assumes the current year, or the rst day of the month, if you omit either of these). Note that theres also a General horizontal alignment option see Analysis > Format > Alignment on page 119.
Analysis > Format > Font

This command opens a dialog box in which you specify the typeface, style and size of data in the selected cells. These settings override the analysis worksheets default font (for the selected cells only). See Analysis > Format > Default Font on page 120.
Analysis > Format > Border

Choose this command to apply thin, thick, dashed or double borders in a variety of colors to the currentlyselected analysis worksheet cells.
FIGURE 172
Borders dialog box

54
CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-8 The Seventh Menu
The color is dened in Windows Display (or Display Properties) control panel: Appearance tab > Item dropdown list > Message Box > Font Color.
119
UM-0070-A0
Analysis > Format > Fixed

Formats (corrects) the values in the selected cells to no (zero) decimal places.55 For example, a value of 1234.56789 becomes 1,235. This command is duplicated by a button on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
Analysis > Format > Custom Number

If none of the number formats on DeLogger Pros Analysis > Formats submenu (Figure 170) is suitable, the Custom Number command opens a dialog box that allows you to select others or build your own.
Analysis > Format > Fixed (1) to (5)

These commands format (correct) the values in the selected cells to 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 decimal places.46 For example, Fixed (1) formats 1234.56789 to 1234.6, and Fixed (4) formats the same value to 1234.5679. These commands are duplicated by buttons on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
Ready-made formats
Analysis > Format > Percent %

FIGURE 174
Create your own format. (Select a format above then edit it here, or type your own from scratch.)
Analysis > Format > Default Font

Opens a dialog box in which you specify the default font (typeface, style and size) for the current analysis window. If you have more than one analysis window, each can have a different default typeface, font style and/or font size. You can override the default font for selected cells see Analysis > Format > Font on page 119.
Analysis > Format > Scientic

Analysis > Format > Date (yyyy/mm/dd)

Analysis > Format > Time (hh:mm:ss)

55
56
As you can observe in the formula bar, this formatting does not permanently reduce the precision of the original values. International Organization for Standardization; ISO 8601
UM-0070-A0
120
Analysis > Calculation

Analysis > Sort

You can sort57 selected cells in an analysis windows worksheet, and specify up to 10 keys by which the data is sorted. To do this, select the cells that you want to sort then choose Analysis > Sort. In the dialog box that opens, specify the criteria for the sort operation and click OK.
Sort by rows or by columns.
Enable or disable calculations that contain circular references.

FIGURE 175
Data is first sorted by Key 1, then by Key 2, and so on. You can apply up to 10 keys to a sort operation.
Calculation dialog box For each sort key you want to use, type a Key Reference (to define the sort row/column) and select Ascending or Descending .
FIGURE 176
Setting Automatic Recalculation If you want DeLogger Pro to recalculate all the formulas on all the analysis window worksheets (and update the cell data) every time a cell is changed, tick Automatic Recalc in the Calculation dialog box. Doing this ensures that calculated data is always up-to-date.
However, for large worksheets and/or many formulas, these recalculations may slow DeLogger Pro down. If you notice this occurring, un-tick Automatic Recalc. (Later, youll need to enable Automatic Recalc to update the worksheets.)
Sort dialog box
Setting Iteration If you want DeLogger Pro to calculate formulas that contain circular references (that is, each formula depends on the other for its result), tick Iteration in the Calculation dialog box. Then DeLogger Pro repeats the calculation (iterates) and stops after 100 iterations or after the calculated values change by less than 0.001 between iterations.
To set up the Keys area of the Sort dialog box for a sort operation: Choose Key 1, type (in the Key Reference eld) the reference of a cell in the rst row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key. If you want to sort possible duplicates that may arise in Key 1s row/column, you can specify a secondorder sort. To do this, choose Key 2, type the reference of a cell in the second row/column you want to sort by, and select Ascending or Descending for this key. Similarly, you can specify a third-order sort, and so on.
57
That is, rearrange rows according to the contents of one or more columns, or rearrange columns according to the contents of one or more rows.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
121
UM-0070-A0
Analysis > Dene Name

For simplicity and convenience when working with a DeLogger Pro analysis window worksheet, you can apply a meaningful name to an individual cell a range of cells a constant value a formula. Then you can use the name to identify and work with the item instead of, say, a complicated formula or a long constant. For example, you can apply the name LtSp to the constant 186000 and use LtSp in formulas instead of the 6-digit number. The Dene Name command opens a dialog box in which you can name the selected item (cell, range, constant or formula) edit the selected items reference type a constant or a formula and name it.
Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection

DeLoggers analysis window prints all the data on the active worksheet unless you specify the cell range(s) you want to print. To do this, rstly select (by dragging) the required cells, then choose Analysis > Set Print Range From Selection. The selected cells or ranges dont have to be adjacent. Ways of selecting contiguous and non-contiguous cells are covered in Using the Mouse with Worksheets on page 160. Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the print range. This print range stays in effect until you select another, and is saved when you save the project. The Set Print Range From Selection command is duplicated by the button on the spreadsheet toolbar (Figure 267).
Analysis > Insert Page Break

If a worksheet is larger than the print area dened in the Print Setup dialog box58, DeLogger Pro automatically divides the worksheet into page-sized sections for printing. It does this by inserting automatic (and invisible) page breaks. You can also specify one or more manual page breaks in a worksheet. To do this, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the page to break, then choose Analysis > Insert Page Break. DeLogger Pro inserts a horizontal (row) break along the top edge of the selected cell and a vertical (column) break along the left edge of the active cell. In other words, the active cell becomes the upper-left corner of a new printed page. Darker gridlines indicate the manual page breaks (Figure 178).
Horizontal page break Active cell Vertical page break
FIGURE 178
FIGURE 177
Dont use the names Print_Area or Print_Titles. These names are reserved for DeLogger Pros own use.
Manual page breaks are inserted at the top and left edge of the active cell.
When you insert a manual page break, DeLogger Pro adjusts the automatic page breaks in the remainder of the worksheet.
58
The print area depends on the paper size, paper orientation and printer settings.
UM-0070-A0
122
Before printing, we recommend that you always use the File > Print Preview command to check the page breaks. The breaks stay in effect until you remove them (see Analysis > Remove Page Break next), and are saved when you save the project.
Analysis > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you enable automatic Internet publishing (publishing HTML les onto a www server) of the current analysis window select the model of dataTaker to be used by the current analysis window.
Analysis > Remove Page Break

Use this command to remove manual page breaks. To remove a horizontal break, select a cell immediately below it then choose Analysis > Remove Page Break. To remove a vertical break, select a cell immediately to its right then choose Analysis > Remove Page Break. See Figure 179.
FIGURE 179
FIGURE 180
Tick to enable Internet publishing for this window see Internet (WWW) Publishing on page 231.
Analysis window Properties dialog box
Analysis > Publish

The Properties command is duplicated by the on the analysis toolbar (Figure 268).
button
publishing. See Conguration > Web Publish on page 58 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing on page 229. The Publish command is duplicated by the the analysis toolbar (Figure 268). button on
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
123
UM-0070-A0
The Program Menu DT5/6xx

When a DT5/6xx program builder window (Figure 244) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Program.
Program > Send To Connection

Sends the dataTaker program that is, everything dened on all tabs of the front-most DT5/6xx program builder to the connected59 dataTaker.
Program > Send To Card On Connection

Sends the dataTaker program that is, everything dened on all tabs of the front-most DT5/6xx program builder to the program area of a memory card inserted in a connected59 dataTaker. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 182), you must select the dataTakers behaviour when it starts the program stored on the card (Mode of Operation area) how the program starts and how the data storage memory operates (Options area).
FIGURE 181
DeLoggers DT5/6xx Program menu
REMEMBER To create and edit a program in a DT5/6xx program builder window, the window must be in edit mode. When youve nished editing, if you want to lock the window against changes, un-tick Edit Mode on the Program menu. See Program > Edit Mode on page 125.
Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that prevent data storage on the card when that program runs (data is stored in internal memory only). Select this option where a single card is created to be used to program a number of dataTakers with the same program. Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that clear any existing data from the card when that program runs. Select this option where a single card is created to program a single dataTaker, discarding old data at each restart. Instructs the dataTaker to store the sent program onto the card, and adds commands that append new data to any existing data in the card each time the program runs. The program must not change in any way between successive restarts, otherwise appending the data becomes invalid. This function requires ROM Version 4.00 or later. Select this option where a single card is created to program a single dataTaker, retaining all old data at each restart. For example, this option allows you to set up a remote dataTaker that automatically restarts and continues logging after recovery from a power failure.
59
If more than one connection is active, a dialog box opens asking you to choose a connection.
When ticked, the /O command is added to the program to enable newest data to overwrite oldest data when the memory card becomes full. If unticked, the /o command is added, and data logging stops when the card fills. When ticked, the /Q command is added to the program to enable the dataTaker to be programmed again from the card without first removing and re-inserting the card. If unticked, the dataTaker can only be programmed once from the card while inserted. When ticked, a LOGON command is added to the card program to enable data logging when the program runs.
FIGURE 182
UM-0070-A0
DT5/6xx Card Management dialog box
124
Program > Arrange Channels

Tidies the channel icons in the current tab of the program builder by arranging them in a single vertical column. If Sort by Channel Number (Figure 183) is ticked, the Arrange Channels command also sorts the channel icons by channel number. The Arrange Channels command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
You can quickly see when a window is in edit mode because Edit Mode is ticked on the Program menu the word Edit appears on the windows tab the word Edit appears after the lename in the windows title bar the word Edit appears after the windows lename on the Window menu. The Edit Mode command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
Program > Next Analogue Channel

Adds a new analog channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest analog channel number already used on the tab. The Next Analogue Channel command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
Program > View Toolbar

Shows or hides the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
Program > Properties

The Properties command opens a dialog box in which you set options for sorting and copying channel icons change the look of the current DT5/6xx program builder window.
See Program > Arrange Channels on page 125. When you create a new channel icon by copying and then pasting an existing one, DeLogger automatically increments the channel number of the pasted icon if this option is ticked.
Program > Next Digital Channel

Adds a new digital channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest digital channel number already used on the tab. The Next Digital Channel command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
Program > Next HSC Channel

Adds a new HSC (High Speed Counter) channel icon to the current program builder tab and automatically numbers it one higher than the highest HSC channel number already used on the tab. The Next HSC Channel command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
Program > Edit Mode

A DT5/6xx program builder window has two modes: edit mode and locked mode. Choosing the Edit Mode command toggles the window state between edit mode for creating and editing a dataTaker program in the window, and locked mode channels cant be changed (Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Program menu).
See your changes without closing the dialog box.
FIGURE 183
DT5/6xx program builder Properties dialog box
The Properties command is duplicated by the button on the DT5/6xx program builder toolbar (Figure 269).
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
125
UM-0070-A0
The Program Menu DT8xx

When a DT8xx program builder window (Figure 246) is front-most, DeLoggers seventh menu changes to Program.
Program > Send To Connection

You use the command Send To Connection to send a program to a connected DT800. Because the DT800 runs according to one program at a time, whenever you use Send To Connection, the newlysent program automatically replaces any existing program in the DT800. You must use this command whenever you need to reprogram the DT800: to send an entirely new program, or to simply make minor changes to the DT800s operation (you do this by altering its current program in the program builder then re-sending the program). If a project contains more than one program builder window, make sure the one you want to send is frontmost before choosing Send To Connection. Single-click the window to be certain.
FIGURE 184
DeLoggers DT8xx Program menu
Whats Sent When you send a program, you send all settings on every tab in the current program builder window. So in addition to scan schedules, youre also sending any span, polynomial and thermistor denitions youve created on these tabs the DT800 conguration settings on the Switches, Parameters and Global tabs.
Program > Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job

Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job does the same as Send To Connection (see previous topic) but has an
extra function: in addition to sending the current program, it also sets it to be the DT800s startup program/job. The startup program is stored in the le ONRESET.DXC (in the DT800s SRAM memory) and is automatically loaded and run by the DT800 every time it restarts.
UM-0070-A0
126
2-9
THE REPORTS MENU

Reports > Alarms
This submenu contains commands that run four installed alarm reports on the data database.
You can run and print reports on selected subgroups of the information stored in DeLoggers data database60.
FIGURE 186 FIGURE 185
Reports > Alarms submenu
DeLoggers Reports menu
DeLogger is supplied with eight standard reports, which you run using the Reports > Alarms submenu (Figure 186) the Reports > Errors submenu (Figure 188). These are all installed reports61. In addition to these eight reports, DeLogger Pro has two more installed reports that you run from the Reports > Log Files submenu (Figure 190) any number of secondary reports61 (also called database reports) that you run from the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192). Figure 275 (page 201) summarizes these concepts. For more information see Reports on page 199.
FIGURE 187
Alarm reports
Reports > Alarms > Full

Creates a report of all dataTaker alarm messages.
Reports > Alarms > Today

Creates a report of todays dataTaker alarm messages.
Reports > Alarms > Week To Date

Creates a report of dataTaker alarm messages received this week.
Reports > Alarms > Month To Date

Creates a report of dataTaker alarm messages received this month.
60 61
See Databases on page 226. See Installed Reports and Secondary Reports on page 200.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-9 The Reports Menu
127
UM-0070-A0
Reports > Errors

This submenu contains commands that run four installed error reports on the data database
Reports > Log Files

This DeLogger Pro submenu contains commands that run two installed log reports on the data database.
FIGURE 188
Reports > Errors submenu
FIGURE 190
Log Files submenu
FIGURE 191
Schedule log and action log reports
Reports > Log Files > Schedule

Whenever you use DeLogger Pros Schedule software (see Schedule Utility on page 203), the details are logged in the data database. The Reports > Log Files > Schedule command generates a report of this information.
FIGURE 189
Error reports
Reports > Log Files > Action

Whenever an action runs, DeLogger Pro logs the details in the data database. The Reports > Log Files > Action command generates a report of this information. (Actions are covered in Conguration > Actions on page 55.)
Reports > Errors > Full

Creates a report of all dataTaker error messages.
Reports > Errors > Today

Creates a report of todays dataTaker error messages.
Reports > Errors > Week To Date

Creates a report of dataTaker error messages received this week.
Reports > Errors > Month To Date

Creates a report of dataTaker error messages received this month.
UM-0070-A0
128
Reports > Database Reports

The Database Reports command opens a dialog box sequence in which you select a secondary report62 (also called a database report) ne-tune the selected reports database, parameter and printer details (if required) run the report.
Secondary reports (created from installed reports see Figure 61)
Identifiers see Figure 61
Description of selected secondary report see Figure 61
See How Many, What, Where? on page 226. Change the reports default parameters if you want. Change the reports default printer if you want.
FIGURE 192
screens)
Choosing and running a secondary report (two
You can type the parameters directly, or select them from the drop-down lists. Each drop-down list contains any session names stored in the database DeLogger Pro global formulas (see Global Formulas on page 202).
62
See Installed Reports and Secondary Reports on page 200.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-9 The Reports Menu
129
UM-0070-A0
2-10
THE TOOLS MENU

Tools > Internal Cards
FIGURE 193
DeLoggers Tools menu

FIGURE 194
DeLoggers Tools menu provides functions for conguring input/output cards installed into the ISA bus of the computer reading data logged onto memory cards into data les that can be used as replay les within DeLogger. All dataTaker use the same PCMCIA/PC Card format of memory cards, but use different memory technologies. The DT5/6xx dataTakers use SRAM memory cards, while DT8xx dataTakers use ATA FLASH memory cards. These functions can only be used if your computer has PCMCIA/PC Card slots, and has appropriate drivers installed to support SRAM or ATA FLASH memory cards inserted into these slots. Desktop computers generally do not have PCMCIA/PC Card slots, however external adaptors are available for reading ATA FLASH memory cards (there are no adaptors now available for SRAM memory cards). These adaptors connect to the parallel or USB port of the computer, and a driver must be installed to support the adaptor. Notebook computers usually have one or two PCMCIA/PC Card slots, and most have drivers to support ATA FLASH memory cards inserted into these slots. However, not all notebook computers have drivers to support SRAM memory cards you will need to consult your computer documentation for details. Generally however, SRAM drivers are only available under the Windows 95 OSR2 and the Windows 98 SE operating systems. Therefore, before using any of the following memory card functions, you will rst need to determine if your computer is suitably equipped.
Tools > Internal Cards submenu
Select the Internal Cards menu option to congure input/output cards installed into the ISA bus of the computer. Only the Amplicon PC263 relay output card is supported by DeLogger to date, and the appropriate driver must rst be installed before proceeding with this function. Refer to the driver documentation supplied with the card for further details.
Tools > Memory Cards
FIGURE 195
Tools > Memory Cards submenu
Select the Memory Cards menu option to read data from memory cards and select 5/6xx series if you wish to read data from an SRAM memory card used in a dataTaker 50/500/600 series data logger, or select 8xx series if you wish to read data from an ATA FLASH memory card used in a dataTaker 800 series data logger.
Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx Series

Selecting 5/6xx series provides the following options
FIGURE 196
Tools > Memory Cards > 5/6xx series submenu
Reading data from a dataTaker 50/500/600 series SRAM memory card is a two-step process: Firstly, a binary image of the memory card is copied into an image le (lename.img), which is stored in the \DeLogger\Pcmcia folder.
UM-0070-A0
130
Then, the image le is translated into a DeLogger replay le (lename.dlr), which is stored in the \DeLogger\Replay folder. These processes can be performed separately by selecting Copy then Translate options, or performed as a single process by selecting Create Replay File option.
process. Tick this box if you dont wish to see the DOS window. Clear Card after Copy tick this box if you want DeLogger to erase the data from the memory card after copying the image. When you have completed the input elds, click on the Apply button to perform the image copy. When the copy is completed, click the close button for the DOS window, and click the OK button to close this dialog box. The memory card can be removed after the copy process.
The Copy Option

The Copy option opens the following dialog box
The Translate Option

The Translate option opens the following dialog box
FIGURE 197
5/6xx series > Copy
with the following input elds: Copy to Filename type in a lename, up to 8 characters with no extension, that the memory card image will be copied to. The le is given a .img extension, and stored in the \DeLogger\Pcmcia folder. Monitor Sockets computers usually have 4 logical sockets which relate to the physical PCMCIA/PC Card slots. Unless you know specically which socket relates to the slot that your memory card is inserted into, then leave all sockets ticked and DeLogger will scan for the memory card. Card Size click on the down arrow button, and select the size of your memory card from the dropdown list. Overwrite tick this box if the new image le is allowed to overwrite an older image le of the same name. Quiet Mode the Copy process runs a utility called DeCopy.exe, which is a low-level DOS command that runs in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy
FIGURE 198
5/6xx series > Translate
with the following input elds. The Translate process is performed on an image le previously copied from a memory card. Operation click on the down arrow button, and select the operation to perform. The operations available are UNLOAD translate the logged data from the image le into an ASCII text le, in the DeLogger replay format CARDID translate the memory card identity STATUS2 translate the original program STATUS7 translate the number of data points free, stored in the memory card STATUS8 translate any program stored on the memory card STATUS11 translate a list of the schedules and channels returning data STATUS13 translate the date and time for the rst and last data points stored Inle click on the down arrow button, and select the image le to translate from the drop-down list.
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-10 The Tools Menu
131
UM-0070-A0
Outle enter a lename, up to 8 characters with no extension, that the results of the Operation will be written into. The lename will be given a .dlr extension, and stored in the \DeLogger\Replay folder. Overwrite tick this box if the new Outle le is allowed to overwrite an older Outle le of the same name. Quiet Mode the Translate process runs a utility called DeImage.exe, which is a low level DOS command that runs in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy process. Tick this box if you dont wish to see the DOS window. When you have completed the input elds, click on the Apply button to perform the translation. When the translation is completed, click the close button for the DOS window. You can now perform other translations, or click the OK button to close this dialog box.
Overwrite tick this box if the new replay le is allowed to overwrite an older replay le of the same name. Quiet Mode the process runs the DeCopy.exe and DeImage.exe utilities in a DOS window. Normally DeLogger opens the DOS window, so that you can observe the copy process. Tick this box if you dont wish to see the DOS window. When you have completed the input elds, click on the Apply button to perform the copy and translation. You will be prompted to close the respective DOS windows. Click the OK button to close this dialog box.
Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx Series

Selecting 8xx series provides the following option:
The Create Replay File Option

The Create Replay File option opens the following dialog box
FIGURE 200
Tools > Memory Cards > 8xx series submenu
Click on Unload Jobs which opens the following dialog box:
FIGURE 199
5/6xx series > Create Replay File
with the following input elds. The Create Replay File process combines the Copy and Translate processes described above. Copy to Filename enter a lename, up to 8 characters with no extension, that the unloaded data will be written into. The lename will be given a .dlr extension, and stored in the \DeLogger\Replay folder. Card Size click on the down arrow button, and select the size of your memory card from the dropdown list.
UM-0070-A0
FIGURE 201
8xx series > Unload Jobs dialog box
Unloading data from a dataTaker 800 series memory card is a single-step process, unlike that for unloading dataTaker 50/500/600 series memory cards. Data can be written into a DeLogger replay le which is stored in the \DeLogger\Replay folder, or loaded directly into a DeLogger spread view, or loaded directly into Microsoft Excel. Drive the Windows driver for PCMCIA/PC Card
132
ATA FLASH memory cards congures the memory card slot as an IDE drive, and appears in the My Computer folder in the same way as any hard drive. The memory card drive has a drive letter, which will vary depending on the number of other hard disks, CD-ROM drives, Zip drives, etc. installed in the computer. For example, a notebook computer with one hard drive (C:) and one CD-ROM drive (D:) usually congures the memory card slot as drive E:. Click on the down arrow button and select the drive letter for the memory card slot from the drop-down list. DeLogger will then list the contents of the memory card in the eld below, listing the serial number for DT800(s) that the card has stored data from, and for each serial number the jobs for which data is stored. Click on the jobname for which you want to unload the data from the memory card. Save To to unload the memory card data into a DeLogger replay le, click on the Replay File button. The replay lename is automatically generated from
SerialNumber-JobName-YearMonthDateHourMinuteSecond.dlr
Excel will now open with the data loaded into the spreadsheet (the data is loaded into Excel via the spread view). If your intention is to load the data into a spread view, the spread view will now open with the data loaded into the spreadsheet. Click the OK button to close the dialog box (Figure 201).
as shown in the message box on completion:
FIGURE 202
Replay le created
Click OK to close the message box. Load To to load the data from the memory card directly into Microsoft Excel or a DeLogger spread view, click on the Excel or the Spread View button. This will open a dialog similar to
FIGURE 203
Select Spread Document dialog box
in which are listed the spread views currently open in DeLogger. Click on the spread view you wish to load the data into, and click the OK button. The unload process rst creates a DeLogger replay le, and a message box is displayed showing the automatically-generated lename (Figure 202). Click OK. If your intention is to load the data into Excel, then
CHAPTER 2: MENUS 2-10 The Tools Menu 133
UM-0070-A0
2-11
THE WINDOW MENU

Cascade
List of projects windows (choose one to bring it to the front)
Tile vertical
FIGURE 204
DeLoggers Window menu Tile horizontal
Window > Cascade

Neatens the projects non-minimized windows by arranging them as shown in Figure 205.
Window > Tile Vertical

The effect of tiling many windows (horizontal or vertical)
Window > Tile Horizontal

Window > Arrange Icons

Arranges minimized (iconized) windows across the bottom of the workspace.
FIGURE 205
Arranging project windows
Window > Project Windows (List)

To quickly locate a window by bringing it to the front, choose its name from this list (Figure 204). Clicking a windows tab (Figure 1 on page 13) does the same thing.
Window > More Windows

This command appears on the menu when a project contains more than nine windows. It opens a dialog box that lists all of the current projects windows. Select a window name and click OK to bring it to the front.
FIGURE 206
UM-0070-A0
Window > More Windows submenu
134
2-12
THE HELP MENU

DeLoggers Help menu
2-13
THE TASKBAR MENU
FIGURE 207
Whenever DeLogger is running, its icon appears in your computers system tray at the right-hand end of the Windows taskbar. Right-clicking the icon pops-up DeLoggers taskbar menu.
Help > About DeLogger

This command opens an information box that contains contact links and DeLoggers version details.
Hyperlink to the dataTaker internet site DeLogger version information E-mail the author of DeLogger.
FIGURE 208
System tray Taskbar

FIGURE 209
Right-click the DeLogger icon. DeLoggers taskbar menu
You can customize this menu see Figure 30 (page 31).
Help > About DeLogger information box
CHAPTER 2: MENUS
2-12 The Help Menu
135
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 3
WINDOWS
3-1
THE PROJECT WINDOW
Figure 1 (page 13) describes DeLoggers project window.
3-2
THE FORM WINDOW

Each channel of incoming data is assigned to a row in the form windows worksheet.
Formula bar (edit mode only)
A DeLogger form window is a dynamic (live) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay les and database sessions).
Co-ordinates of the current cell are displayed here (edit mode only).
Channel data is displayed one row per channel.
Form toolbar The buttons duplicate many of the commands on the Form menu. See Figure 261 on page 173.
Select a worksheet by clicking its tab. Rename a worksheet by double-clicking its tab (the Sheet Name dialog box opens).
Drag the splitter bar to shrink or enlarge the tab space.
Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them (for example, Sheet > Insert Sheet, Sheet > Delete Sheet, Data > Recalc). See Figure 213 on page 138.
FIGURE 210
DeLoggers form window
UM-0070-A0
136
Edit appears in the title bar when the window is in edit mode.
Connection Schedule (A, B, C,K) Channel label (from the channels Label column in the program builder) Adjust the width of a column by dragging its right border in the header row (the cursor changes to ). Latest value Trend indicator (Up/Down) Timestamp of latest value Maximum and minimum channel values
To rename a column, double-click the column header (the Header Name dialog box opens). To assign a different channel to a row already in use, double-click the rows Channel cell (the Select Channel dialog box opens). To replace the row number with a custom name, double-click the row number (the Header Name dialog box opens). To assign a channel to an empty row, single-click the row number or in the empty channel column. In the dialog box that opens, select the channel you want to display in that row.
Form window toolbar see Figure 261 (page 173)
FIGURE 211
A form window in edit mode (Form > Edit Mode is ticked)
The formula bar disappears when the form window is in run mode.
FIGURE 212
Form window toolbar see Figure 261 (page 173) A form window in run mode (Form > Edit Mode is un-ticked)
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-2 The Form Window
137
UM-0070-A0
Formula One Workbook Designer

If you need additional worksheet power, double-rightclick a DeLogger worksheet (in a form, chart or analysis window). The worksheet opens in a Formula One Workbook Designer window, which has additional commands if you need them (such as Insert Sheet and Delete Sheet. The Workbook Designers functionality is similar to that of Microsoft Excel.
DeLogger worksheet
Double-right-click in a DeLogger worksheet to open the worksheet in a Formula One Workbook Designer window. Formula One Workbook Designer
FIGURE 213
Opening a Formula One Workbook Designer window
UM-0070-A0
138
3-3
THE CHART WINDOW

Figures 214 to 217 describe the chart windows features, and Figures 218 and 219 explain how to use the mouse for horizontal, vertical and diagonal scaling.
A DeLogger chart window is a dynamic (live) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay les and database sessions). It displays trend graphs like a chart recorder.
Drag a scales handle to relocate the scale. You can, for example, drag a scale to the other side of the trend area, or place one above another to separate the trends (see the chart window immediately below). The vertical overview bar shows the currently-visible range (the gray bar) and the maximum-to-minimum range of the data (the I bar) in proportion to the maximum displayable vertical range of the chart (the full height of the trend area).
Individual graph show/hide buttons
The horizontal overview bar shows the currently-visible section of data (the gray bar) in proportion to the entire data set (the full width of the trend area).
Relocate a graph and its scale by dragging its scale handle see also Figure 216. Edit appears after the window name in the title bar when the window is in Edit Mode.
A small data window appears when you rest the mouse over a graphs Show/hide button.
Axis label Channel label (from the channels Label column in the program builder) Schedule (A, B, C,K) Connection The graphs data point symbol (if youve applied one double-click in the trend area and go to the Curves tab in the dialog box that opens; Figure 101) Follow mode button and indicator. The chart moves (like the paper in a chart recorder) and new data enters the right-hand side of the trend area when when this button is pressed (lit).
Chart toolbar The buttons duplicate commands found on the Chart menu (see Figure 263 on page 174). Drag it from its docked position to create a floating toolbar.
FIGURE 214
Chart window features

UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-3 The Chart Window
139
appears beside the cursor when its over the ruler.
FIGURE
A small data window shows the time or data coordinate. 215 Chart window rulers (for displaying precise time and data coordinates)
Drag the time ruler from the left or right vertical axis.
Drag the data ruler from the top or bottom horizontal axis.
This data scale group contains two columns. The second column contains three rows.
Each data scale has a handle that you use to drag the scale to a different column, row or scale group.
This data scale group contains two columns. Each column contains one row.
FIGURE 216
Chart window scale groups, columns, rows and handles
UM-0070-A0
140
Trend area auxiliary lines Three horizontal dashed lines that divide the trend area into four equal sections (for general visual comparison of trends). To change the color of these lines, click the Auxiliary Lines button in the General Colors area of the Trend tab shown in Figure 100 on page 86.
Curve auxiliary lines A pair of horizontal dashed lines (upper and lower) for each curve. You set their positions (to indicate limits, thresholds or ranges), and show/hide them, in the Auxiliary Lines area of the Curves tab shown in Figure 101 on page 87. For easy identification, the color (and symbol, if youve applied one see Figure 101 of each pair of lines matches ) their curve.
FIGURE 217
Chart window auxiliary lines
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
141
UM-0070-A0
HORIZONTAL SCALING Rest the mouse over the horizontal scale (the cursor changes to
) then click and drag as described here.
Horizontal scaling from the right
Horizontal scaling from the left
E X PA N D
COMPRESS
COMPRESS
E X PA N D
FIXED
FIXED
Move the left end of the scale by dragging horizontally with the left mouse button pressed. The right-hand end of the scale stays fixed while you drag. For finer control, start dragging further from the fixed end.
Move the right end of the scale by dragging horizontally with the right mouse button pressed. The left-hand end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.
VERTICAL SCALING Rest the mouse over the vertical scale (the cursor changes to then click and drag as described here. The upper end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.
FIXED COMPRESS
E X PA N D
Move the lower end of the scale by dragging vertically with the left mouse button pressed.
Vertical scaling from the top
UP
Shifting
DOWN
For finer control, start dragging further from the fixed end.
E X PA N D
LEFT
RIGHT
The lower end of the scale stays fixed while you drag.
FIXED
FIGURE 218
UM-0070-A0
Chart window mouse power (1 of 2) horizontal/vertical scaling, and horizontal/vertical shifting
142
COMPRESS
Move the upper end of the scale by dragging vertically with the right mouse button pressed.
Vertical scaling from the bottom
VERTICAL SHIFTING Rest the mouse over the vertical scale (the cursor changes to ), then hold down HORIZONTAL SHIFTING both mouse buttons Rest the mouse over the horizontal and drag vertically. scale (the cursor changes to ), then hold down both mouse buttons and drag horizontally.
Re-scale from the upper right-hand corner by dragging diagonally with the left mouse button pressed.
For finer control, start dragging further from the fixed corner.
COMPRESS
E X PA N D
Re-scale from the lower left-hand corner by dragging diagonally with the right mouse button pressed.
The lower left-hand corner stays fixed while you drag.
FIXED
COMPRESS
E X PA N D
E X PA N D
COMPRESS
DIAGONAL SCALING Drag inside the trend area (instead of along the scales) with the appropriate mouse button pressed.
FIXED
E X PA N D
COMPRESS
The upper right-hand corner stays fixed while you drag.
LEFT DOWN
UP
RIGHT
DIAGONAL SHIFTING Drag inside the trend area (instead of along the scales) with both mouse buttons pressed.
FIGURE 219
Chart window mouse power (2 of 2) diagonal scaling and diagonal shifting
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
143
UM-0070-A0
3-4
THE TEXT WINDOW

NOTE Commands activated by some of the buttons on the entry screen toolbar are only available on this toolbar. They are not available anywhere else in DeLogger. See Figure 265 on page 175.
The text windows main functions are to display incoming realtime or historical data live (text form) in the display screen to type commands to send to the dataTaker (an alternative to the program builder if youre familiar with the dataTaker command language) in the entry screen.
The display screen toolbar is always available.
Display screen
Bookmark

The entry screen toolbar is available when youve clicked in the entry screen.
Entry screen

FIGURE 220
Data from the selected Connection appears in the display screen.
The name of the last file opened or saved in the display screen appears here.
The name of any capture file in use by the display screen appears here.
DeLoggers text window
UM-0070-A0
144
3-5
THE MIMIC WINDOW
A DeLogger mimic window is a dynamic (live) display of data from realtime data sources, or from historical data sources (replay les and database sessions). In a mimic window, you view incoming data on various types of meters, add buttons that perform actions, and add background graphics. You can create a complete on-screen instrument/equipment panel using these tools.
Meter Panel Background image
Mimic toolbar The buttons duplicate many of the commands on the Mimic menu. See Figure 266 on page 176.
FIGURE 221
DeLogger mimic window examples
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-5 The Mimic Window
145
UM-0070-A0
Mimic Attribute Dialog Boxes

Some mimics have attributes that you modify using dialog boxes that are only accessible by double-clicking specic areas on the mimic. These are shown in Figures222, 223 and 224. Single-click to identify the area (a hollow rectangle appears momentarily), then double-click the area to open the corresponding attributes dialog box.
Circular meters Double-click
Double-click
FIGURE 222
UM-0070-A0
Mimic attribute dialog boxes (1 of 3)
146
Double-click Double-click Double-click Temperature meter
Double-click
FIGURE 223
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-5 The Mimic Window
147
UM-0070-A0
Annunciator Double-click
Digital meter No attribute dialog boxes, but the Edit Panel, Scale Text Up and Scale Text Down commands are available.
LED indicator
Double-click
Button No attribute dialog boxes, but the Edit Panel, Scale Text Up and Scale Text Down commands are available.
FIGURE 224
UM-0070-A0
148
3-6
THE SPREADSHEET WINDOW

You can also load the contents of the spreadsheet windows current worksheet into Microsoft Excel (if its installed on your computer) with a single command export the contents of the spreadsheet windows current worksheet in a variety of formats.
Graph area
A DeLogger spreadsheet window is a static display of data loaded/dumped from a replay le or a database session. DeLogger automatically arranges the data one row per timestamp, one column per channel. You then use standard spreadsheet tools to manipulate and analyze the data.
Worksheet area Formula bar
Spreadsheet toolbar See Figure 267 on page 176.

FIGURE 225
See The Spreadsheet Worksheet on page 150.
DeLoggers spreadsheet window
See The Spreadsheet Graph Area on page 151.
Spreadsheet Window or Analysis Window? Both the spreadsheet window and the analysis63 window basically consist of a worksheet linked to a graph/chart. If you want presentation-quality output (like Microsoft Excel), use the spreadsheet window. But be aware that redrawing the spreadsheet windows graph is a processor-intensive task that can take some time, especially with large data sets and 3D graphs. If youre using DeLogger Pro and want powerful data analysis, use the analysis window. Its better for looking at an entire data set, selecting and de-selecting traces, and zooming using the mouse.
63
Analysis window:
only
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-6 The Spreadsheet Window
149
UM-0070-A0
The Spreadsheet Worksheet

Load a replay le or a database session into a spreadsheet windows worksheet, then use common spreadsheet techniques and tools (similar to those of Microsoft Excel) to work with the data. See The Spread Menu beginning on page 104
Worksheet area
Row headers Formula bar
Column headers Each row displays data from a single scan.
Rename a worksheet by doubleclicking its tab (the Sheet Name dialog box opens). Spreadsheet toolbar See Figure 267 on page 176.
Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them. See Formula One Workbook Designer on page 138.
Column A Date and time of each scan
Columns B, C, D, Scan data: one channel per column
FIGURE 226
The spreadsheet windows worksheet
UM-0070-A0
150
The Spreadsheet Graph Area

If youre using DeLogger Pro, your spreadsheet windows each have their own graph area. When you load a replay le or database session into the worksheet area, DeLogger automatically plots the data in the graph area. Many tools are available to manipulate objects in the graph area see Figures 228 to 238, and The Spread Menu beginning on page 104.
Graph area
Title
Click a graph object (a data series, text, the legend, the background,) to select it. Use the handles that appear to move and resize the object.
Plot(contains data series traces)
A right-click menu is available for each graph object (including the background).
Legend
Footnote/subtitle Background
FIGURE 227
The spreadsheet windows chart
DeLogger Pro provides two ways of accessing the dialog boxes that you use to congure a spreadsheet windows chart: Right-click anywhere in the spreadsheet chart to popup a menu (Figure 228) that you use to modify the charts general appearance and its data series, and carry out le-related operations. See Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes beginning on page 152. For more-detailed control of the attributes of a chart element (title, data series trace, plot64, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,), double-click the specic element. Typical context-sensitive65 dialog boxes that open are shown in Figure 238 (page 159). See Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes on page 159. NOTE For more information, use the Help button in these dialog boxes.
FIGURE 228
Modify a spreadsheet charts type, style, layout and axes see Figure 229. Modify a spreadsheet charts data see Figure 230.
Format specific chart elements see Figures 231 to 236.
File-related operations see Figure 237
Spreadsheet charts right-click menu
64 65
Plot: the group of data series traces That is, relevant to the chart element you double-click.
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
151
UM-0070-A0
Spreadsheet Chart Right-Click Dialog Boxes

Figures 229 to 237 show the dialog boxes you can access by choosing commands from the spreadsheet charts right-click menu.
Modify a spreadsheet charts type, style, layout and axes. 2D 3D
Click for context-sensitive Help.
FIGURE 229
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Chart Wizard dialog box (four tabs) Modify a spreadsheet charts data.
Click for Help.
FIGURE 230
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Edit Chart Data (Data Grid Editor) dialog box
UM-0070-A0
152
Show or hide common spreadsheet chart elements, reset chart formatting, and specify a backdrop for the entire spreadsheet chart. Click for context-sensitive Help.
FIGURE 231
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > format General (Format Chart) dialog box (two tabs)
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
153
UM-0070-A0
Control the appearance and location of the charts plot (the group of data series traces), the formatting and ordering of the data series, and the formatting of 3D charts.
FIGURE 232
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Format Plot dialog box (ten tabs)
UM-0070-A0
154
Select a data series.
Format the selected data series.
Control the appearance of individual data series in the chart. Control the display and appearance of an individual data series label.
Select a data series. Format the

selected data series label.
FIGURE 233
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Format Series submenu dialog boxes (1 of 2)
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
155
UM-0070-A0
Select a data point

Format the appearance of an individual data point in a data series in the chart. Control the text/value used to label a data point, and the labels font, format, position and backdrop. in a data series. data point.
Format the selected
Select a data
point in a data series.
Format the selected

data points label.
FIGURE 234
UM-0070-A0
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Format Series submenu dialog boxes (2 of 2)
156
Control the appearance (including scale details) of chart axes.
Control the position of axis labels, and their backdrop, font and format.
Select an axis. Format the

selected axis. Control the appearance of axis title text, and its font and background.
Select an axis. Format the selected

axis label.
Select an axis. Format the selected

axis title. The Scale tabs contents change according to the axis type Category, Value, Polar or Radar.
FIGURE 235
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu > Format Axis submenu dialog boxes
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
157
UM-0070-A0
Control the location and appearance of the chart legend.
Control the location and appearance of the chart title. Control the location and appearance of the chart footnote (sub-title).

FIGURE 236
The spreadsheet charts right-click menu Format Legend, Format Title and Format Footnote dialog boxes
Copy the chart and Paste it into another spreadsheet windows chart area. Print the spreadsheet chart. Save the chart as a native chart file (.vtc), which you can re-open in a spreadsheet chart window using the right-click menu > Load command a Windows Metafile (.wmf) graphics file a Bitmap (.bmp) graphics file. Load a chart file (.vtc).
FIGURE 237
UM-0070-A0
The spreadsheet charts le-related right-click menu commands
158
Spreadsheet Chart Element Dialog Boxes

Spreadsheet chart elements (title, data series trace, plot, legend, axis, axis label, subtitle,) have attributes that you modify using dialog boxes that are only accessible by double-clicking the specic element. These are listed in the table below.
To format... Double-click...
Single-click to identify the element (selection handles appear), then double-click the element to open the corresponding Format dialog box. Some typical double-click dialog boxes are shown in Figure 238.
To format... Double-click...
Chart backdrop Title Footnote Legend backdrop Legend text Plot Axis label Axis line or ticks Axis title
Chart backdrop
The chart, but not on a specic chart element Any part of the title Any part of the footnote Anywhere in the legend area other than the text or keys The legend text Anywhere in the plot area, but not on a specic chart element An axis label The line or ticks on an axis The axis title text
Double-click
Grid 3D base or wall Data series Data point Series label Data point label
Any grid line Anywhere on the base or wall other than a grid line A chart element in an un-selected series or the legend key identifying the series A data point, or a point in the same series as a selected data point A series label A data point label
Title
Double-click
Footnote
Double-click
Legend backdrop
Double-click
Plot
Double-click
Axis line or ticks
Double-click
Horizontal axis Vertical axis
Data series
Double-click
FIGURE 238
Typical spreadsheet chart element Format dialog boxes
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
159
UM-0070-A0
Using the Mouse with Worksheets

You can perform the following mouse actions in a DeLogger worksheet:
Action Description
Click a cell
Click a row or column header, a column heading, or a scan date/time cell (a cell in column A) Click in the top left corner (Figure 239) Double-right-click anywhere
Moves the active cell to the click location. The active cells contents appear in the formula bar, ready for editing. Selects the entire row or column Selects the entire worksheet
Opens the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available Double-click a worksheets Opens a dialog box that tab allows you to enter a new name for the worksheet Click and drag Selects a range of cells CTRL + click a cell Adds the cell to the current selection (can be separate from the current selection) CTRL + click and drag Adds the range of cells to the current selection (can be separate from the current selection) SHIFT + click and drag Extends the current selection Drag a cells or ranges copy Copies the cell or range into handle (Figure 240) the cells you drag across Drag a cells or ranges Moves the cell or range to the border (cursor changes to an new location arrow) (Figure 240)
The active cell is indicated by a bold border. Drag the copy handle (the cursor changes to a crosshair) to copy the active cells contents into the cell(s) you drag across. Drag a border (the cursor changes to an arrow) to move the active cells contents. The active range is indicated by a bold border.
Click any of these four locations to select the entire worksheet.
FIGURE
UM-0070-A0
Click either location to select the entire row. 239 Selecting rows, columns or the entire worksheet
Click either location to select the entire column.

FIGURE 240
Copy handle Drag a border to move the range. Copying and moving the active cell or range
160
3-7
THE ANALYSIS WINDOW

You can also load the contents of the analysis windows current worksheet into Microsoft Excel (if its installed on your computer) with a single command export the contents of the analysis windows current worksheet in a variety of formats.
Chart area
A DeLogger analysis window is a static display of data loaded/dumped from a replay le or a database session. DeLogger automatically arranges the data one row per timestamp, one column per channel. You then use standard spreadsheet tools to manipulate and analyze the data.
Worksheet area Formula bar
Analysis toolbar See Figure 268 on page 177.

FIGURE 241
See The Analysis Worksheet on page 162.
See The Analysis Chart Area on page 163.
DeLoggers analysis window
Analysis Window or Spreadsheet Window? Both the analysis66 window and the spreadsheet window basically consist of a worksheet linked to a graph/chart. If you want presentation-quality output, use the spreadsheet window. But be aware that redrawing the spreadsheet windows graph is a processorintensive task that can take some time, especially with large data sets and 3D graphs. If you want powerful data analysis, use the analysis66 window. Its better for looking at an entire data set, selecting and de-selecting traces, and zooming using the mouse.
66
Analysis window:
only
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-7 The Analysis Window
161
UM-0070-A0
The Analysis Worksheet

Load a replay le or a database session into an analysis windows worksheet, then use common spreadsheet techniques and tools (similar to those of Microsoft Excel) to work with the data. See The Analysis Menu beginning on page 115.
Worksheet area
Row headers Formula bar
Column headers Each row displays data from a single scan.
Rename a worksheet by doubleclicking its tab (the Sheet Name dialog box opens). Analysis toolbar See Figure 268 on page 177.
Double-right-click anywhere in a worksheet to open it in the Formula One Workbook Designer, where additional commands are available if you need them. See Formula One Workbook Designer on page 138.
Column A Date and time of each scan
Columns B, C, D, Scan data: one channel per column
FIGURE 242
The analysis windows worksheet
UM-0070-A0
162
The Analysis Chart Area

Analysis windows (Pro only) each have their own chart area. When you load a replay le or database session into the worksheet area, DeLogger automatically plots the data in the chart area.
Chart area
To manipulate the chart area, use the techniques described in The Chart Window beginning on page 139, and The Analysis Menu beginning on page 115.
Use the techniques described in The Chart Window beginning on page 139.
FIGURE 243
The analysis windows chart
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-7 The Analysis Window
163
UM-0070-A0
3-8
THE DT5/6XX PROGRAM BUILDER WINDOW
You use a DeLogger DT5/6xx program builder window to create and edit a DT5/6xx dataTaker program send the program to a DT5/6xx dataTaker.
Define report schedules A, B, C and D on these tabs (set a diferent rate or trigger for each tab). Define an immediate scan on this tab (carried out once only, the moment you send it to the dataTaker). Define an X (polled) schedule on this tab (carried out whenever the dataTaker receives an X character from the host computer or from an alarm). Define an alarm schedule on this tab (see Define the rate or trigger for statistical sampling on this tab. Define project-specific settings on this tab A program builders program consists of everything specified on ALL of these tabs.
Rate/trigger icon Build a schedule graphically in the schedules work area see Figure 245.
DT5/6xx program builder toolbar The buttons duplicate many of the commands on the Program menu. See Figure 269 on page 177.
FIGURE 244
DeLoggers DT5/6xx program builder main features
Click the tab of the schedule you want to create or edit.
Right-click the schedules rate/trigger
icon to specify when the schedule runs: time-based (Set Schedule Rate) or event-based (Set Schedule Trigger).
Add a channel to a schedule by right-clicking in the

schedules blank work area. Choose the channels details from the cascade menus that appear.
FIGURE 245
UM-0070-A0
DeLoggers DT5/6xx program builder general sequence of use
164
3-9
THE DT8XX PROGRAM BUILDER WINDOW

DT800 Program A DT800 program is everything you specify in a program builder window everything dened on every tab across the bottom of the program builder (Figure 246).
You create the program by choosing various schedule, channel and other items from drop-down lists and dialog boxes, ready to send to your DT800. Figure 247 shows some examples.
You use a DeLogger DT8xx program builder window to create and edit a DT8xx dataTaker program send the program to a DT8xx dataTaker.
Know This: Each program builder window creates just ONE DT800 program.
Although the program may contain several schedules and involve many DT800 channels, there is only one program per program builder.
Projects and Programs A project can contain more than one program builder. But the DT800 can only run one program at a time when you send a new program, it automatically replaces any existing program in the DT800. (To add another project builder window, choose New on the File menu, then click the DT800 Program button.)
Specify the schedules

primary details here.
When you click in a cell in the program builder, information about the clicked item appears here.
Specify the schedules

channels here. Fixed columns A program builders program consists of everything specified on all of these tabs (scroll right to reveal more tabs). Scrollable columns
Repeat from step 1,
Select a schedule here: Immediate (a once-only

scan) or triggered (A, B, C,K).
but use a different schedule tab, if you want to include other schedules in the program (you do this when you want the DT800 to do things at different times or according to different triggers).
Scroll right to reveal more column headings.
Scroll right to reveal more tabs.
FIGURE 246
DeLoggers DT8xx program builder general sequence of use
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-9 The DT8xx Program Builder Window
165
UM-0070-A0
Click this Configure button to open the Rate dialog box.
Choose Voltage from this drop-down list, then click this Configure button to open the Voltage Wiring Configurations dialog box.
FIGURE 247
DT8xx program builder examples click and select to build a DT800 program
Right-Click Menu The DT8xx program builder has a right-click menu (Figure 248) that youll nd useful.
In particular, if youre familiar with the dataTaker programming language, the Show Program command presents you with a dialog box that contains your program in text form, line-by-line.
FIGURE 248
DT8xx program builder right-click menu and Program Listing dialog box
UM-0070-A0
166
3-10
THE EVENT LOGS WINDOW
The event logs window keeps you advised of whats happening at your data site(s) and within DeLogger: DeLogger event messages are displayed on the Messages tab as they occur. dataTaker errors are displayed on the Errors tab as they arrive. dataTaker alarms are displayed on the Alarms tab as they arrive.
FIGURE 249
DeLoggers event logs window
If you tick Show Alarm Events on the View menu, DeLogger opens the event logs window (Alarms tab) every time a dataTaker alarm is received67 Show Error Events on the View menu, DeLogger opens the event logs window (Errors tab) every time a dataTaker error is received68 Show Message Events on the View menu, DeLogger opens the event logs window (Messages tab) every time a DeLogger event occurs69. You can alter the amount and scope of this reporting using the Conrmation Level slider (Figure 57). Keep the event logs window permanently open by ticking View Events on the View menu (see View > View Events on page 37).
Each tab of the event logs window has its own right-click menu:
FIGURE 250 Right-click menus on the Messages tab, Errors tab and Alarms tab
67
Log Alarms in Figure 57 (page 52) must be ticked to

this. See Load Existing Message Entries on page 52.
68
Log Errors in Figure 57 (page 52) must be ticked to enable

UM-0070-A0
enable this.
69
CHAPTER 3: WINDOWS
3-10 The Event Logs Window
167
CHAPTER 4
TOOLBARS
4-1
REPOSITIONING TOOLBARS
You can reposition DeLoggers menu bar, system toolbar, connection toolbar, dataTaker toolbar and conguration toolbar. To do this, drag the toolbar by its gripper (handle) to the new location.
Menu bar gripper
Drag the handle so that the toolbar docks against an edge or against another toolbar, or so that it floats.
Docked horizontally System toolbar gripper

FIGURE 251
Connection toolbar gripper
Docked vertically
Toolbar handles
A toolbar can be docked (snapped) against other toolbars, or against the four sides of the DeLogger main window. It can also oat inside or outside the main window. See (Figure 252).
Toolbars are Saved Automatically When you exit DeLogger the toolbar positions are always saved automatically, ready for next time. See Saving Main Window Details (Global) on page 208.
System toolbar floating inside DeLoggers main window
dataTaker toolbar floating outside DeLoggers main window

FIGURE 252
Docking and oating toolbars
UM-0070-A0
168
4-2
THE SYSTEM TOOLBAR

Show/hide the event logs window (see page 167). Show/hide the project bar (see page 171). Show/hide the status bar (see page 170). Open the Project Properties dialog box (see File > Project Properties on page 23). Open a full-page print preview of the current window. Print the current window. Save the current project. Open another project. Create a new window or project
FIGURE 253
DeLoggers system toolbar
4-3
THE CONNECTION TOOLBAR

Open the Connection Properties dialog box (see Connections > Properties on page 42). Play a replay file. Disconnect Connect
FIGURE 254
DeLoggers connection toolbar
4-4
THE dataTaker TOOLBAR
The dataTaker toolbar is inactive until you make a connection.
Supervise a memory card in a connected dataTaker. Send the TEST command. Send the STATUS command. Set the dataTakers date and time. Open the Halt Options dialog box. Open the Run Options dialog box. Send the RESET command. Open the Clear Memory dialog box. Send the Quit Unload command. Open the Unload dialog box. Open the Data Logging state dialog box.
FIGURE 255
DeLoggers dataTaker toolbar
CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS
4-2 The System Toolbar
169
UM-0070-A0
4-5
THE CONFIGURATION TOOLBAR

Configure Configure Configure Configure web publishing reports actions defaults
FIGURE 256
DeLoggers conguration toolbar
4-6
THE STATUS BAR

The name of the current project Data hub activity indicator Purple logging data to a database channel logging session Yellow sending data to OPC or DDE destination Data input activity indicator Blue realtime data return Purple unload data return DeLogger Busy indicator Green DeLogger is ready for user input Red DeLogger is busy; user input not accepted
Prompts appear here when you pause the mouse over a button or a menu item.
FIGURE 257
DeLoggers status bar
UM-0070-A0
170
4-7
THE PROJECT BAR

Project bar Right-click a window type to create a new document of the same type. (Choose New from the menu that pops up.)
The project bar presents the current projects documents, connections and actions in Explorer-style tree views.
If you close a window using its Close button ,its icon is grayed-out here. To re-open the window, double-click its icon (or use the Project Properties dialog box Figure 18). Click a window name to bring that window to the front.
Click
Connections sub-bar Right-click a connection name to pop up a context menu from which you can choose Connect or Disconnect.
Click
Actions sub-bar
When you connect to a data site, the connections attributes appear. See Figure 259.
See Figure 260.
FIGURE 258
DeLoggers project bar
CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS
4-7 The Project Bar
171
UM-0070-A0
The Connections Sub-Bar

The following details are available in the Connections sub-bar for each active connection: The time the connection was established Auto: Yes means the connection was initiated by a macro. Forced: Yes means Force the Connect was ticked when the connection was established see the Force the Connect Extras panel on page 38. The version of the connected dataTakers firmware The number of characters received from the dataTaker The number of characters sent to the dataTaker The number of errors received from the dataTaker (for a DT8xx: the number of CRC check failures; for a DT5/6xx: the number of corruptions) ULAST (the date and time of the last unload)
dataTaker icons in the Connections sub-bar:

Not connected DT5/6xx DT8xx
FIGURE 259
Connected
Connected, no input focus
The project bars Connections sub-bar
The Actions Sub-Bar
Double-click an action name to run the action.
Right-click in the background to pop up the project bars context menu.
FIGURE 260
The project bars Actions sub-bar
UM-0070-A0
172
4-8
WINDOW TOOLBARS
Pause the return of data. Turn Edit Mode on/off. Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 98 on page 84).
The Form Toolbar
See Form > Publish on page 84. See Creating a Chart in a Form Window on page 173. See Form > Object > Insert Checkbox on page 81. See Form > Object > Insert Button on page 81. Set the number of decimal places of selected cells. Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells. Show/hide gridlines Show/hide row and column headers Scale view down (zoom out) Scale view up (zoom in) Reset all values in the Low Value column to zero (updated at the next scan). Reset all values in the High Value column to zero (updated at the next scan). Send the X schedule command (polled or scan on host request schedule).
FIGURE 261
DeLoggers form toolbar
Edit Mode on Edit Mode is ticked on the Form menu.
Edit Mode button depressed
Buttons available in Edit Mode Edit Mode off (Run Mode) Edit Mode is un-ticked on the Form menu. Edit Mode button raised
Buttons available in Run Mode

FIGURE 262
Buttons available on the form toolbar in edit mode and run mode
Creating a Chart in a Form Window You can chart data in a form window worksheet. To do this, select the cells that contain the data you want to chart, click the Chart button , then drag a chart
CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS 4-8 Window Toolbars
rectangle in the worksheet (you can change its size and position later). The Chart Wizard opens see Figure 229 on page 152.
173
UM-0070-A0
The Chart Toolbar

Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 106 on page 90). Clear the chart. Turn Edit Mode on/off. Pause the return of data.
See Chart > Publish on page 90. Scale text down Scale text up Open the Chart Properties dialog box. Click the Auto Re-scale button to fit the trend graphs into the chart window with maximum horizontal and vertical resolution (squeezes all the data into the window). Rotate the graphs so that they move from top to bottom. Click Edit Axis to open the Axis Properties dialog box (Figure 103 on page 89). Select channels to be plotted in this chart window (the Chart Channels dialog box opens; Figure 102 on page 88).
FIGURE 263
DeLoggers chart toolbar
The Text Toolbars

Each of a DeLogger text windows two screens has its own toolbar: a text display screen toolbar (Figure 264) a text entry screen toolbar (Figure 265).
Open the text windows Properties dialog box (Figure 114 on page 94). Toggle the split screen view on/off. Clear the display screen. Pause the flow of incoming data to the display screen.
Capture data to disk as it arrives (as a replay file .dlr). Choose the format of incoming data (replay, text or comma-separated variable). Filter incoming data by schedule.
FIGURE 264
DeLoggers text display screen toolbar
UM-0070-A0
174
Go to matching brace Indent the selected lines. Outdent the selected lines. Make the selected lines into comments (prefix with '). Uncomment the selected lines.
User buttons Set user buttons Clear the entry screen. Turn Command Edit Mode on/off. Send the program (send all). Send the highlighted text. Send the current line. Save the program (.txt or .cmd). Load a DeLogger program file (.dlp or .dl8) into the entry screen as text. Open an existing command file (.txt or .cmd).
Undo your last action in the entry screen (multiple undo). Redo/re-apply your last action in the entry screen (multiple redo). Go to the previous bookmark. Go to the next bookmark. Remove all bookmarks. Add a bookmark to the selected lines (or remove it).
Open the Find dialog box (see Figure 36 on page 35). Open the Replace dialog box (see Figure 36 on page 35). Find Next Open the Script Editor Options dialog box, in which you change the operation and appearance of the current text entry screen.
FIGURE 265
DeLoggers text entry screen toolbar
CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS
4-8 Window Toolbars
175
UM-0070-A0
The Mimic Toolbar

Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 142 on page 103). Turn Edit Mode on/off. Pause the return of data.
See Mimic > Publish on page 103. Scale text down Scale text up Add Add Add Add Add Add Add Add Add
FIGURE 266
a picture. a button panel. a LED indicator panel. a digital panel. an annunciator panel.
a temperature meter panel. a pie meter panel. an arc meter panel. a needle meter panel.
DeLoggers mimic toolbar
The Spreadsheet Toolbar

Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 162 on page 114).
See Spread > Publish on page 113. Set the number of decimal places of selected cells. Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells. Show/hide gridlines Show/hide row and column headers Load the current worksheet into Excel. Export the current worksheet. Import a worksheet. Set the print range from the selection. Update the spreadsheet windows chart. Load a replay file into the worksheet. Load a database session into the worksheet. Scale view down (zoom out) Scale view up (zoom in)
FIGURE 267
UM-0070-A0
DeLoggers spreadsheet toolbar
176
The Analysis Toolbar

Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 180 on page 123).
See Analysis > Publish on page 123. Set the number of decimal places of selected cells. Left-, centre-, or right-align the contents of selected cells. Show/hide gridlines Show/hide row and column headers Load the current worksheet into Excel. Export the current worksheet. Import a worksheet. Set the print range from the selection. Update the analysis windows chart. Load a replay file into the worksheet. Load a database session into the worksheet. Scale view down (zoom out) Scale view up (zoom in)
FIGURE 268
DeLoggers analysis toolbar
The DT5/6xx Program Builder Toolbar

Open the windows Properties dialog box (Figure 183 on page 125). Turn Edit Mode on/off.
Scale view down (zoom out) Scale view up (zoom in) Arrange the channel icons in the current tab (left-align and distribute equally from top). Add a new high speed counter channel to the current schedule. Add a new digital channel to the current schedule. Add a new analog channel to the current schedule.
FIGURE 269
Uses the next available channel number
DeLoggers DT5/6xx program builder toolbar
The DT8xx Program Builder Toolbar

The DT8xx program builder doesnt have a toolbar like the other windows. See The DT8xx Program Builder Window on page 165.
CHAPTER 4: TOOLBARS 4-8 Window Toolbars 177
UM-0070-A0
PART B Nuts & Bolts

PART B covers DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro features in detail, as well as topics for advanced users: Chapter 5: Actions begins on page 179. Chapter 6: Reports begins on page 199. Chapter 7: DeLogger Utility Software begins on page 203. Chapter 8: Saving What, When, Where begins on page 208. Chapter 9: Advanced Topics begins on page 210.
Pro Only
UM-0070-A0
178
PART B: Nuts & Bolts
CHAPTER 5
ACTIONS
5-1
ACTIONS OVERVIEW
AutoRun DeLogger Pros Startup Action
DeLogger Pro has a permanent action, called AutoRun, which automatically runs every time DeLogger Pro starts up. By default, AutoRun simply plays the siren.wav sound le (see Conguration > Actions > AutoRuns Sound File eld)70. But you can use AutoRun to do much more, such as automatically loading a project and connecting to a dataTaker when DeLogger Pro starts up automatically running another action on startup. Figures 58 and 59 show the startup tasks that you can do with AutoRun. The AutoRun action cannot be deleted, only edited. If there are no functions dened in AutoRun, it does not run. NOTE If you start DeLogger Pro by double-clicking a project master le (see .dlw File on page 22), AutoRun runs before the project loads.
DeLogger Pro can automate various tasks and processes, and repeatedly perform these in response to various triggers. These automated tasks or processes are called actions. DeLogger Pro has an inbuilt scripting or macro capability, which can be used in actions to interact with connected dataTakers and with the DeLogger interface. DeLogger Pro actions can also play sound les, run reports, and execute other Windows programs. Actions can be as simple as running a sound (siren) le when you launch DeLogger, or as complex as sequentially dialling a number of remote sites after midnight, downloading the data from each site, clearing the logged data from the logger at each site, and preparing a plot or report of the logged data independently of an operator. Actions are global actions created in one project are available to all other projects. They are stored in DeLoggers administration database, and cannot be transported to other installations of DeLogger. IMPORTANT Actions are internal to DeLogger Pro. Dont confuse them with dataTaker alarm actions. (However, dataTaker alarm actions can be used to trigger DeLogger actions see Figure 58 on page 55.)
Action Functions Actions have ve major function categories: execute macro lists or scripts play sound les generate reports execute Windows program les (.exe les) set states on a digital output card installed into the (desktop) computer
An action can perform any mix of these function categories.
70
If you want to remove/change the startup sound: DeLogger Pro choose Conguration > Actions and delete/modify the contents of the Sound File eld (Figure 58). DeLogger remove the siren.wav le from the \DeLogger\Sound folder.
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
5-1 Actions Overview
179
UM-0070-A0
5-2
USING ACTIONS
Playing Sound Files To play a sound le (.wav le) when the action runs, details for the sound le must be entered into the Sound File eld. Either type the path to the sound le directly into the eld, or click on the browse button, navigate to the required sound le, and select it.
In the AutoRun action this defaults to
c:\program les\delogger\sound\siren.wav
Dening New Actions

Open the Database Properties Actions dialog box (Figure 58 on page 55) by choosing Conguration > Actions from the main menu bar. All input elds are greyed out. Click the New button, and all input elds become active. Each action requires a unique name enter the name for your new action in the Action Name eld. Note that this name is permanent you will not be able to change this name later when editing the action. Next you need to enter details for the various tasks and processes that the action is to perform each time it executes or runs.
Chaining Actions Actions can chain to other actions, to produce a higherlevel action sequence. This can simplify complex actions, and facilitate management of processes which may change periodically.
For example, a project may involve a number of remote dataTaker sites, and data is to be automatically unloaded from each site into the DeLogger database each day. This could be done either by one action with a large script, or by a separate action for each site that chains to the action for the next site. If an action is to chain to another action, then the action to be chained to must be created before the chain can be dened within the action to be chained from. To chain to another action, open the list of existing actions in the Chain To input eld, and select the action to chain to.
Generating Reports To generate a report when the action runs, details of the report to be generated must be entered into the Report input eld. The reports that can be generated are based on the report templates created in the Conguration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61), and are listed in the drop-down list for this input eld. Click on the drop-down button at the right-hand end of the eld and select the required report from the list. The report names listed here are the names entered in the Identier input eld in Figure 61. Note that these same reports can be manually run by selecting them under Reports > Database Reports.
The generated report can be shown in a report window which opens over the other windows currently in view, printed on the system printer, or exported as an HTML document for publication on the web. Click the appropriate radio button for the required method of delivery of the report.
Running Macro Scripts DeLogger Pro actions have inbuilt macro commands that can perform various interactions with connected dataTakers, and with some of the DeLogger views. These macro commands are used to create macro sequences or scripts, which execute a programmed task or function when the action to which the script belongs is run.
The macro sequence is created in the Macro Text input eld, using standard macros in the Macro Builder see Creating Macro Scripts on page 181. Macros that interact with a connected dataTaker require identication of the connection by name. Therefore the connection denitions for the project must be dened and tested before actions using those connections can be developed.
UM-0070-A0
Executing Programs To execute a Windows program when the action runs, you need to enter the lepath and program name into the Execute Program input eld, or click the browse button and navigate to the program and select it. Command-line parameters that the program may need when it is run can be entered into the Parameters eld. You can also elect to run the program minimized or not.
For example, if the action is to launch Windows Notepad to display a data le, then the entries would be Execute Program eld:
c:\Windows\Notepad.exe
Parameters eld:
c:\ProgramFiles\DeLogger\Replay\TestDat.csv
Commanding the PC263 Digital Output Board DeLogger Pro supports the 16-channel Amplicon PC263 digital output board, which plugs directly into the ISA bus of desktop PCs. These channels can be driven ON or OFF by DeLogger Pro actions.
180
Select the Amplicon PC263 option from the drop-down list in the Digital Board input eld, select the channel number to switch in the Channel input eld, and select whether the action is to Set or Clear the channel.
Creating Macro Scripts

Macro scripts are created in the Actions dialog box, opened by choosing Conguration menu > Actions. All elds are greyed out when the dialog box initially opens. Click the New button, and all input elds become active. Enter the name for your new action in the Action Name eld. Open the macro script builder by clicking the large Macro Builder button (Figure 58). This opens the Macro Builder (Figure 60), in which the macro script will be built up. In Figure 60 (page 56), the upper window is a scrollable list of the available macros, which are effectively macro templates and provide some detail of the syntax and parameters for each macro. The lower window is where you will insert appropriate macros to progressively build up the script for your new action. The lower window of the Macro Builder is actually a small text editor, and all of the usual text editing features are available including mouse-controlled cursor placement and movement scrolling by using mouse cursor or scroll bars scrolling using keyboard cursor keys, and PageUp and PageDown keys mouse-controlled selection by click and drag to select part of a line, whole line or multiple lines keyboard-controlled selection using shift and cursor keys keyboard-controlled editing to cut (Ctrl X), copy (Ctrl C) and paste (Ctrl V) selected text keyboard delete of selected text (Del and Backspace) keyboard delete of single characters (Del and Backspace) keyboard-controlled undo last edit (Ctrl Z) the window is always in the insert character (Ins) mode macros on consecutive lines can be separated using Shift Enter. You should have a good understanding of what process(es) you want your new action to perform, before programming the action. It may be benecial to rstly draw up a ow chart or sequenced list. Locate the rst macro template to insert into the script from the list in the upper window, and click on it to select (highlight) it. You may need to scroll to the required macro template using the scroll bar, cursor keys or PageUp and PageDown keys. Now click on the Paste button to insert the macro template into the bottom window. This pastes the macro template into the bottom window at the current position of the bottom window cursor.
181
UM-0070-A0
Site Response Actions can be triggered to run in DeLogger Pro by messages coming in from connected dataTakers. Sometimes it may be appropriate for the action to reply to the dataTaker at site for example, to acknowledge that the action was in fact run. The Site Response input eld is used to dene such replies or responses.
For example, the dataTaker at site may issue the alarm message Pump Failure{PumpOffAction} which will trigger DeLogger Pro to run the PumpOffAction action. The action can acknowledge to the site that the message was received by, say, setting a channel variable as a ag (51CV=1), or by switching off the pump directly (3DSO=1). Whatever is entered into this eld must be interpretable as a command by the dataTaker.
Saving the New Action Save the new action by clicking the Accept button in Figure 58, or abort by clicking the Cancel button.
This returns you to the Database Properties Actions dialog box. From here you can create additional actions (click New), edit existing actions (click Edit), or delete the currently-visible action (click (Delete). Click the Close button to exit the Database Properties Actions dialog box.
Editing Actions
Actions that have already been dened can later be edited. Open the Database Properties Actions dialog box (Figure 58) and scroll to the action to be edited by clicking on the < or > buttons. When the action is located, click the Edit button and edit the action as required. You cannot edit the Action Name. Save the edited action by clicking Accept, or abort by clicking Cancel.
Deleting Actions
Actions that have already been dened can be deleted. Open the Database Properties Actions dialog box (Figure 58) and scroll to the action to be deleted using the < or > buttons. When the action is located, click the Delete button and delete the action.
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
5-2 Using Actions
When the macro template has been pasted, click in the bottom window to enable editing, and edit in details of the various parameters for the pasted macro. For example, the Unload To File macro template is UNLOAD_SITE_FILE("Connection","JobName", "UnloadOptions",Timeout,"FileName.ext (.csv or .dlr)",0 for overwrite or 1 for append,0=no disconnect 1=disconnect) and the edited macro could be similar to UNLOAD_SITE_FILE("dt800","JOB1","A",120, "Test1.dlr",1,1) For details of the parameters for each of the macro templates see Action Macro Commands beginning on page 184. Continue to add macro templates and edit respective parameters until the action is completed. Click OK to retain the script and close the Macro Builder, or click Cancel to abort. Your new macro script can be viewed in the Macro Text eld, scrolled in the usual manner, and nally edited here if desired. Actions incorporating macro scripts can also incorporate other functions if required. Add whatever other functions you require, then click Accept to save the action and macro script in the administration database. The elds are grayed out, and the new action name is now in the Action Name list at the top of the dialog box. Click Close to close the Database Properties Actions dialog.
The project bar has three tabs labelled Project, Connections and Actions. Click the Actions tab to display a list of dened actions (Figure 270). (You may need to click on the + symbol beside the action folder to expand the folder and display the individual actions.)
Actions tab Double-click an actions name to run the action.
FIGURE 270
The project bars Actions tab
Action Trigger Manually by Buttons Placed in the Form View and Mimic View Buttons can be placed in the form and mimic windows, and programmed to execute an action when clicked during operation of the view.
Placing an action button in a form window is covered in Form > Object > Insert Button (page 81) Form > Object > Attach Action (page 82) Form > Object > Options (page 82). The form window must be in run mode for the button to trigger the action. Form window buttons can be deleted by clicking (or Ctrl-clicking to select multiple objects), then pressing the Delete key. Placing an action button in a mimic window is covered in Mimic > Buttons on page 101. The Mimic window must be in run mode for the button to trigger the action.
Running Actions
Actions can be run in a number of ways, either in response to automatically-generated triggers, or in response to direct operator interaction. When an action runs, progress of the action can be seen in the Message tab of the Event Logs window (Figure 249). Actions can be triggered in the following ways:
Action Trigger AutoRun The AutoRun action triggers each time DeLogger Pro is launched. Action Trigger Chaining Actions can chain to (trigger) another action. Action Trigger Manually from the Actions tab of the Project Bar in DeLogger Pro The project bar (Figure 258 on page 171) is normally displayed beside the left-hand edge of the desktop. If not displayed, then enable the project bar under the View menu on the main menu bar.
UM-0070-A0
Action Trigger Externally by Alarm Messages from Connected dataTakers dataTaker alarm messages can have DeLogger Pro action names embedded within the message. Embedded action names must be within braces, for example "Pump Failure{PumpOffAction}"
DeLogger Pro scans incoming dataTaker alarm messages for any embedded action names, and runs any actions identied. NOTE You must tick Log Alarms in the Database Properties Defaults dialog box (Figure 57 on page 52) if you want alarms to initiate an action.
182
Action Trigger Internally by DeLogger Pro Alarms High and low alarm conditions can be dened for channels in the data hub see the Properties button in Figure 63 on page 59. Actions can be attached to these alarms, to be triggered when channel data is out of the dened range. Action Trigger Automatically by the Schedule Utility DeLogger Pro has an accompanying program named Schedule.exe, which can be run by choosing Start menu > Programs > DeLogger > Schedule. This is discussed fully in Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) on page 196.
Schedule can run actions either once at dened point of time, or recursively at dened intervals varying from seconds to months. In the Schedule utility, click Schedule menu > Add (or click the New Entry button on the toolbar), which opens a succession of dialog boxes in which the schedule is dened in terms of schedule name the action to run the date or recursive date(s) on which to run the time or recursive time(s) at which to run. Any number of schedules can be dened, and are listed in the body of the window. Listed schedules can be Paused, Edited, Deleted and Run Now on demand. Schedule also can execute Windows programs and generate DeLogger Pro reports at dened intervals.
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
5-2 Using Actions
183
UM-0070-A0
5-3
ACTION MACRO COMMANDS

Most macro commands have parameters, some of which must be dened elsewhere in DeLogger Pro before the macros will run (for example, names of connections, ports and views).
The macro commands used for creating or building macro scripts are dened below, grouped according to functionality: Macros for Managing Connections (page 184) Macros for Commanding a dataTaker (page 185) Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker (page 187) Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows (page 189) Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects (page 190) Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions (page 192) Macros for Interacting with a User (page 194) Miscellaneous Macros (page 195)
Macros for Managing Connections
CONNECT_SITE
Establishes a connection with a local or remote dataTaker, a le or a database session. Syntax: CONNECT_SITE("Connection",NO_FORCE or FORCE)
where
Connection must have been dened under Connections > Properties (page 42) as a connection to a dataTaker, a
NO_FORCE FORCE
le or a database session. makes the connection depending on the status of the dataTaker or le. If the status does not match that in the data hub for the job, then a connection is not completed. makes the connection without status checking. A connection is made regardless.
Example: CONNECT_SITE("dt500 Com1",NO_FORCE)
CONNECT_PORT
Establishes a connection to the local (DeLogger) modem when it auto-answers an incoming call. Syntax: CONNECT_PORT("PortName")
where
PortName must have been dened under Connections > Properties as an auto-answer modem connection
(Figure 53 on page 48).
Example: CONNECT_PORT("PumpHouseA") Used for modem connections to allow incoming alarm calls from dataTakers to be answered.
UM-0070-A0
184
DISCONNECT
Disconnects the named connection. Syntax: DISCONNECT("Connection")
where
Connection must be open, otherwise the command is ignored.

Example: DISCONNECT("dt800 Com2")
Macros for Commanding a dataTaker
DATATAKER_HALT
Sends the Halt (H) command to the dataTaker at the named connection to halt scanning of all dened schedules. Syntax: DATATAKER_HALT("Connection")
where
Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro.

Example: DATATAKER_HALT("dt500 Com1")
DATATAKER_RUN
Sends the Run (G) command to the dataTaker at the named connection to resume scanning of all dened schedules. Syntax: DATATAKER_RUN("Connection")
where

Example: DATATAKER_RUN("dt500 Com1")
DATATAKER_LOG
Sends the data logging command (LOGON) to the dataTaker at the named connection to enable data logging of all dened schedules. Syntax: DATATAKER_LOG("Connection")
where

Example: DATATAKER_LOG("dt500 Com1")
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
5-3 Action Macro Commands
185
UM-0070-A0
SEND_FILE
Sends the specied command le to the dataTaker at the named connection. Syntax: SEND_FILE("Connection",PARSE or NO_PARSE,"FullFilePathName")
where must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro. Connection FullFilePathName is the path to the command le (can be a .txt or a .cmd le). instructs DeLogger Pro to check the le for correct syntax before PARSE
NO_PARSE
sending. instructs DeLogger Pro to send the le without checking its syntax.
Example: SEND_FILE("Tank3",NO_PARSE,"c:\Progs\Tank3.cmd")
SEND_PROGRAM
Sends the specied DeLogger Pro program to the dataTaker at the named connection. Syntax: SEND_PROGRAM("Connection",PARSE or NO_PARSE,"ProgramName")
where
Connection ProgramName PARSE NO_PARSE
must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro. is the name of a .dlp or .dl8 le currently open within the DeLogger Pro project. instructs DeLogger Pro to check the program for correct syntax before sending. instructs DeLogger Pro to send the program without checking its syntax.
Example: SEND_PROGRAM("Remote 500",PARSE,"Prog1.dlp")
SEND_TEXT
Sends the specied text to the dataTaker at the named connection. Syntax: SEND_TEXT("Connection","TextToSend")
where
Connection must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro. TextToSend is any text. It can contain substitution variables %0 to %9 that have been dened by GET_TEXT or
GET_VALUE macros.
Examples: SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","SATTN") SEND_TEXT("dt500 Com2","3C=%2")
UM-0070-A0
186
Macros for Unloading Data from a dataTaker
UNLOAD_SITE
Unloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection. Unloaded data can be stored in a manually-created database logging session or a text window capture le, and is available to all views by means of the data hub. Syntax: UNLOAD_SITE("Connection","JobName","UnloadOption",Timeout,Disconnect)
where
Connection JobName
is established if its not already open.
denes the DT800 job for which to unload data, if more than one job is running in the dataTaker. For DT8xx dataTakers, DeLogger Pro defaults JobName to JOB1. For DT5/6xx dataTakers, which do not have a JobName, type a null eld ("") here. UnloadOption allows entry of specic schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options. The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption, just include the options for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A. If no UnloadOption is required, type a null eld ("") here and a full unload will occur. is an inactivity timeout that is reset when each record of logged data is received. If the specied Timeout Timeout elapses, the unload macro is terminated. Valid Timeout range is 60 to 600 seconds. denes how to manage the Connection when the unload is completed: Disconnect 1 = disconnect on completion, 0 = do not disconnect.
Example: UNLOAD_SITE("dt800Modem","JOB1","",120,1)
UNLOAD_SITE_DB
Unloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection and stores it in SessionName. Syntax: UNLOAD_SITE_DB("Connection","JobName","UnloadOptions",Timeout,"SessionName",Disconnect)
where
Connection JobName
denes the DT800 job for which to unload data, if more than one job is running in the dataTaker. For DT8xx dataTakers, DeLogger Pro defaults JobName to JOB1. For DT5/6xx dataTakers, which do not have a JobName, type a null eld ("") here. UnloadOption allows entry of specic schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options. The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption, just include the options for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A. If no UnloadOption is required, type a null eld ("") here and a full unload will occur. is an inactivity timeout that is reset when each record of logged data is received. If the specied Timeout Timeout elapses, the unload macro is terminated. Valid Timeout range is 60 to 600 seconds.
SessionName
Disconnect
is either a manually-created database session (see Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60), or one created within the action by the SET_SESSION_NAME() macro. denes how to manage the Connection when the unload is completed: 1 = disconnect on completion, 0 = do not disconnect.
UM-0070-A0
Example: UNLOAD_SITE_DB("dt500 Com4","","A",120,"Week7",1)

CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS 5-3 Action Macro Commands 187
UNLOAD_SITE_FILE
Unloads logged data from the dataTaker at the named connection and stores it in a data le in the c:\Program Files\DeLogger\Replay folder. Syntax: UNLOAD_SITE_FILE("Connection","JobName","UnloadOptions",Timeout,"FileName.ext", NewAppend,Disconnect
where
Connection JobName
denes the DT800 job for which to unload data, if more than one job is running in the dataTaker. For DT8xx dataTakers, DeLogger Pro defaults JobName to JOB1. For DT5/6xx dataTakers, which do not have a JobName, type a null eld ("") here. UnloadOption allows entry of specic schedules, time frames and so on for the unload data. See your dataTaker manual for details of unloading options. The general full unload command U is assumed so, if using UnloadOption, just include the options for example, use A (which becomes UA) to unload schedule A. If no UnloadOption is required (that is, a full unload), type a null eld ("") here. is an inactivity timeout that is reset when each record of logged data is received. If the specied Timeout Timeout elapses, the unload macro is terminated. Valid Timeout range is 60 to 600 seconds. FileName.ext is the name (including extension) of the destination le see NewAppend next.
NewAppend
Disconnect
denes how to manage FileName.ext: 1 = append the data to the existing le FileName.ext. 0 = save the data to a new le each time the macro runs; type a null eld ("") for FileName.ext and DeLogger automatically creates a new lename from Connection and the timestamp at the beginning of the unload. denes how to manage the Connection when the unload is completed: 1 = disconnect on completion, 0 = do not disconnect.
Example: UNLOAD_SITE_FILE("dt50","","A",120,"Test1.csv",1,1)
UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FAST
Same as UNLOAD_SITE_FILE, but only passes data to its unload destination le.
WAIT
Waits until the current data unload from the named connection is completed, or the current attempt to connect to the named connection is completed, or the specied timeout has expired. Syntax: WAIT("Connection","UNLOAD_COMPLETE or CONNECT_COMPLETE,"Timeout")
where must exist to the dataTaker with a CONNECT_SITE() macro. Connection UNLOAD_COMPLETE instructs DeLogger Pro to wait until the unload is complete before continuing. CONNECT_COMPLETE instructs DeLogger Pro to wait until the current attempt to connect to Connection is complete
Timeout
before continuing. is dened in seconds, and should be large enough to allow sufcient time for the unload or connection to be completed.
Example: WAIT("dt500 Remote",UNLOAD_COMPLETE,"500)

UM-0070-A0
188
Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Windows
CLEAR_CHART
Clears the named chart window in the current project. Syntax: CLEAR_CHART("ChartName")
where
ChartName is the name in the chart windows title bar. The project containing ChartName must be open in DeLogger Pros workspace for this macro to work. NOTE Only type the chart les name; do not specify its path.
Example: CLEAR_CHART("Chart1.dlc")
PRINT_CHART
Prints the named chart window to the default system printer. Syntax: PRINT_CHART("ChartName")
where
ChartName is the name in the chart windows title bar. The project containing ChartName must be open in DeLogger Pros workspace for this macro to work. NOTE Only type the chart les name; do not specify its path.
Example: PRINT_CHART("Chart1.dlc")
OPEN_WINDOW
Opens the named DeLogger Pro window in the current project. Syntax: OPEN_WINDOW("WindowName.ext")
where
WindowName.ext must be in the currently-open project folder. NOTE Only type the les name; do not specify its path.
Example: OPEN_WINDOW("Spread3.dls")
CLOSE_WINDOW
Closes the named DeLogger Pro window in the current project. Syntax: CLOSE_WINDOW("WindowName.ext")
where
WindowName.ext must be in the currently-open project folder. NOTE Only type the les name; do not specify its path.
Example: CLOSE_WINDOW("Form1.dlf")
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
189
SHOW_WINDOW
Displays the named DeLogger Pro window minimized, maximized, or normal size (restored to previous working size). Syntax: SHOW_WINDOW("WindowName.ext",SheetNumber,ShowCommand)
where
WindowName.ext must be in the currently-open project folder. NOTE Only type the les name; do not specify its path. is applicable to the form, spread and analysis views, which have multiple sheets. It is ignored for SheetNumber ShowCommand
other views, when 0 (zero) should still be entered 0 = show at normal size 1 = show minimised 2 = show maximised
Example: SHOW_WINDOW("Spread2.dls",3,2)
PUBLISH
Initiates web publishing of the named DeLogger Pro window. Syntax: PUBLISH("WindowName.ext")
where
WindowName.ext must be in the currently-open project folder.

Example: PUBLISH("Spread3.dls")
Macros for Managing DeLogger Pro Projects
PROJECT_LOAD
Loads the named DeLogger Pro project. Syntax: PROJECT_LOAD("ProjectName")
where
ProjectName must be in the c:\DeLogger\Program Files\Project folder.

Example: PROJECT_LOAD("TankFarm3")
PROJECT_SAVE
Saves the current DeLogger Pro project to the c:\DeLogger\Program Files\Project folder. Syntax: PROJECT_SAVE() Example: PROJECT_SAVE()
UM-0070-A0
The trailing parentheses () are always required. No parameters are necessary.
190
PROJECT_CLOSE
-Closes the currently-open DeLogger Pro project. Use a PROJECT_SAVE rst if there have been any changes to the project. Syntax: PROJECT_CLOSE() Example: PROJECT_CLOSE() The trailing parentheses () are always required. No parameters are necessary.
HUB_SAVE
Saves the most recent values for each channel in the program list. Syntax: HUB_SAVE() Example: HUB_SAVE() The trailing parentheses () are always required. No parameters are necessary.
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
191
UM-0070-A0
Macros for Managing Database Channel Logging Sessions

Up to ten separate lists of channels from open connection(s) can be dened to log the respective incoming channel data into corresponding database sessions (see Figure 64 on page 60). In other words, there are ten database logging sessions available in the DeLogger Pros data database. This function is covered in Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60. Each session has a unique name, which is the primary key to enable selective retrieval of session data from the database. These ten sessions can be set up and managed manually as shown in Figure 64, or automatically by macros within actions as described below.
SESSION_START
Creates a database channel logging session (uses one of the 10 available see Figure 64). The data hub stores pointers to the database channel Syntax: SESSION_START(Connection,SessionName,SessionNumber,DataType)
where
logging structures, and keeps a list of the sessions to which each channel is applied. Note that a channel can log to more than one session at the same time.
Connection SessionName SessionNumber DataType
is the name of the DeLogger Pro connection to the dataTaker that is the source of data. is a text tag that used to group this data within the database (allows for later ltering). is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10. is the type of data: 0 for realtime data; 1 for logged data (emulates the Real Time Data and Logged Data radio buttons in Figure 64).
Example: SESSION_START("dt500Com1","Furnace1",2,0 You can provide SessionName and SessionNumber using the GET_TEXT() and GET_VALUE() macros. For example: GET_TEXT(1,"Enter Session Name","My Session") GET_VALUE(2,"Enter Session Number",10) SESSION_START(MyConnection,%1,%2,0)
SESSION
Switches the named session to active (ON) or inactive (OFF). This macro emulates the Active tick box in Figure 64. Syntax: SESSION(SessionNumber,ON or OFF)
where
SessionNumber is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10.

Example: SESSION(3,OFF)
UM-0070-A0
192
SET_SESSION_NAME
Displays a dialog box with an input eld (Figure 271) to dene a session name for the numbered session. This is equivalent to entering a name in the Session eld in Figure 64. Syntax: SET_SESSION_NAME(SessionNumber,Prompt,DefaultSessionName)
where is the database logging session to use: range 1 to 10. SessionNumber is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro. Prompt DefaultSessionName is a session name to be applied if the user leaves the input eld blank.
NOTE The session should be made inactive rst by using SESSION(SessionNumber,OFF), then activated again using SESSION(SessionNumber,ON). Example: SET_SESSION_NAME(3,"Enter Session Name","Test99")
Prompt text appears here.
User input field
FIGURE 271
Macro text input dialog box
SET_SESSION_SUFFIX()
No longer supported.
INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIX
No longer supported.
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
193
UM-0070-A0
Macros for Interacting with a User
GET_TEXT
Displays a dialog box showing the Prompt message and a text input eld (Figure 271). If the user enters text,
the text is assigned to an internal (DeLogger) variable.
Syntax: GET_TEXT(VariableNumber,"Prompt","DefaultText")
where
VariableNumber must be in the range 0 to 9. is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro. Prompt is placed into the variable if the user leaves the input eld blank. DefaultText
The variable can be used as a substitution variable in the SEND_TEXT() macro, allowing user-initiated messages and commands to be transmitted to a connection. Example: GET_TEXT(5,"Enter the schedule to Halt","HA") SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","%5")
GET_VALUE
Displays a dialog box showing the Prompt message and a numeric input eld (Figure 271). If the user enters a
value, the value is assigned to an internal (DeLogger) variable.
Syntax: GET_VALUE(VariableNumber,"Prompt",DefaultValue)
where
VariableNumber must be in the range 0 to 9. is user prompt text to be displayed in the title bar of the dialog box opened by the macro. Prompt is placed into the variable if the user leaves the input eld blank. DefaultValue
The variable can be used as a substitution variable in the SEND_TEXT() macro, allowing user-initiated messages and commands to be transmitted to a connection. Example: GET_VALUE(2,"Enter counter start value",0) SEND_TEXT("dt800 Com1","5C=%2")
UM-0070-A0
194
MESSAGE_BOX
Displays a Yes/No dialog box containing the dened message text. If the user clicks No, the action terminates immediately and no following macros are processed. If the user clicks Yes, execution of the action proceeds to the next macro. This macro can typically be used as an Are You Sure? dialog box. Syntax: MESSAGE_BOX("MessageText")
where
FIGURE
MessageText appears here.
The action stops. The action proceeds. 272 Macro message box
MessageText is user prompt text to be displayed in the dialog box opened by the macro.
Example: MESSAGE_BOX("Do you wish to clear data from logger?")
MESSAGE_LINE
Displays the message text in the Messages tab of the Event Logs window (Figure 249 on page 167). Syntax: MESSAGE_LINE("MessageText")
where
MessageText is the text you want displayed in the Messages tab of the Event Logs window.
Example: MESSAGE_LINE("Data download completed.")
Miscellaneous Macros
DELAY
Delays executing any following macros until the specied number of seconds has elapsed. Syntax: DELAY("Seconds")
where
Seconds is the number of seconds to wait.

Example: DELAY("10")
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
195
UM-0070-A0
5-4
SCHEDULING ACTIONS (SCHEDULE UTILITY)

be dened, each performing different tasks at different times. Schedule is a separate Windows application from DeLogger Pro. You launch it from the Windows Start menu by choosing Start > Programs > DeLogger > Schedule. For Schedule to do its work, you must launch it and leave it running on the computer. Then: If Schedule is to run DeLogger Pro actions or reports, DeLogger Pro must also be running and have the project open to which the scheduled actions or reports belong. If Schedule is to run Windows programs, DeLogger Pro does not need to be running.
71
The Schedule utility is provided in DeLogger Pro only, and is used to automate the running of tasks such as DeLogger Pro actions Windows programs DeLogger Pro reports. Schedule can trigger these tasks to run in a number of ways: once at a particular date and time (for example, on July 6th at 16:00:00) at a user-dened interval (for example, every hour forever) at a user-dened interval (for example, every 12 hours) over a user-dened period (for example, the month of July) Each denition of the task to perform and its trigger is called a schedule71. Up to 15 concurrent schedules can
Dont confuse the Schedule utilitys schedules with dataTaker schedules. They are not the same. Add a new schedule. Delete the selected schedule. Edit the selected schedule. Toggle the selected schedule ACTIVE or PAUSED. Run the selected schedule now. Pause all schedules (no schedules trigger while Pause is ticked).
Show/hide the status bar. Show/hide the toolbar. Display schedules as a detailed list. Display schedule icons only.
Menu bar Toolbar
To edit a schedule, double-click its icon to open its Properties dialog box sequence (Figure 274). Workspace
Status bar The Action ID column shows the name of any action, .exe file or report assigned to each schedule. The Schedule ID column shows each schedules icon (see Schedule Icons on page 197) and the unique name you gave to each schedule during definition.
FIGURE 273
UM-0070-A0
The Next Schedule column shows when the schedule is due to run next. The Status column shows ACTIVE when the schedule is enabled to run at the next trigger time, and PAUSED when the schedule is disabled. Toggle the selected schedules status using the Schedule > Active command (or the Toggle Active button).
The Schedule utilitys main window
196
When you launch Schedule, it displays its main window Figure 273. IMPORTANT The Schedule utility depends on the computers clock, so make sure that the clock is set to the correct date and time (Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Date/Time).
of retries until the action completes successfully. If a retry is successful, then the trigger increments to the next trigger time. If the retries are unsuccessful, the schedule is disabled (PAUSED). In the Retry and Timeout elds, enter the number of retries and the timeout (in seconds) between retries.
Schedule Icons In the main window, the type of schedule is indicated by icons as follows:
Action icon Report icon Windows program icon
Multiple-task icons The schedule runs the named DeLogger Pro action (previously dened in DeLogger Pro). The schedule runs the named DeLogger Pro report (previously dened in DeLogger Pro). The schedule runs the named Windows program (.exe le). The schedule runs two or three tasks.
Editing a Schedule
To edit a schedules properties, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Properties (or click the Properties button on the toolbar, or simply double-click the schedules icon). This opens the same dialogs as for adding a new schedule (Figure 274), and any entry (other than the Schedule ID) can be edited.
Setting the Activity of a Schedule

Schedules can be enabled to respond to triggers (schedule is ACTIVE), or disabled from responding to triggers (schedule is PAUSED). To change the activity status of a schedule, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Active (or click the Toggle Active button on the toolbar). Each schedules activity status is listed in the Status column (window must be in View > Details mode).
Right-Click Menu The following commands are duplicated on the Schedule utilitys right-click menu: Schedule > Add Schedule > Delete Schedule > Properties
Adding a New Schedule

To add a new schedule to the Schedule utility, choose Schedule > Add. Figure 274 explains the sequence of screens that opens. NOTE A Schedule utility schedule can run one or more tasks a DeLogger Pro action and/or a Windows program and/or a DeLogger Pro report.
Running a Schedule Now

Schedules can be manually triggered at any time. To do this, highlight the schedule (single-click its icon) and choose Schedule > Run Now (or click the Run Now button on the toolbar). The schedule will still trigger and run at the date and time listed in the Next Schedule column (window must be in View > Details mode).
DeLogger Pro Area If you want the new schedule to run a DeLogger Pro action, enter the action details in the DeLogger Pro area of the rst screen of Figure 274: From the Action drop-down list, select the action. The actions that appear here are those created in DeLogger Pro (see Conguration > Actions on page 55). The Schedule utility communicates with DeLogger Pro by means of DDE while running an action, and relies on DeLogger Pro responding that the action is complete before agging the action locally as having been completed. You can set a timeout period for DeLogger Pro to respond, and the maximum number
CHAPTER 5: ACTIONS
Global Pause
To prevent all schedules from running, choose Schedule > Pause (or click the Global Pause button on the toolbar). When in this mode, each schedules status reported in the Status column doesnt change, but a tick appears beside Pause on the Schedule menu and the Global Pause button appears pressed.
5-4 Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility)
197
UM-0070-A0
Specify an action and/or a Windows program to run. Give every schedule a unique name. Set a Priority for the schedule to instruct the Schedule utility how to arbitrate the situation of two or more triggers occurring at the same time. (If several schedules priorities are the same and their triggers coincide, the schedules are run in alphabetical order.) 0 = highest priority 9 = lowest priority If the program requires commandline Parameters when run, type them here.
See DeLogger Pro Area on page 197.
If you want the schedule to run a Windows program (.exe), type the path to the file here, or click Browse and locate it in the dialog box that opens.
Specify a report to run.
If you want the schedule to run a DeLogger Pro report, select it here. (To create reports, see Configuration > Reports on page 57.)
If the report requires input parameters (such as a session name or channel name) that were specified when the report was created (Figure 61) , type them in the Param fields.
Select the reports destination: view on-screen (Window), print on the computers system Printer, or Export as an HTML document stored in DeLogger Pros \Publish\html\Reports folder.
Select Daily if you want the schedule to trigger every day forever. Select Recurse (then make selections from the three dropdown lists) if you want the schedule to repeat on a particular day/month combination. Select Once if you want the schedule to trigger once only on the day(s) defined in the Date area, and type the trigger time in the format shown. Select Recurse if you want the schedule to repeat through the day(s) defined in the Date area, type Start and End times to specify the part of the day during which the schedule will trigger, and type the time interval between triggers in the Frequency field.
FIGURE 274
UM-0070-A0
Specify the schedules trigger.
The Schedule utilitys Properties screens (for creating or editing a schedule)
198
CHAPTER 6
REPORTS
6-1
REPORTS INTRODUCTION
6-2
You can run reports on dataTaker alarms (if youve enabled them for logging72) see Reports > Alarms on page 127) dataTaker errors (if youve enabled them for logging72) see Reports > Errors on page 128) the Schedule log and the actions log see Reports > Log Files on page 128) dataTaker data see Reports > Database Reports on
page 129.
REPORT TOOLS AND THE DATA DATABASE
You can run reports against the replay data73 (sessions) stored in DeLogger Pros data database using dedicated report-writing software such as Crystal Reports74 third party tools such as Access 2.0 by Microsoft programming tools such as Visual Basic spreadsheet applications such as Microsoft Excel. DeLogger Pros default is to use the Crystal Reports Engine, which is installed with DeLogger. This is the preferred reporting tool because of its power, exibility, and ease of use for both technical and non-technical users. In addition, because all the stored data can be accessed using ODBC technology, spreadsheets such as Microsoft Excel can be used to read and report on the data where more complicated calculations or graphing is required. Most software packages are now ODBC-enabled, giving a wide range of reporting and statistical options.
This is summarized in Figure 275.
Running Reports There are three ways of running reports: from the Reports menu see The Reports Menu beginning on page 127 using an action, which can be triggered by an alarm or a mimic button see Conguration > Actions on page 55 using the Schedule utility see Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) beginning on page 196
Because actions can be chained, you can group reports together.
73
72
See Logging Errors and Alarms on page 53.
74
See the Historical Data, Replay Data Extras panel on page 40. Crystal Reports by Crystal Computer Services, Inc.
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
6-1 Reports Introduction
199
UM-0070-A0
6-3
INSTALLED REPORTS AND SECONDARY REPORTS

Secondary Reports
You create secondary reports (also called database reports) using DeLogger Pros Database Properties dialog box (Figure 61) see Conguration > Reports on page 57. Secondary reports are based on installed reports, and exist as individual records in DeLoggers administration database. (Yes, you use secondary reports, which are kept in DeLoggers administration database, to run reports on DeLoggers data database.) Weve included a few secondary reports with DeLogger Pro. In a new DeLogger installation, they are the default records you see when you click the previous/next control buttons in the Conguration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61 on page 57) listed in the Report (Identiers) area of the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192 on page 129).
DeLogger Pro has two types of reports: installed reports (templates), and secondary reports (also called database reports).
Installed Reports
Installed reports are created using the third-party report-
writing software Crystal Reports74 and, to be available for use within DeLogger, must reside in DeLoggers designated reports folder (see Installed Reports Folder below). As Figure 275 shows, DeLogger is supplied with eight installed reports (for alarm and message reporting), and DeLogger Pro is supplied with two additional ones (for log reporting). You run these default installed reports from the Reports menu see Reports > Alarms on page 127 Reports > Errors on page 128 Reports > Log Files on page 128 or using an action see Conguration > Actions on page 55. You can also write your own installed reports, or have your dataTaker representative write them for you. This is discussed in DIY Installed Reports on page 202. You make these DIY installed reports available using the Conguration > Reports dialog box (Figure 61 on page 57), then run them using the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192 on page 129).
Installed Reports Folder For DeLogger to recognize Crystal Reports .rpt les as installed reports, the .rpt les must be placed in the folder referenced by the Windows registry key HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ Software\Discbell\DeLogger\Default\ReportDir, which by default is the Reports folder inside the DeLogger installation folder (see Figure 7 on page 18).
UM-0070-A0
200
dlp001.rpt dlp004.rpt dlp003.rpt dlp002.rpt
dataTaker alarm reports
Default installed reports (created outside DeLogger Pro using Crystal Reports, and supplied/installed with DeLogger). Run from the Reports menu.
dlp010.rpt dlp013.rpt dlp012.rpt dlp011.rpt
dataTaker error reports
dlp030.rpt Schedule utility log report and action log report dlp040.rpt Default installed report files (in \Report folder)
dataTaker data reports, other reports
DIY installed reports, and secondary reports (created in DeLogger Pro based on installed reports (see Figure 99) see Figure 61). Run from the Reports > Database Reports dialog box (Figure 192). See Figure 192.
FIGURE 275
Reports overview
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
6-3 Installed Reports and Secondary Reports
201
UM-0070-A0
6-4
GLOBAL FORMULAS
Holds the name of the current database logging session (the last block of data logged to the database) Holds the name of the previous database logging session (the previous block of data logged to the database)
DeLogger Pro denes two global formulas:

@CurrentSessionID
2. Ensure that the data will be stored correctly in the database. Note that there is also an in-built Query in the database that will give you a cross-tab report of the rst 100 data points for each channel on any session. 3. Design your report on paper. 4. Decide how many parameters (maximum of eight) will need to be passed to the report and how they will be used. The parameters dened for the report within DeLogger Pro are automatically passed into Crystal Reports formulas75 at run time with the names Param1 to Param8. These dened formulas can be utilized in other formulas or in the record/group selection criteria thereby allowing great exibility. For example, you can use the rst parameter to dene a session name that is passed into the Crystal Reports formula Param1 at run time and use it in the record selection criteria to only read those records whose session name matches the parameter value. 5. Create the report using Crystal Reports. 6. Move the report (.rpt le) into the Report folder in DeLoggers installation directory, ensuring it has a unique name. 7. Make an entry in the database for this report, along with any required default parameters. To make an entry, see Figure 61 on page 57. 8. If required, create an action entry in the database so that the report can be run from an incoming alarm or from a mimic button. Because actions can be chained, you can group reports together. 9. Run the report (see Reports > Database Reports on page 129) and compare the results against your control data.
@PreviousSessionID
If you select these as secondary report parameters (see Figures 61 and 192), DeLogger Pro converts them to the corresponding session names when the report is run.
6-5
DIY INSTALLED REPORTS
If you want to Do It Yourself that is, write and install your own reports into DeLogger Pro youll need to buy a copy of Crystal Reports (Version 7.0). Its available from most software suppliers or through your local dataTaker representative. Alternatively, your dataTaker representative can write reports for you.
Installing and Using an Installed Repor t To install one of these report les:
1. Place the .rpt le into DeLoggers designated reports folder see Installed Reports Folder on page 200 2. Create a new report entry in the database (Figure 61 on page 57). You do this so that you can access the report (using the Reports > Database Reports command page 129).
Report-Writing Guidelines If you want to write your own installed reports (you must use Crystal Reports to be compatible with DeLogger) we recommend that you follow this sequence:
1. Decide on the data thats required in your report and how youll obtain it. Decide on where its best to apply any data reduction: in the dataTaker (using statistical functions, or in the report using its in-built functions.
UM-0070-A0
75
You must ensure that these formulas exist in the report if you want to use them. See Parameter Fields on page 57.
202
CHAPTER 7
DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE

7-1
SCHEDULE UTILITY SITEADMIN UTILITY

IMPORTANT You cannot do these tasks directly from DeLogger or DeLogger Pro. DeLogger or DeLogger Pro must not be running when you use SiteAdmin. You cannot start SiteAdmin from within DeLogger or DeLogger Pro. (Start it from the Windows taskbar by choosing Start > Programs > DeLogger > SiteAdmin, or use Explorer or My Computer to locate the siteadmin.exe le in DeLoggers installation folder then double-click the le.) Not all of SiteAdmins functions apply to DeLogger (see table above).
See Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) on page 196.
7-2
There are two working databases76 used by DeLogger: an administration database, which stores global details such as actions, connections properties, logs of dataTaker alarms and errors, and logs of when schedules and actions executed a data database, which stores database logging session data
SiteAdmin is a separate utility that you use to administer
and maintain these databases. It allows you to do the following tasks:

Delete Delete data from data logging sessions. Delete entire data logging sessions. Delete runtime logs for dataTaker alarms and dataTaker errors. Delete runtime logs for DeLogger actions and Schedule utility schedules. Pack the databases. Archive the data database. Clear the entire data database. Browse a sessions contents. Replace a corrupt data database with a clean, new copy. Produce reports of site (connections) denitions, action denitions and port denitions.
Warning When SiteAdmin is launched, it provides the following warning:
Pack Archive Clear Browse Start again Report
FIGURE 276
SiteAdmins opening warning
76
They are FoxPro databases a FoxPro database engine is installed when you install DeLogger.
The databases can only be accessed by one program at a time. Therefore, if DeLogger or DeLogger Pro is running, exit (quit) it now, before continuing with
203
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 7: DELOGGER UTILITY SOFTWARE
7-1 Schedule Utility
SiteAdmin. (Use Alt+Tab to switch to DeLogger or DeLogger Pro, exit it, then continue working in SiteAdmin.)
remove this un-linked/un-needed information from the database and reduce its size, you use Pack Database.
SiteAdmins Main Window After you click OK in the warning dialog box (Figure 276), SiteAdmins main window opens:
Pack Database > Administration DB Packs DeLoggers administration database, which contains information such as dataTaker error and alarm logs DeLogger connection denitions DeLogger default settings DeLogger actions DeLogger reports DeLogger web publishing settings DeLogger database channel logging session denitions. Pack Database > Data DB Packs DeLoggers data database, which contains all database channel logging sessions and all unload sessions.
FIGURE 277
SiteAdmins main window
Administration > Session Administration

Allows you to administer sessions. You can clear data from selected sessions delete selected sessions delete all sessions browse a sessions contents. When you choose Session Administration, the Session Data dialog box opens:
Commands on the File and Edit menus (except File > Exit) have no function in the DeLogger implementation of SiteAdmin, the FoxPro database administration tool. You use commands on the Administration and Reports menus for maintaining and reporting on your DeLogger databases.
Administration Menu
FIGURE 278
SiteAdmins Administration menu
Administration > Pack Database

When you delete any database information within the various modules of the DeLogger, such as actions and connection properties within DeLogger schedules using the Schedule utility logs using the SiteAdmin utility data from database channel logging sessions using the SiteAdmin utility only the links to these items within the appropriate database are removed, not the actual items. In other words, deleting items does not reduce the size of the database. (This is typical of most database software.) To
UM-0070-A0
FIGURE 279
Session Data dialog box
Make a selection from the Session drop-down list, then click Clear Session Data to clear all data from the selected session (for database channel logging sessions, the session denition is not deleted; you can re-use it later) click Delete Session to delete the selected session (the sessions data and its denition are removed from the database) click Browse to see the contents of the selected session (a separate window opens).
204
Click Delete All Sessions if you want to delete ALL sessions (data and denitions) from the database. In case you click this button accidentally, an Are you sure? dialog box opens giving you a chance to undo the mistake (phew). REMEMBER to pack the data database after deleting sessions see Administration > Pack Database on page 204.
Secondly, you clean the current data database (that is, remove all data from it) and pack it. You do this on the Clean Database tab of the Data Archive dialog box (Figure 282). RECOMMENDATION Pack the data database before archiving it see Administration > Pack Database on page 204.
Administration > Log File Administration

Allows you to administer the dataTaker errors log and the dataTaker alarms log. If Log Errors and/or Log Alarms are ticked in DeLoggers Congurations > Defaults dialog box (Figure 57 on page 52), errors and alarm messages from connected dataTakers are logged into the administration database. Details of when DeLogger actions run and when Schedule utility schedules run are also logged into the administration database. When you choose Log File Administration, the Log File Maintenance dialog box opens:
Step 1 Choose Administration > Archive Data Database. The Data Archive dialog box opens (Figure 281)
Step 1 Replace any one of these databases with a copy of the current data database.
FIGURE 281
Data Archive dialog box Archive To tab
Click the Archive To tab (to ensure that its active), then click the button corresponding to the destination you want. DeLogger replaces the contents of the destination database with a copy of the current data database. (Are you sure? messages give you a chance to change your mind.)
Step 2
FIGURE 280
Log File Maintenance dialog box Step 2 Clean (erase all) and pack the data database.
Click Clear Alarm Log, Clear Error Log, Clear Action Log or Clear Schedule Log to clear (empty) all information from the respective log le. REMEMBER to pack the administration database after clearing the log le(s) see Administration > Pack Database on page 204.
Administration > Archive Data Database

After prolonged use or when you complete a major project, you may want to save the data database elsewhere for future reference (archive it). SiteAdmins Archive Data Database function is a two-step process: Firstly, you copy the current data database into one of the archive databases or to the historical database77. You do this on the Archive To tab of the Data Archive dialog box (Figure 281).
FIGURE 282
Data Archive dialog box Clean Database tab
Click the Clean Database tab (to ensure that its active), then click Clean and Pack. DeLogger erases all data from the current data database and packs it. (Are you
77
DeLogger actually has ve pre-dened data databases the current data database, three archive databases, and an historical database. See How Many, What, Where? on page 226.
7-2 SiteAdmin Utility
205
UM-0070-A0
sure? messages give you a chance to change your mind.)
Reports > Action Listing

Produces a detailed listing of the actions that have been dened within DeLogger under Conguration > Actions (Figure 58 on page 55).
Copy Clean DeLogger can be used in remote situations, or in situations not ideal for computers, where its possible for incidents such as power uctuations and electrical interference to occur during prolonged sessions of data logging to the database. Such disturbances may partially damage, or even corrupt, the open database le.
If this occurs and you cant use the current data database any more, your only option is to replace the damaged database with a clean, new database. You do this by clicking the Copy Clean button in the Clean Database tab of the Data Archive dialog box Figure 283. (After you click the button, Are you sure? messages give you a chance to change your mind.)
Reports > Port

Produces a detailed listing of the Ethernet ports that have been dened within DeLogger under Connections > Properties > Network tab (Figure 48 on page 45).
Closing SiteAdmin
The File > Close command is not supported in this implementation of SiteAdmin. To close (exit/quit/shut down) SiteAdmin, either click the Close icon at the top right-hand corner of the main window, or choose File > Exit.
Replace the data database with a clean, new, empty data database.
FIGURE 283
Data Archive dialog box Copy Clean button
Reports Menu
FIGURE 284
SiteAdmins Reports menu
SiteAdmins Reports menu contains commands that allow you to run three types of reports on DeLoggers administration database.
Reports > Site Listing

Produces a detailed listing of the sites or connections that have been dened within DeLogger under Connections > Properties > Serial tab (Figure 45 on page 43).
UM-0070-A0
206
7-3
IUSER
UTILITY
See Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser) on page 235.
7-4
REPLAY FILE UTILITIES

The les are located in the \DeLogger\Tools folder. They must be run from a DOS prompt (Start menu > Programs > MS-DOS Prompt, or simply double-click the le in the Windows Explorer).
Two command-line utilities that allow you to manage replay les (.dlr) are provided with DeLogger: dlr2dlr.exe allows you to cut large replay les into smaller, more-manageable les based on size or date. dlr2txt.exe allows you to convert replay les into different forms of .csv or .txt les suitable for loading into other programs such as Excel.
FIGURE 285
dlr2dlr and dlr2txt replay le utilities

UM-0070-A0
7-3 iUser Utility
207
CHAPTER 8
SAVING WHAT, WHEN, WHERE

8-1
WHATS SAVED WHEN

See also Load Existing Message Entries on page 52.
As youd expect, you can choose whether or not to save changes you make to a projects appearance and contents. This is explained in Manual Saves. In addition, be aware that DeLogger saves some information automatically. This is explained in Automatic Saves.
Saving Errors and Alarms When the Log Errors and Log Alarms options in Figure 57 are ticked, errors and alarms from connected dataTakers are automatically logged (in the administration database) as they arrive.
Automatic Saves
Saving Main Window Details (Global) The following global information is automatically saved (in the computers system registry) every time you exit DeLogger whether or not you choose to save changes: main window details (minimized/maximized state, position, size,) the last project used toolbar and events window states and locations all settings in the File > Customize dialog box (background, splash screen, see page 29) Saving Data Hub Details (Project-Specic) Changes you make to the data hub done in the Data Hub Channels dialog box (see Figure 63 on page 59) are automatically saved when you click Close in the the dialog box. They are saved to the projects .dlw le (see page 22) and are therefore project-specic. Saving New Documents When you add a new document to a project, DeLogger automatically saves the project (to its .dlw le). Saving Messages All DeLogger message events are automatically logged in the message.txt le in DeLoggers installation directory as they occur.
UM-0070-A0
Manual Saves
Saving Administration Details The settings on the following tabs of DeLoggers administration dialog boxes are saved (to DeLoggers administration database) when you click the appropriate tabs Accept button: all tabs in the Connections dialog box (Connections menu > Properties) Serial tab (Figure 45) Network tab (Figure 48) Modem tab (Figure 49) Auto-Answer Modem tab (Figure 53) File tab (Figure 54) Database tab (Figure 55) Conguration (Database Properties) dialog boxes Defaults tab (Conguration menu > Defaults; Figure 57) Actions tab (Conguration menu > Actions; Figure 58) Reports tab (Conguration menu > Reports; Figure 61) Web Publish tab (Conguration menu > Web Publish; Figure 62)
See also Database Delicacies on page 226.
208
Saving Project Details Choosing File > Save Project78 saves all the les in the projects folder (Figure 14): its .dlw le (the projects master le) its sub-window les (.dlf, .dlc, .dlt, .dlm,), which hold all the sub-window details (types, sizes, positions and so on)
all data, information and settings in the sub-windows (for example, chart and program builder contents, and spreadsheet contents, print range and page breaks). See alsoFile > Save Project on page 23.
8-2
WHATS STORED WHERE

DeLogger data hub channels and their details new documents the name and location of the projects admin and data databases DeLogger database channel logging session denitions See Conguration > Data Hub Channels on page 59. See File > New on page 21. See How Many, What, Where? on page 226. Automatic saves
DeLogger stores data and other information as follows:

Each projects project master le stores (see .dlw File on page 22)
Windows system registry stores
DeLoggers message.txt le stores The administration database stores
See Conguration > Database Channel Logging Sessions on page 60. DeLogger main window details Unless the Workspace State Remember options are un-ticked see Figure 31 on page 32. some Defaults tab settings See Conguration > Defaults on page 52. DeLogger web publishing See Conguration > Web Publish settings on page 58. DeLogger messages See Load Existing Message Entries on page 52. dataTaker errors See Logging Errors and Alarms on page 53. dataTaker alarms See The Connections Menu on Manual page 38. saves some Defaults tab settings See Conguration > Defaults on page 52. DeLogger actions See Conguration > Actions on page 55. DeLogger secondary reports See Conguration > Reports on page 57. Schedule utility schedules See Scheduling Actions (Schedule Utility) on page 196. dataTaker data as its received Data logging doesnt occur automatically you either in real time (saved to a must initiate it. See Conguration > Database logging session) or from an Channel Logging Sessions on page 60 and unload operation (saved to an dataTaker > Unload on page 64. unload session) DeLogger connections
The data database stores
See also Database Delicacies on page 226.
78
Or clicking Yes when asked if you want to save changes when closing a project or exiting DeLogger.
CHAPTER 8: SAVING WHAT, WHEN, WHERE
8-2 Whats Stored Where
209
UM-0070-A0
CHAPTER 9
ADVANCED TOPICS
9-1
THE DATA HUB
The data hub79 is a central marshalling point and repository for information and data coming into DeLogger Pro from various sources. See Figure 43. DeLogger Pros data hub accepts realtime and logged data from connected dataTakers data from data les (replay les) data from DeLogger Pros data database (sessions) and individual data channels may contain data from input channels data from calculations in the dataTaker data from dataTaker alarm states. The data hub keeps track of all the individual data channels from current connections, and makes their data available to the various modules and views of DeLogger Pro. All of this information is stored in the projects master le (see .dlw File on page 22) and is therefore project-specic. NOTE The data hub is only accessible in DeLogger Pro.
FIGURE 286
The data hub dialog box no channels
Data Hub Dialog Box You view and congure the data hubs contents in the Data Hub Channels dialog box, which you open by choosing the Conguration menu > Data Hub Channels command see page 59. Pressing the F5 key on your keyboard also opens this dialog box.
If DeLogger is not connected to any dataTakers, and there are no replay les or database sessions open, the Data Hub Channels dialog box either looks like an empty spreadsheet (Figure 286) if DeLogger Pro has never been connected to a data site, or contains the channel entries left from previous connections. But when DeLogger Pro is connected to a dataTaker that has a program running, or to a replay le or database session within DeLogger Pro, the data hub dialog box
FIGURE 287
79
The data hub dialog box one connection
Introduced in the Data Hub Extras panel on page 62.
UM-0070-A0
210
contains the data channels associated with the connection (Figure 287). Moreover, if DeLogger Pro is connected to more than one data source, the data hub
dialog box contains a tab (along the bottom edge) for each connection (Figure 288). View a connections channels by clicking its tab.
The rate of each channels schedule Not used See Channel Flags on page 59. Channel display settings see Screen 1 of Figure 289. Changes are automatically saved (in the projects .dlw file) when you Close the dialog box.
Figure 289 (page 213) Figure 293 (page 219) Clear (delete) the current job tab (and its channels) from the data hub. Cleared jobs no longer appear in the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro views. If cleared channels are specified in any of the views, DeLogger Pro generates error messages in the events log window. Take care when clearing jobs once cleared, they cant be recovered until DeLogger Pro makes that connection again. File connection Job tabs Serial connections Virtual channels Tick to prevent changes to the job currently visible in the dialog box (also prevents DeLogger Pro automatically updating the jobs details in the data hub if the connection is re-made).
FIGURE 288
The data hub dialog box several connections
Data Channels in the Data Hub

The data hub lists the following information for every data channel of every current connection to DeLogger Pro: connection name job name dataTaker scan schedule dataTaker channel name current value datestamp and timestamp of current value last value datestamp and timestamp of last value highest value lowest value units status software alarm limits, alarm message and alarm action conditional tests
CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-1 The Data Hub
dependant tests DDE conversation handle (hot link details) OPC link handle database logging sessions
Data Channel ID Each data channel in the data hub dialog box has a unique identity, which is used in DeLogger Pro to identify individual data items within the data streams available throughout a project. The data channel ID is a combination of the connection name, job name, dataTaker scan schedule and dataTaker channel name in the format
ConnectionName.JobName.ScheduleName.ChannelName
For example: dt50 Com1.JOB1.B.5V dt800 Com2.JOB1.B.3PT385 dt800 Com2.JOB1.B.AirTemp dt800 Remote.Well_C.D.MotorCurrent
211
UM-0070-A0
For DT5/6xx dataTakers, JobName is always JOB1. For DT8xx dataTakers, JobName is the name assigned in the program builder and defaults to JOB1. For DT5/6xx dataTakers, ScheduleName is always A, B, C or D. For DT8xx dataTakers, ScheduleName can be A, B, C, D, E,K or a custom name assigned in the program builder.
ChannelName is either the actual dataTaker command
In this way, DeLogger Pros data hub is always automatically up-to-date with complete channel details of all the current connections. (File and database connections contain their own STATUS10/11/14 information, from which DeLogger Pro sets up the data hub for these connection types.) See also Connections > Manual Integrity Check on page 39). If the Synchronise channel list to dataTaker option in the Conguration > Defaults dialog box (Figure 57) is not ticked, step 2 above is not actioned for any connections (including le and database connections). If Lock Job is ticked in the data hub dialog box (Figure 63) for the ConnectionName.JobName combination, step 2 above is not actioned. The data channel information in the data hub is projectspecic, and is held in the projects master le (see .dlw File on page 22).
for the channel, or a custom label assigned in the program builder.
Data Hub Automatic Updating Whenever DeLogger Pro connects to a dataTaker, it issues a STATUS10 command (STATUS11 for a memory card) to DT5/6xx dataTakers a STATUS14 command to DT8xx dataTakers to obtain information about the jobs and channel data that is available from the dataTaker. DeLogger Pro uses this STATUS information to build the data hub details for each connection. (See also How the Data Hub Gets Its Information on page 39.)
In addition, if the resulting data is captured into a DeLogger replay le or database session, the STATUS information is also stored for use when you later connect to these. DeLogger Pro adds jobs and data channels to the data hub as follows: 1. When you connect to a dataTaker with the Skip STATUS Check option80 un-ticked (the default), DeLogger Pro issues a STATUS10 to a DT5/6xx dataTaker (STATUS11 for an inserted memory card) a STATUS14 to a DT8xx dataTaker for each job. 2. ConnectionName.JobName combination: If the ConnectionName.JobName combination does not already exist in the data hub, a new entry is created for ConnectionName.JobName and all real channels are added. If the ConnectionName.JobName combination already exists in the data hub, its channels are agged as dirty and are compared to the new list of channels as follows: If any of the new list of channels already exists in the hub, its dirty ag is cleared. If any of the new list of channels does not exist in the hub, it is added. Old channels still agged as dirty are removed because they no longer exist in the connected dataTaker.
80
Primary and Virtual Data Channels The data channels that originate from dataTakers are called primary channels.
Virtual channels are data channels that you create within
the data hub. They are not directly mapped to a physical channel or calculation in a dataTaker they exist only within DeLogger Pro. For more information, see Virtual Data Channels beginning on page 215.
Distribution of Channel Data within DeLogger Pro The data from primary and virtual channels in the data hub is made available by the data hub to DeLogger Pros various functions and views. Each of these has a channel list, from which you select channels for use in the function or view. For example, see the form window Select Channels dialog box in Figure 211 (page 137) the chart window Channel elds in Figure 102 (page 88) the mimic meter Channel elds in Figure 125 (page 98).
Serial, network and modem connections see Figures 45, 48 and 49.
UM-0070-A0
212
Data Hub Functions

The data hub has functions that allow you to manage primary channels and virtual channels see Setting a Channels Properties in the Data Hub below add virtual channels see Adding a Store Channel on page 216 and Adding a Calculated Channel on page 218. manage each channels data in various ways before passing it on. In fact, you can specify the channels visibility, test its range, make it dependant on another channel, and specify alarm and store settings. To set these properties for a primary channel or a virtual channel, choose Conguration menu > Data Hub Channels and then, in the dialog box that opens (Figure 63 or Figure 288), click the connection tab that contains the channel, select the channel you want to congure, and click the Properties button. DeLogger Pro presents you with the rst screen of the sequence shown in Figure 289. Work through the screens in Figures 289 and 290 to congure one or more properties for the selected channel.
Setting a Channels Properties in the Data Hub

DeLoggers default is to pass incoming data directly to its data views unchanged. But, in addition, the data hub contains tools that you can use to test, modify and
Screen 1: Specify the channels visibility. The name of the selected channel apears here. Untick if you want to hide the channel from the choice lists of any DeLogger Pro functions and views. Then when you return to the data hub dialog box (at the end of this screen sequence), No appears in the Show column for this channel. When unticked, the channel is still available to virtual channels created from it. Click Next to move to Screen 2. Screen 2: Define a conditional test for the selected channels data. See Conditional Settings on page 214. Select the Condition. Type one or two set-point values as required by the condition. When ticked, out-of-range channel data is clipped (set) to the respective set-point. Click Next to move to Screen 3. Screen 3: Define a dependancy test (the channels validity depends on another channels conditional test). See Dependant Settings on page 214.
Select the other channel and its condition, and type one or two setpoint values as required by the test. Click Next to move to Screen 4.
Continued in Figure 290 (Screens 4 and 5)

FIGURE 289
Setting data hub channel properties screen sequence (1 of 2)
CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS
9-1 The Data Hub
213
UM-0070-A0
Conditional Settings In screen 2 of Figure 289, you test the range of the selected channels data. Failing the test results in a change of the channels status ag (see Channel Logging Mode on page 53), which is used as a lter for various DeLogger Pro functions and views see the Show Invalid Date eld in, for example, Figure 98 (page 84)
by virtual channels see the Input Status Options dialog box at the bottom-left of Figure 290. Failed channels display with different colours in form views.
Dependant Settings In screen 3 of Figure 289, you dene that the validity of the selected channels data is dependant on the value of
Screen 4: Specify internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms for the selected channel. See Alarm Settings on page 215. Apply up to five alarm tests to the channel. For each of the five tests you want to apply: Tick Active to enable the alarm test. Type the alarm threshold Value. Type a Text message (optional). Tick Generate Alarm Event to display the text message in the Event Logs window when the alarm becomes true. If you want the alarm to trigger an Action, select the action in the drop-down list. For a primary channel, click Finish. For a virtual channel, click Next to move to Screen 5a or 5b.
From Fig. 289
Screen 5a: Store channel settings (store-type virtual channel only). See Store Channels on page 216. Screen 5b: Calculated channel settings (calculation-type virtual channel only). See Calculated Channels on page 218.
See the Advanced Settings rows in the table on page 217.

FIGURE 290
UM-0070-A0
Setting data hub channel properties screen sequence (2 of 2)
214
another channel. For example, a channel that monitors the temperature of a furnace can be dened as valid only if the furnace is actually operating, as indicated by another channel. Channels from all jobs are listed in the Channel dropdown list in screen 3 (where you select the other channel). This means that you can assign the validity of a data channel on one dataTaker to depend on the value of a data channel on a different dataTaker. Failing the test results in a change of the channels status ag (see Channel Logging Mode on page 53), which is used as a lter for various DeLogger Pro functions and views see the Show Invalid Date eld in, for example, Figure 98 (page 84) by virtual channels see the Input Status Options dialog box at the bottom-left of Figure 290. Failed channels display with different colours in form views.
Virtual Data Channels

As introduced in Primary and Virtual Data Channels on page 212, virtual channels are data channels that you create within the data hub. They are not directly mapped to a physical channel or calculation in a dataTaker they exist only within DeLogger Pro. A virtual channel can be derived from primary channels or from other virtual channels. For example, a virtual channel could be a 15-minute rolling or static average of a primary channel, and itself could be used as the basis of a 24-hour rolling average. There are two types of virtual channels: store channels calculated channels A store channel is a one-dimensional array81 that can be lled with successive readings of another real or virtual channel, and a calculation made against the accumulated data. The size of the array is user-dened, as is the type of function used to calculate the result. The store can be rolling, where successive readings are added and the oldest removed, or resetting, where the array is lled, the calculation made and the store cleared ready for re-triggering. There are also options to control the status of the data being entered into the array. See Store Channels on page 216 for details. A calculated channel is based on a spreadsheet and can take any current real or virtual channel reading and apply user-dened algorithms. The result must be limited to a single reading within a user-specied cell. This result cell is used as the calculated channel reading. See Calculated Channels on page 218 for details.
Alarm Settings See screen 4 of Figure 290 and note the following: The optional Text message is displayed in form worksheets and in mimic window annunciators. When ticked, Generate Alarm Event instructs DeLogger Pro to generate an internal alarm that sends the contents of the Text eld to the Alarms tab of the event logs window (simulates an alarm from a dataTaker) embed the selected Action in the alarm message, causing the action to be run whenever the alarm is generated.
Alarm status is only checked when data has not failed either conditional or dependancy tests (that is, when data is not partially- or fully-invalid). Channels in alarm states display with different colors in mimic views. If you want to change the default colors advanced users only modify the system registry key
HKEY_CURRENT_USERS\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\ Alarms LLColour LColour NormalColour HColour HHColour.
The Virtual Job Data Hub

In the data hub, virtual channels are listed on the Virtual tab for the JobName of the dataTaker that is providing the base values. When you click a virtual tab in the data hub, additional buttons appear on the righthand side of the dialog box. Figure 291 explains.
The colors are dened in hexadecimal in three octets (rst is the blue component value, second is the green component value, third is the red component value); values for each octet range from 00 (no color for this component) to FF (full color for this component).
Order of Calculation Real channels are updated when new data is received for them. Each virtual channel is then called to check if it needs to re-calculate, which it does by checking if any of the base channels it uses have updated.
Virtual channels are called to calculate in the order they are displayed in the data hub (Figure 291). Therefore, if
81
Array: a sequence of memory locations used to store successive readings.
9-1 The Data Hub
215
UM-0070-A0
See Order of Calculation (page 215). Figure 289 (page 213) Figure 293 (page 219) Clears the selected channels store Deletes the selected virtual channel Clears the stores of all channels on the current tab See Figure 288 (page 211).
Virtual channels job tab See Figure 288 (page 211).

FIGURE 291
The data hub dialog box typical virtual job tab
a virtual channel is based on another virtual channel (the base channel), the based-on channel must be later in the displayed order (that is, lower down the dialog box) than the base channel. You change the order of display using the Move Up and Move Down buttons in Figure 291.
size, but will then be every time the base channel updates. The size of each array is limited to 4096 readings.
Store Channels
A store channel is a virtual channel that stores successive readings from a real or virtual base channel, and calculates a result based on a selected function. There are two types of store channels; rolling and resetting.
Rolling Store Channel A rolling store channel lls an array82 with successive real or virtual base channel readings, calculates the result, and waits for the next base channel reading.
When the second and subsequent base readings are received, the rolling store shifts all of the values in the array down one, places the new reading at the end of the array, then re-calculates. Therefore the frequency of the result is initially the base channel rate times the array
Resetting Store Channel A resetting store channel lls an array82, calculates a result, and then clears the array ready to re-ll again when the trigger condition is met. Therefore the frequency of a result is the base channel update rate times the array size, controlled by the trigger frequency. If the trigger frequency is set lower the number of entries required to ll the array, the calculation is made at the trigger point and the data is tagged PARTIALLY_INVALID.
NOTE The trigger frequency is always synchronised to the time units selected. For example, if Seconds is selected, the trigger is always be synchronised to the 0th second of each minute.
Adding a Store Channel To add a store-type virtual channel:

1. Choose Conguration menu > Data Hub Channels. 2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 288 on page 211), click the Add Virtual button. DeLogger Pro presents you with the rst screen of the sequence shown in Figures 293 and 294 (page 219).
82
Array: a sequence of memory locations used to store successive readings.
UM-0070-A0
216
3. Work through screens 1 to 4, conguring the new virtual channels visibility, conditional test, dependancy test and alarms if you want.83 4. In screen 5: a) In the Type area, select Rolling or Fixed Store. b) In the Allowed Input area, you can specify that the virtual channel is only updated with Realtime data, or with Logged data. c) Click Next. 5. In screen 6a that opens (Figure 294 on page 220), specify the nal details of the new store channel. The next table describes the items in screen 6a. 6. When youre done in screen 6a, click Finish to complete the denition of the virtual channel. The new virtual channel appears on the Virtual.JOB1 tab of the data hub, and is available in the choice lists of the various functions and views of DeLogger Pro.
Channel Label
Store Channel Functions The following functions are available for calculations in store channels: Average calculates the average value of the array Maximum calculates the maximum reading within the array Minimum calculates the minimum reading within the array Average Deviation calculates the average deviation using the formula 1 -- x x n Standard Deviation (Sample) calculates the standard deviation (based on a sample) using the formula
n x ( x) --------------------------------------n(n 1)
2 2
Standard Deviation (Entire) calculates the standard deviation (based on the entire population) using the formula n x ( x) --------------------------------------2 n Variance calculates the variance using the formula
2 2
n x ( x) --------------------------------------n(n 1) 50th Percentile (median value) returns the 50th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for
2 2
83
Advanced Settings (button)
Type a unique name for the new virtual channel. Base Channel Select the primary or virtual base channel from the drop-down list. Rate Display eld only. Shows the update rate of the virtual channel (duplicates the base channels rate). Array Size Select the number of values to be stored for each calculation. Exceedency Determines when the result of the virtual channel becomes invalid. It allows up to this number of entries to fail conditional and dependancy tests (the channel is agged as PARTIALLY_INVALID), and switches into fully invalid mode when the threshold is reached (the channel is agged as INVALID). Setting to 0 removes this check (= always valid). A rolling store channel is agged as PARTIALLY_INVALID until the array is lled. Type Select the type of calculation required: average maximum minimum SD sample SD entire population average deviation variance 25th percentile 50th percentile (median) 75th percentile See Store Channel Functions below. Rolling Store Tick for a rolling store. Leave un-ticked for a resetting store. Trigger/Synchronise Select the trigger interval in the every Day/Hour/Minute/Second eld and the number eld. Failed Choose base channel inclusion Conditional options (dialog box is shown in allowed in Array bottom-left of Figure 290) Failed Dependancy allowed in Array Partially Invalid allowed in Array
Table: Store channel items in screen 6a of Figure 294
You can change these later. This is covered in Setting a Channels Properties in the Data Hub on page 213.
9-1 The Data Hub
217
UM-0070-A0
example, to examine values above the 50th percentile). 25th Percentile (rst quartile) returns the 25th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 25th percentile).
75th Percentile (third quartile) returns the 75th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 75th percentile). 90th Percentile returns the 90th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 90th percentile). 95th Percentile returns the 95th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance (for example, to examine values above the 95th percentile).
c) In the Select Channel(s) for Virtual dialog box that opens, select the channel(s) you want to use as the base channel(s) then click OK. You can select one or more channels from any source. That is, any channels that are currently in the data hub, including other virtual channels and channels from different dataTakers. To select a group of adjacent channels, click the rst channel of the group and drag to the last channel or the group (or Shift-click the last channel). To select a group of non-adjacent channels, hold down the Ctrl key while you click the channels you want. d) Click in cell D1 (or E1, F1, G1,), then enter your calculation formula in the formula bar (Figure 292). Multiple steps for the calculation can use additional cells, with the result occurring in the last cell. e) Type the reference to the result cell in the Result Cell Reference eld. f) Type units text in the Units eld g) Tick Failed Conditional or Dependant Allowed in Calculation if you want the channels value to be included in the calculation even if it has failed conditional or dependancy checks you may have applied (Screens 2 and 3 in Figure 293). Allowing failed values may distort the calculated channels result. h) Tick Synchronised Update if you want DeLogger Pro to calculate and update the calculated channel only when all of the base channels used in its calculation have been updated. (You specied these channels in step 5.c) above.) When Synchronised Update is ticked and a calculated channel is called to update,
Calculated Channels
A calculated channel is a virtual channel with its own spreadsheet that primary channels or other virtual channels are pasted into. You can dene various calculations using these channels and specify a result cell. RECOMMENDATION Complex calculated channels can slow the DeLogger Pro down, so simple calculations should still be processed within the dataTaker.
Adding a Calculated Channel To add a calculated-type virtual channel:

1. Choose Conguration menu > Data Hub Channels. 2. In the dialog box that opens (Figure 288 on page 211), click the Add Virtual button. DeLogger Pro presents you with the rst screen of the sequence shown in Figures 293 and 294 (page 219). 3. Work through screens 1 to 4, conguring the new virtual channels visibility, conditional test, dependancy test and alarms if you want.84 4. In screen 5: a) In the Type area, select Calculated. b) In the Allowed Input area, you can specify that the virtual channel is only updated with Realtime data, or with Logged data. c) Click Next. 5. In screen 6b that opens (Figure 294 on page 220), do the following: a) In the Channel Label eld, type a unique name for the new virtual channel. b) Click in cell A1 to highlight the rst row of the spreadsheet, then click the Add Channel(s) button.
84
Formula bar
You can change these later. This is covered in Setting a Channels Properties in the Data Hub on page 213.
FIGURE 292
Screen 6b example
UM-0070-A0
218
DeLogger Pro rstly checks in the data hub to see if any of its base channels have been updated. If so, it updates the base value(s), recalculates the spreadsheet, and takes the result for the calculated channel from the cell dened in the Result Cell Reference eld (Figure 292). 6. When youre done in screen 6b, click Finish to complete the denition of the virtual channel. The new virtual channel appears on the Virtual.JOB1 tab of the data hub, and is available in the choice lists of the various functions and views of DeLogger Pro.
Screen 1: Specify the new virtual channels visibility. Tells you that youre creating a new virtual channel. (You name the channel on the last screen.) See Figure 289 (page 213).
Screen 2: Define a conditional test for the new virtual channels data. See Conditional Settings on page 214.
Screen 3: Define a dependancy test (the virtual channels validity depends on another channels conditional test). See Dependant Settings on page 214.
Continued in Figure 294 (screens 4, 5 and 6)

FIGURE 293
Data hub adding a virtual channel (1 of 2)
9-1 The Data Hub
219
UM-0070-A0
Screen 4: Specify internal (DeLogger Pro) alarms for the new virtual channel. See Alarm Settings on page 215. See Figure 290 (page 214). Screen 5: Specify the new virtual channels type rolling or calculated.
Screen 6a when you click Next
Screen 6b when you click Next
See Store Channels (page 216) and Calculated Channels (page 218).
From Fig. 293
Screen 6a: Name the new store-type virtual channel and specify its settings. See Adding a Store Channel (page 216). Screen 6b: Name the new calculated-type virtual channel and specify its settings. See Adding a Calculated Channel (page 218).
FIGURE 294
UM-0070-A0
Data hub adding a virtual channel (2 of 2)
220
9-2
REMOTE DATA SITES AND THE MODEM MANAGER
DeLogger Pro supports connection to remote dataTakers using PSTN, GSM, CDMA, radio and satellite telemetry systems, by means of appropriate modems at the host and remote locations. These connections are dened in the Connections > Properties > Modem dialog box (Figure 49 on page 46), and can use any modem that has been installed in your computers Start > Control Panel > Modems dialog box as the local modem. (There is no requirement to install the local modem into DeLogger Pro itself.) At the remote location, special attention is required when setting up the remote dataTaker and remote modem. This will vary for the different types of remote modems that are available for PSTN, GSM, CDMA, radio and satellite telemetry systems. The procedures to set up the remote site are detailed in your dataTakers user manual (available as PDF les from www.datataker.com). If the remote site involves a DT5/6xx dataTaker and dataTaker MM-01 Modem Manager, MM-1 Support must be ticked in Figure 49 (page 46) to instruct DeLogger Pro to use Modem Manager protocol when connecting to the site. Also be sure to enter any passwords that may be installed in the remote Modem Manager. To do this, click the Password button in Figure 49 and enter the details in the Security dialog box that opens (Figure 52). Installing and conguring the Modem Manager at the remote site is detailed in the Modem Manager Users Manual.
9-2 Remote Data Sites and the Modem Manager
221
UM-0070-A0
9-3
DDE (DYNAMIC DATA EXCHANGE)

DeLogger Pro: DDE Server DeLogger Pro is a DDE server, providing data and information in response to requests from DDE client software.
When DeLogger Pro is serving, think of it as maintaining a set of post boxes for dataTaker data, where each box holds the latest value for each piece of data or information. Each value is available to any DDE client that requests it. As a DDE server, DeLogger Pro effectively becomes a conduit between the dataTakers that are connected to the computer, and software that can use the data coming from the dataTakers (such as spreadsheet, database, graphics and statistics packages).
Because DeLogger Pro supports DDE, other Windows programs can query and control various aspects of DeLogger Pro. For example, DeLogger Pros DDE mechanism allows the following to be implemented: Other software can request a variety of housekeeping information such as lists of available sites lists of connected data logger channels lists of dened host PC actions. Other software can request data from connected dataTakers, from the data database, or from les. Commands can be sent from other software directly to any connected dataTaker. Host PC actions and individual macros can be run within DeLogger Pro. An advise loop85 can be set up for any channel in the data hub.
DDE Concepts
To use DDE, you need to understand the concepts presented in this section. They are server and client conversation, service name, topic and item message structure the ChannelName item
For Example DeLogger Pro can, for example, provide data from selected dataTaker channels to Microsoft Excel, where that data is automatically placed in an Excel cell and continuously automatically updated. Or Excel can send commands to the dataTaker, instructing DeLogger Pro to initiate various services such as transmitting supplied text strings to the dataTaker. Possible Incomplete Data Be aware that a DDE client may not receive every data value thats available from DeLogger Pro.
This underrun situation occurs if the DDE clients request rate is slower than the rate at which the data is available within DeLogger Pro.
Server and Client

DDE is a method of inter-process communication between various DDE-capable Windows programs. This inter-process communication can be, for example, the passing of data between processes, the passing of service requests between processes, or the synchronising of events. DDE uses shared memory to communicate between programs, and has a protocol to manage and synchronise the process. Some programs are providers of the data and information that is communicated by the DDE process, while other programs are users of the data and information communicated. Software that provides the data and information is termed a DDE Server, while an application that requests and receives the data and information is termed a DDE Client.
85
DDE Terminology
There are four terms you need to be familiar with in order to use DeLogger Pros DDE capability: DDE conversation DDE service name DDE topic DDE item
DDE Conversation A DDE conversation is the communication between a DDE client and a DDE server.
The DDE client rst requests a conversation with the DDE server, then requests various data and services from it. The DDE server in turn responds by sending data to the DDE client, or by executing procedures within itself.
Advise loop: the server (DeLogger) advises the client that the item of interest (channel) has updated; its then up to the client to request the data.
UM-0070-A0
222
DDE Service Name, Topic and Item DDE programs use a three-tiered identication structure to distinguish their conversations from others: The highest tier in the hierarchy is the DDE service name. The service name identies the particular software to which the conversation is directed. DeLogger Pro uses the service name DELOGGER, which is registered with the DDE Management Library (DDEML) of Windows when DeLogger Pro starts. The second tier is the DDE topic, which broadly groups the DDE services available within an application. The DDE topics dened for DeLogger Pro are listed in the DDE Topics and Items table on page 224. The third tier is the DDE item, which denes the particular services available in each topic. The DDE items dened for the DeLogger Pro topics are also listed in the table below.
ChannelName as dened by DeLogger Pro is contained within single quotes has a space character either side of the slash characters ( / ) that separate the SiteName, ScheduleID and ChannelID. Default dataTaker channel IDs (such as 5V or 7PT385) are used if no custom channel IDs (such as Boiler Pressure or AirTemp) are specied. This same data item naming structure is used within DeLogger Pro whenever lists of available channel data are displayed.
DDE Message Structure

DDE conversations have the following general message structure:
ServiceName|Topic!Item
Note the two important separators | and !: The service name and topic are separated by a pipe character |. The topic and item are separated by an exclamation character !. For example: DeLogger|Channel!'Local_1.Job1.A.5TK' Spaces are not permitted within the message structure, unless within names bounded by single quote characters.
The ChannelName DDE Item

Several of the DeLogger Pro DDE topics listed in the DDE Topics and Items table below have ChannelName as a DDE item. This refers to data originating from dataTaker channels at the site, and the particular ChannelName is constructed using the following format:
'Connection.Job.Schedule.Label'
Here are three examples: 'MyLogger.Job1.A.5TK' 'Local_600.Job1.B.AirTemp' 'Remote.Job1.C.RiverLevel'
9-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)
223
UM-0070-A0
DeLogger Pro Topics and Items

The topics and items that are dened for DeLogger Pro are listed in the DDE Topics and Items table below. You can use these topics and items to communicate requests to DeLogger Pro from within any program that has DDE client capabilities. The user interface to the DDE capabilities is not the same in all DDE client software, so youll need to refer to the DDE clients documentation to determine how to perform DDE conversations with DeLogger Pro. But in general terms, there will be modules or dialog boxes with names such as DDE In and DDE Out, and DDE Send and DDE Receive in which you specify the service name, topic and item of your conversations with DeLogger Pro. The XTYP_nnnnn commands or messages listed in the Action column of the DDE Topics and Items table are the actual low-level request messages made by the DDE client application to the Windows DDEML (Dynamic Data Exchange Management Library) that manages DE conversations. These details are provided for advanced users who intend to use VBasic, VBA, or C/C++ to create custom DDE client applications that communicate with DeLogger Pro.
DDE Between DeLogger Pro and Excel

Microsoft Excel is a common DDE client you can use with DeLogger Pro. But because Excel does not have a full high-level user interface for DDE conversations, youll need to develop appropriate macros in VBA86 to perform DDE tasks. The VBA macro language in Excel has a number of DDE functions or methods that can be used with the topics and items listed in the table on page 224.
Delogger2 Macro Files The les Delogger2.xlm and Delogger2.xla (located in the Excel folder in the DeLogger installation folder see Figure 7) provide an example of programming DDE conversations between DeLogger Pro and Microsoft Excel:
You can open the Delogger2.xlm macro sheet in Excel, then use the Excel Tools menu > Macro > Macros command to access the VBA macros that provide the DDE functionality. Delogger2.xlm could be used as the basis for developing more advanced DDE applications. Delogger2.xla is the Delogger2.xlm macro le compiled to an add-in, which you can permanently add into Excel using Tools > Add-Ins. The functionality of the macros is available, but the actual macro scripts are not. When Delogger2 is loaded into Excel, either as the macro sheet Delogger2.xlm or the add-in
86
VBA: Visual Basic for Applications
Topic
Item
Description
Action
Channel System
ChannelName Site Channel Action
Request a latest data value for the named channel. Request a list of sites available. Request a list of channels available. Request a list of host PC actions available. Supported: SZDDESYS_ITEM_TOPICS SZDDESYS_ITEM_FORMATS SZDDESYS_ITEM_HELP SZDDESYS_ITEM_STATUS Not supported: SZDDESYS_ITEM_ITEMLIST Send the text contained within a DDE data block to the named site. Add the named channel to the advise list. Remove the named channel from the advise list. Execute the host PC action named in a DDE data block.
XTYP_REQUEST XTYP_ADVREQ XTYP_REQUEST XTYP_ADVREQ
SiteName Channel Channel Action

UM-0070-A0
ChannelName ChannelName
XTYP_POKE XTYP_ADVSTART XTYP_ADVSTOP XTYP_EXECUTE
224
Delogger2.xla, a DeLogger menu appears in the Excel main menu bar (Figure 295). The commands on the DeLogger menu call into VBA scripts that perform the tasks.
Paste DeLogger Pro channel data links into worksheet cells. Run DeLogger Pro host PC actions. Send text (commands) to the dataTaker connected to DeLogger Pro. Open a dialog box containing a list of the topics supported by DeLogger Pro.
FIGURE 295
4. From the list of available channels, select the one88 you want to insert, then click OK. The channels label is pasted into the selected cell on the worksheet, and its value is pasted into the adjacent cell. Now whenever the value changes in DeLogger Pro, it is simultaneously updated in the Excel cell.
To view the source of Delogger2.xlm:

1. Make a copy of Delogger2.xlm and name it Delogger2.bak. 2. Start Excel and open Delogger2.xlm. 3. Enable Macros if prompted to do so. 4. Choose Tools > Macro > Visual Basic Editor. 5. Choose Delogger2.xlm from the project pane. 6. Select Module1 in the Modules folder under Delogger2.xlm. A window opens containing the VBA text of the program. 7. Inspect the VBA program. You may edit the program here if required.
The Excel DeLogger menu
Excel Procedures
The following procedures87 assume youre using Microsoft Excel 97 (SR2) or later.
To insert an updating dataTaker channel into

an Excel worksheet cell:
1. Start DeLogger Pro, connect to a dataTaker, and ensure that data is returning from the channels into DeLogger Pro. 2. Start Excel, then either open the DeLogger2.xlm macro le, or ensure that Delogger2.xla is included as an add-in. (See Delogger2 Macro Files on page 224.) Enable Macros if prompted to do so. A DeLogger menu appears in the Excel main menu bar. 3. In a new or an existing Excel worksheet: a) Select the cell that you want to paste the DeLogger Pro channel item into. b) From the Excel DeLogger menu, choose PasteChannel. After a brief pause for Excel to establish a DDE conversation with DeLogger Pro, Excel opens a dialog box displaying a list of available data channels.
To manually insert an updating channel into a worksheet cell:

You can manually dene a DDE data channel link to DeLogger Pro in Excel worksheet cells. This does not require Delogger2 to be loaded into Excel. 1. Start Excel and ensure a worksheet is showing. 2. Select a cell on the worksheet and enter DDE link text into the formula bar above the worksheet. The general format is
=DELOGGER|Channel!'ChannelName'
The link text is case sensitive, and your channels ChannelName must be enclosed in single quotes and typed exactly as specied in DeLogger Pro. For example: =DELOGGER|Channel!'LOCAL600.Job1.A.1V' 3. Repeat to add more data channel links into the Excel worksheet.
88
87
DDE is active by default. You dont need to enable it anywhere within DeLogger.
You can select multiple channels from the list of available channels by clicking and dragging down the list, or by shiftclicking. Multiple channels are pasted into successive cells below the selected cell on the worksheet.
9-3 DDE (Dynamic Data Exchange)
225
UM-0070-A0
9-4
DATABASES
DeLoggers Default Databases
DeLogger uses two databases to store data and other information; an administration database and a data database. Both of these are FoxPro format and are located in the /DeLogger/Data folder.
Database Delicacies
Here are some useful facts about DeLogger databases:
How Many, What, Where? DeLogger requires two working (current) databases; an administration database and a data database. (Their functions are listed in Whats Stored Where on page 209.)
When you install DeLogger, a default FoxPro administration database and a default FoxPro data database are placed in DeLoggers default database location (the Data folder inside DeLoggers installation folder see Figure 7), for use with all of your projects. But, if you want, you can change the type of one or both databases (for example, you can use Access instead of FoxPro) change the location of one or both databases use different databases for different projects. These matters are discussed later in this section. In addition, DeLogger Pro has four more data databases89 that are provided to simplify your database management. Heres a summary of DeLogger Pros default databases:
Working Administration database (current) databases Data database Archive Archive 1 databases Archive 2 Archive 3 Historical 1 Stores admin information Store data
ODBC The databases are referenced through ODBC drivers with the default names Site7 for the administration database Site7d1 for the data database.
The ODBC data source names (DSNs) are installed as System DSN, which allows to them to be used by any user on the computer.
Default Locations The locations of the default FoxPro databases are \DeLogger\Data\Admin\site7.dbc \DeLogger\Data\Data\site7d1.dbc See Figure 7. Clean Data Database There is also an empty copy of the data database in the \DeLogger\Data\Clean folder. You can copy this group of les to a new folder and set it up as an alternative data database. Make sure that the original folder is not modied because its used by the SiteAdmin utility when doing data database archiving and cleaning. Additional Databases Although the default DSN is set up at a global level and DeLogger uses them by default, each DeLogger project can override the default and use any other dened DSN. This means, for example, that you can have a data database and an admin database for each project, if you dene multiple databases and DSNs. Data Database Schema The data database schema historically consists of three tables: data_header holds information about the session data_details holds channel details data_data holds the data values and times
The data_data table will grow the most and this is the table to reference when writing reports or extracting data.
Global or Project-Specic? The actual admin database and data database used by each project is specied in the projects .dlw le (see .dlw File on page 22) and are therefore projectspecic. But, because many users stay with DeLoggers default databases for all of their projects, these databases are effectively global. Separate DeLogger Instances If a database is a client/server type, you can use multiple projects on separate DeLogger instances.
89
They are named Archive 1, Archive 2, Archive 3 and Historical 1 for historical reasons. In practice, simply consider them as four data databases that you can use as archive destinations for your working data database.
UM-0070-A0
226
Database Size and Performance Issues

Writing to relational databases is always going to be slower than writing to a at le because entries need to be indexed and attached to linked lists. However, some databases (mainly mainstream client/server) are faster than others and many can be tuned for performance. If a lot of database logging is anticipated (with large size or high speed) its worth planning an alternative data database option: For both speed (DT800 throughput) and size (>250MB), a client/server implementation is recommended. The most highly-recommended database is Microsoft SQL Server 2000 because its one of the fastest and most exible. A cheaper solution is to use Linux and Postgres (or MySQL) as the OS and server software can be freely downloaded. They are secure and reliable systems used and proved by many major companies, and they are supported by the open software model.
Alternative Databases
We recommend that the administration database be left as the default FoxPro type, unless shared access is required, because administration tools are provided for this type. The setting-up of a new administration database is the same as for the data type described below. The currently-supported alternative databases are File-Based Access 2000 (not recommended for large databases) Client/Server Microsoft SQLServer (6.5/7/2000) tested on Windows 2000 Advanced Server and Windows NT Server MySQL tested on Windows 2000 Professional, Windows 2000 Advanced Server and Red Hat Linux 6.2 PostGres tested on Red Hat Linux 6.2 Schemata for these alternatives are available from
www.datataker.com.
Administration Database The admin database requires little maintenance other than periodically clearing down the log les. This is done from the SiteAdmin utility. The main log les to watch are the error_log and the alarm_log. The latest version of DeLogger allows the error and alarm logs to be cleared from the event logs window (alarm is protected by a registry entry). Data Database The data database requires maintenance when used, because it can quickly grow in size and start to cause performance issues. As a rule of thumb, it should not be allowed to grow beyond 250MB. One of the main reasons for this is that FoxPro is a direct le access database and the ODBC driver constructs a database cursor in the temporary directory that is equal to a snapshot of the database. This means that if the data database is 250MB in size, the ODBC driver also constructs a 250MB temporary le in the TEMP directory. If it is anticipated that large databases (>250MB) will be used then a change to a client/server database is recommended.
The recommended types are Microsoft SQL 2000 for the Microsoft Windows platform PostGres for the Linux platform MySQL for Windows and Linux platforms. The Linux alternative has been certied with Red Hat 6.2 and PostGres 7.1.1 although no problems are expected from different versions of Linux or PostGres. Both Linux and PostGres are freely-downloadable and are royaltyfree.
Setting Up an Alternative Database Setting up a database server is not a trivial task and is beyond the scope of this manual. It is expected that most organisations will have an IT section capable of setting up and maintaining databases. If you require further information or help on the subject, please contact your dataTaker representative.
Once the alternative database server is set up and working a new System DSN should be dened from the ODBC Data Source Administrator to allow DeLogger access. It is recommended that a new System DSN be used to allow a fallback situation if the server is unavailable at startup time (DeLogger will notify and prompt in this situation). Once a new System DSN is dened and the connection tested via the ODBC Data Source Administrator, the DeLogger project can be set to use the new database connection. To do this, open the File menu > Project Properties dialog box (Figure 18 on page 23) and select the new DSN in
9-4 Databases
227
UM-0070-A0
the Channel Data Database Data Source Name (DSN) list, then close the dialog box and the project. The new DSN will be used the next time you open that project. Delogger does not provide any administration tools for these alternative databases because its assumed that there will be database administrators maintaining the server(s).
UM-0070-A0
228
9-5
DELOGGER PRO WEB PUBLISHING
List of published documents
Documents link (to documents.htm)

FIGURE 296
Home page index.htm (in \DeLogger\Publish)
Documents page documents.htm (in \DeLogger\Publish\html)
Default published web pages
DeLogger Pro can create HTML (browser) versions of the following data views: form windows chart windows mimic windows spreadsheet window charts analysis window charts DeLogger Pro publishes these .htm les (and associated .jpg graphics les) in a prescribed structure to the Publish folder in DeLoggers installation folder (Figure 297). The les can then be made available to a connected intranet90 and viewed using a browser. This is explained in Intranet (Local) Publishing on page 230. In addition, DeLogger Pro can use FTP to copy these published les over a local network or dial-up connection to another web server (on the Internet, or on another intranet, for example.) This is explained in Internet (WWW) Publishing on page 231.
Manual and Automatic Web Publishing When you enable intranet publishing (described in Conguration > Web Publish on page 58), manual triggering of the publishing operation is also enabled. That is, publishing occurs whenever you choose the views Publish command (or click the button on its toolbar).
In addition, you can enable automatic publishing, which triggers publishing whenever the view updates by receiving new data. You activate this function separately for each window by ticking Publish on Update in each windows Properties dialog box. See Form > Properties on page 84 Chart > Properties on page 90 Mimic > Properties on page 103 Spread > Properties on page 114 Analysis > Properties on page 123.
90
Intranet: a private, network-based collection of web servers and websites, usually located within one company or organization.
Home Page and Documents Page You may freely modify the home page index.htm (Figure 296) to suit your companys requirements. However, we recommend that you always keep the Documents link (to documents.htm located in \DeLogger\Publish\html) because youll use it often.
229
UM-0070-A0
9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing
DeLoggers installation folder
Changing the Default Web Publishing Locations You can change the location of DeLogger Pros default web publishing folders.
You carry out this re-direction by using Windows Regedit.exe to modify the following registry keys: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\ Default\PublishDir (default key value data is PUBLISH) HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger\ Default\PublishDocumentsFolder (default key value data is html) Of course, unless youre an experienced Microsoft Windows user, we recommend that you do not do this. IMPORTANT For web publishing to work, the new location must contain the same directory structure as the original location in other words, copy the folder structure to the new location.
Publish must contain index.htm, the default site entry page (home page). Publish\html must contain documents.htm, DeLogger Pros generated documents list (documents page).
Contain DeLogger Pro generated files
Publishing Quality The quality (and corresponding size) of any required graphics les produced during the creation of web pages is controlled by the JPEG picture quality setting in Figure 62 (page 58).
Contains graphics files
Intranet (Local) Publishing

When enabled for intranet web publishing, DeLogger Pro saves published HTML pages and associated graphics les in a xed directory structure in the main DeLogger installation folder (the default is \DeLogger\Publish). To congure DeLogger Pro for intranet publishing, open the Conguration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58) and tick Publish to Intranet (Local). Then when you click Accept and Close the dialog box, a manual Publish command and toolbar button become available for the appropriate windows. Use these to publish HTML versions of the views, or enable automatic web publishing see Manual and Automatic Web Publishing on page 229. If you open the le \Publish\index.htm (in DeLoggers installation folder) in a browser92 and click the Documents link, youll have access to the published DeLogger Pro views in the browser.
Templates must contain documents.htm (the documents template) and multidoc.htm (the views template).
FIGURE 297
Required folder structure for web publishing
(The documents.htm le always contains an up-to-date list of published documents, because DeLogger Pro re-creates documents.htm from the contents of the \DeLogger\Publish\html folder every time a view is published or re-published.) You may also alter the appearance of the documents page (documents.htm, Figure 296). To do this, you alter the template le (also called documents.htm) located in \DeLogger\templates91. This template le is read each time the working copy of documents.htm is re-created. See also Personalizing the Data Site on page 232.
91
But dont remove the %% placeholders: these are substituted by DeLogger Pro when it creates the document listings.
92
Internet Explorer 5.5 or later is preferred.
UM-0070-A0
230
Internet (WWW) Publishing

Besides publishing to a local folder, DeLogger Pro can also copy the published les to another server by means of FTP93 transfer. This means you can publish the updating DeLogger Pro HTML les to a local (corporate) web server or to a remote (internet) web server, and the publishing link can include a local network and/or a dial-up connection. For slower links, you can reduce the size (and therefore the quality) of generated images. See the JPEG Picture Quality eld in Figure 62 (page 58). DeLogger Pro automatically establishes the connection using the User Name, Password and Initial Directory specied in the Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58). Activating Internet publishing is a two-step process: 1. Congure DeLogger Pro by opening the Conguration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62 on page 58). In the dialog box tick both Publish to Intranet (Local) and Publish to
Internet (WWW)
The source computers default dial-up connection.
FIGURE 298
DeLogger Pro uses the computers default dial-up connection for FTP transfer of published les.
Required Folder Structure for Web Publishing Figure 297 shows the necessary structure and contents of the Publish folder and the Templates folder in DeLoggers installation directory. Alternatives There are many other ways to transfer the contents of the data site to a local or remote web server, including scripting FTP commands and scheduling a batch le using the existing directory structure as a virtual directory from the web server (both IIS and Apache allow this).
type the destination URL, User Name, Password and directory click the Accept button then the Close button. toolbar button A manual Publish command and become available in the form, chart, mimic, spread and analysis windows. You can also enable automatic web publishing see Manual and Automatic Web Publishing on page 229. 2. Enable Internet publishing separately for each view you want to publish. Do this by opening the individual windows Properties dialog box and ticking Publish to Internet. See Form > Properties on page 84 Chart > Properties on page 90 Mimic > Properties on page 103 Spread > Properties on page 114 Analysis > Properties on page 123.
Dial-Up Connection If a dial-up connection is part of the FTP le link, DeLogger Pro uses the source computers default Windows Dial-Up Networking connection. This is set on the Connections tab of Windows Start menu > Settings > Control Panel > Internet Options/Properties dialog box (Figure 298).
93
File Transfer Protocol: a set of rules used for copying les between computers on an intranet or on the Internet.
9-5 DeLogger Pro Web Publishing
231
UM-0070-A0
Publishing Frequency
To protect against overload and to minimise dial-up connection times, DeLogger Pros frequency of publishing is separate from its frequency of view update. Heres the sequence: 1. A DeLogger Pro view publish request is accepted and queued. 2. If the view publish timer is not active it is started. 3. If the timer has expired, the queued list is examined and any duplicate requests removed. 4. A publish action is run. At its completion, a documents list update request is queued. 5. If Publish to Internet (WWW) is ticked in the Conguration menu > Web Publish dialog box (Figure 62) and Publish to Internet is ticked in the views Properties dialog box, the document is added to the FTP list. 6. If the FTP timer is not running it is started. 7. When the FTP timer expires, the queue is examined and duplicate entries removed. 8. The FTP session is initiated and the les transferred. 9. The FTP disconnect timer is started. 10. The FTP session stays open for a pre-determined time and any more requests for transfer are handled immediately. 11. When the FTP session disconnect timer expires, the session is closed. See FTP Delays on page 58.
Publishing Reports
You can congure DeLogger Pro to publish reports in HTML (browser) format. To do this: 1. Write or obtain the .rpt report le you want to publish, and put it into the \DeLogger\Reports folder. See DIY Installed Reports on page 202. 2. Create a secondary report based on the report le. See Conguration > Reports on page 57. 3. Create an action to run the secondary report, making sure that Export HTML is selected (Figure 58). See Conguration > Actions on page 55. 4. Run the action. DeLogger Pro places the resulting .htm le in the \DeLogger\Publish\html\Reports folder. RECOMMENDATION Unlike intranet and Internet publishing, report publishing does not trigger re-creation of the list of published documents (the documents.htm le see Home Page and Documents Page on page 229). Therefore we recommend that you congure a window for publishing and thereby force updating of the list of published documents so that it contains the report name. (You can simply chain an action that contains a PUBLISH("WindowName.ext") macro to the action created in step 3. above.)
Personalizing the Data Site

You can do any or all of the following to personalize the published HTML pages: Modify the index.htm le see Figure 297. (But dont remove the link to documents.htm.) Modify the template le \DeLogger\templates\ documents.htm. (But dont remove the %% placeholders: these are substituted by DeLogger Pro when it creates the document listings.) Modify the \DeLogger\templates\multidoc.htm le. (But dont remove the %%InsertSRC placeholder: DeLogger Pro substitutes this with HTML code and images.) Add any other HTML pages required.
UM-0070-A0
232
9-6
DELOGGER OPC SERVER

Setting Up DeLogger OPC Server on a Win2000 Workstation To set up the DeLogger OPC Server on a Win2000 workstation:
1. Run the program executable
OPC_DA20_Components.exe located in the /DeLogger/opc server folder.
OPC (OLE for Process Control) was developed to provide a standard interface to facilitate the development of servers and clients by multiple vendors that would operate together seamlessly. DeLogger supports Version 1 of the specication, which is suitable for most cases of data retrieval. DeLogger has been developed to support OPC as a data server allowing any OPC client access to realtime or logged data from its DT5/6xx dataTakers.
DeLogger OPC Architecture The OPC implementation for DeLogger is shown in Figure 299.
dataTakers
2. Ensure the Automation Interface is registered with the system by typing regsvr32.exe OPCProxy.dll from a command window. 3. Ensure the DeLogger OPC server DLL is registered with the system by typing regsvr32.exe deLoggerOPCServer.dll from a command window. 4. Run dcomcnfg.exe from Start menu > Run and do the following: a) Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked or selected. b) Select deLogger OPC Server and check that the default properties conform to your companys security measures. c) Close dcomcnfg.exe. 5. Run the client application and check that DeLogger OPC Server is accessible.
DeLogger
DeLogger Custom Interface
DeLogger OPC Server OPC Client OPC Data Access Automation Interface
FIGURE 299
Setting Up Client Access on a Separate Win2000 Workstation To set up client access on a separate Win2000 workstation:
1. Run the program executable
OPC_DA20_Components.exe located in the /DeLogger/opc server folder.
DeLogger OPC architecture
The DeLogger OPC Server need not be running on the same machine as the DeLogger application process but consideration should be given to performance if it is to be located across a slower link (that is, a WAN). However, we recommend that the DeLogger OPC Server is congured to run on the same machine as DeLogger as this will give the best performance. DeLogger will install all the required components on the server machine but some manual setup is still required. (Note that there are differences between operating systems, so some options may be on different dialog boxes.)
2. Copy the le deLoggerOPCServer.dll from the server machine and register it with the system by typing regsvr32.exe deLoggerOPCServer.dll from a command window. 3. Run dcomcnfg.exe from Start menu > Run and do the following: a) Ensure Enable Distributed COM on this computer is checked or selected. b) Select deLogger OPC Server and check that the default properties conform to your companys security measures. c) From the Location tab, select Run application on the following computer and choose the computer where the DeLogger OPC server is located. d) Close dcomcnfg.exe.
UM-0070-A0
9-6 DeLogger OPC Server
233
You should now be able to start up your OPC client software and connect through to DeLogger using the OPC interface. If DeLogger is not running, it should start up automatically when selected as a server from OPC client software. The DeLogger OPC Server is distributed as a DLL. So, if the OPC client software is running on a separate computer, DeLoggerOPCServer.dll should be run by the surrogate process DLLHOST.EXE, which should be found in the Windows/system(32) folder. To set this up, add a new String Value in the registry using regedit.exe. The details of the key are: Key: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\AppID\{764EA6DE-8DF811D2-AC14-00A024A242A2}
New String Value: DllSurrogate Value of: C:\WINNT\system32\dllhost.exe or wherever your dllhost.exe is located. This ensures that the DeLogger OPC Server runs in its own surrogate process, which improves performance when operating across a network.
UM-0070-A0
234
9-7
INSTALLING DELOGGER4 ON WINDOWS NT, 2000 AND XP (IUSER)

we recommend that the User be given Power User rights (one level down from Administrator rights), which allow the User to modify the computer setup and install programs including system les, but not to access les that belong to other users. A User is given Power User rights by adding this User to the pre-dened Power Users group that is available on Windows NT/2000/XP platforms for this very purpose. This is explained below for the three operating systems.
The multi-user Windows NT, 2000 and XP operating systems require special consideration when installing applications software for multiple users. These platforms are usually set up with an Administrator who has full privileges and le access, and one or more Users who have limited privileges and le access. The various privileges and le access rights are managed by the security elements of these operating systems. Installation of DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP operating systems involves installation of the various folders and les for the DeLogger4 application updating of some of the Windows system les (in C:\Windows\System32) for earlier versions of the Windows platforms adding new entries and changing entries in the Windows registry. The Administrator has all of the rights to make these changes, but a User does not. A User cannot successfully install DeLogger4 onto any of these operating systems.
Windows NT 1. Have the Administrator restart Windows NT and log on as the Administrator (may require a password).
Now increase the Users access rights to Power User as follows: 2. Click Start > Programs > Administrative Tools (Common) > User Manager. The User Manager dialog box opens. 3. Select Administrators and click Add to add a user to the Administrator group. 4. Select the Domain name for the local computer. 5. Select the User name to upgrade and click Add to add it to the Administrator group. 6. Click OK to save the new setting, and click OK to close the successive dialog boxes. 7. Re-start Windows and login as the User who now has the Power User access rights, and proceed to install DeLogger4. After installation of DeLogger4, these Power User rights can be reduced again if desired.
Who This Procedure is For If you are installing DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP operating systems where the operating system does not have separate Administrator and User groups set up (that is, everyone is an Administrator, which is usually indicated by there being no logon dialog during startup) you will be using DeLogger4 only while logged on as the Administrator others will be using DeLogger4 only while logged on as the Administrator then the procedures described below do not apply to you. In these cases, simply start Windows in the usual way and proceed to install and use DeLogger4.
However, if your installation of Windows is setup by an Administrator for one of more Users, you will need to proceed as described below when installing DeLogger4.
Windows 2000 1. Have the Administrator restart Windows 2000 and log on as the Administrator (may require a password).
Now increase the Users access rights to Power User as follows: 2. Click Start > Settings > Control Panel to open the Control Panel folder, then double-click Users and Passwords. 3. Select the User Name of the User to be upgraded. 4. Click Properties. 5. Click the Group Membership tab.
Access Rights to Windows

It is not recommended that the Administrator installs DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP for a User; rather that the User installs DeLogger4. However, a User must have appropriate rights to install DeLogger4 onto Windows NT, 2000 or XP. Although a User can be given Administrator rights for this purpose,
9-7 Installing DeLogger4 on Windows NT, 2000 and XP (iUser)
235
UM-0070-A0
6. Select either Standard User (Power Users Group), or Other then select Power Users from the dropdown list. 7. Click OK to save the new setting, and click OK to close the successive dialog boxes. 8. Re-start Windows and login as the User who now has the Power User access rights, and proceed to install DeLogger4. After installation of DeLogger4, these Power User rights can be reduced again if desired.
\DeLogger\User folder, which contains a copy of the DeLogger4 keys from the installing Users HKEY_CURRENT_USER hive. DeLogger4 has a utility named iUser setup in the \DeLogger\iUser folder, which you run when a different User has logged in. This will add the required DeLogger keys to the new Users registry. The iUser Setup utility will also set up the ODBC DSN entries for the new User.
The overall installation and use scenario then becomes: 1. User A, with Power User privileges, installs DeLogger4 into, say, the C:\Program Files\DeLogger folder. 2. User A can run DeLogger4. 3. User B, who only has normal User privileges, logs on to Windows but cannot run DeLogger. 4. User B runs C:\Program Files\DeLogger\iUser\ setup.exe, which adds the DeLogger keys to User Bs HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive. 5. User B can now run DeLogger. User B can either be an existing User, or can be a new User added to the platform since the installation of DeLogger4. There will still be issues with ownership of les and access to les, and so User A and User B should essentially maintain their own set of data les. If the privileges for User B (probably Users group) dont allow access to the DeLogger directory owned by User A, then DeLogger will not run. This should not be a problem, but may require the directory where DeLogger was installed to be set to full access for User B either as an individual or via any group that User B belongs to.
Windows XP 1. Have the Administrator restart Windows XP and log on as the Administrator (may require a password).
Now increase the Users access rights to Power User as follows: 2. Click Start > Control Panel to open the Control Panel folder, then double-click User Accounts. 3. Proceed as for Windows 2000 (above). Note that you do not require Administrator or Power User rights to run DeLogger4, although there are other issues as discussed below.
Conguring the Windows Registry

DeLogger4 maintains various key information in the Windows system registry. The registry entries required to run DeLogger4 are kept in the HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive. Each User who has a unique login to the Windows operating system will have their own entry in this section of the registry. This is because the HKEY_LOCAL_USER is an internal mapping to one of the entries in the HKEY_USERS hive. Therefore, the User who logged in and installed DeLogger4 will have the DeLogger entries set up in their HKEY_LOCAL_USER hive. As a consequence, other Users cannot run DeLogger4 when they login under their own User name, since they do not have any entries for DeLogger4 in their HKEY_CURRENT_USER hive. This is the main reason why DeLogger4 should not be installed for other users by an Administrator, who is not going to use DeLogger4. To overcome the somewhat unusual situation where more than one unique login User wants to run a single installation of DeLogger4 on the same computer, DeLogger4 does the following: During installation, the DeLogger4 installation program writes a le named install.reg to the
UM-0070-A0
iUser Setup Upgrade

IMPORTANT The iUser setup utility shipped with DeLogger4 Version 4V2R10 has a problem setting the ODBC database DSN paths. A later version of the utility is available from
www.dataTaker.com and should be downloaded, copied into the \DeLogger\iUser folder of your
installation of DeLogger and unzipped, if you wish to install provision for multiple users in DeLogger4.
236
9-8
DELOGGER MESSAGING
Dening Alarm Routing The details are held in a le called messaging.csv located in the /DeLogger/messaging folder. Its format is "Type","SubType","Site","F1","F2","F3", "F4","F5","F6","F7","F8","F9"
where is M for mail Type SubType is 0 is the site name generating the alarm Site messages (case-sensitive) is the text eld used as the To: mail F1 header is the e-mail address that this entrys F2 details references is the text eld used as the Subject F3 is a list of comma-separated alarm F4 numbers; ensure that the last entry has a trailing comma is valid hours not currently used F5 F6 F9 NA
DeLogger can forward incoming dataTaker alarms to the default mail system. It utilises MAPI, so the workstation must be correctly set up and congured to send e-mail using MAPI. DeLogger has been developed and tested using Outlook 2000 as the mail client, although any MAPI-compliant client can be used. Please ensure that mail can be sent from the workstation before setting-up Delogger mail handling. Although the current implementation requires manual set up, it is expected that in future versions this will be automated and user-friendly interfaces provided. When DeLogger messaging support is enabled, alarms received by DeLogger are passed on to the message handler process, which checks to see if it is to be forwarded to the mail sub-system (using MAPI). The check is made by reading the messaging.csv le and looking for relevant matching entries. If a matching entry is found, the alarm is forwarded according to the values of that entry. The message subject is set within the registry and the message body is the text of the alarm. By using dataTaker embedded channel readings, a full denition of the alarm can be provided. (Value and Time of Value can be inserted into the alarm by the dataTaker). The messaging process is started automatically by DeLogger (using an OLE interface) when it rst needs to pass an alarm for checking. If the logon to the mail service is not automatic, a dialog box asks you to log on to the mail system with a chosen prole. This happens each time it is rst started up. DeLogger also processes the alarm internally and actions any dened responses. Multiple entries can be dened for the same site/alarm so that different recipients can be selected. You can also use a group e-mail address for wider distribution. The mail system can be set up to use an internal or external mail server (MS Exchange, POP3 server, IMAP server), which is accessed directly or by dial-up. These all need to be set up within the OS prior to using the DeLogger mail handler.
To add an entry, edit the le and enter the relevant details.
s Example:
"M","0","MySite","DeLogger", "me@myaddress.com","DeLogger Reported Alarm","1,2,3,4,5,","0-24",,,, Be careful with the syntax because DeLogger is sensitive to small errors in the le. Modication of this le will be done automatically in future versions by means of user-friendly dialog boxes.
Message Handler The handler has two display views: the left one shows messages awaiting processing, and the right one displays those messages processed along with further details. It is started automatically be DeLogger when needed, or can be started manually by a script or from Explorer.
It is intended that this handler will be improved to allow the setting-up of the alarm routing and to handle SMS.
Enabling Alarm Mail Support Run the registry editor (regedit.exe) and modify the following keys to have a value of 1: HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger \Message\MailAlarmEnabled HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Discbell\DeLogger \Message\MailHandlerEnabled
Restart DeLogger to enable the above changes.
CHAPTER 9: ADVANCED TOPICS 9-8 DeLogger Messaging
Troubleshooting The rst check is always to see if the mail client on the workstation can send e-mail to the addresses dened in the messaging.csv le.
Check that the DeLogger mail handler is enabled in the Windows registry. Check that the DeLogger mail handler OLE interface is registered by running the DLPMessageHandler.exe le. Check that the entries in messaging.csv are valid for the incoming alarm.
237
UM-0070-A0
PART C Appendixes
PART C contains useful reference information: Appendix 1: Keyboard Shortcuts begins on page 239. Appendix 2: Worksheet Functions begins on page 240.
Pro Only
UM-0070-A0
238
PART C: Appendixes
APPENDIX 1
Keyboard Shortcuts
Menu-Specic Shortcuts
Menu Command Shortcut
General Shortcuts
Action Shortcut
File
New Open Save Project Print Print Preview Edit Undo Redo Cut Copy Paste Paste Values Delete Copy Down Copy Right Find Find (text entry screen) Replace (text entry screen) Go To Matching Brace Select All dataTaker Data Logging Unload Quit Unload Run Halt Form Publish Chart Publish Text > Entry Screen Command Edit Mode Send Line Send Program Go To Matching Brace Mimic Publish Spread Load Session From File Publish Analysis Load Session From Database Load Session From File Publish Program DT5/6xx Send To Connection (.dlp) Program DT8xx Send To Connection (.dl8) Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job
Ctrl+N Ctrl+O Ctrl+S Ctrl+P Ctrl+Alt+P Ctrl+Z Ctrl+Y Ctrl+X Ctrl+C Ctrl+V Ctrl+Alt+V Ctrl+K Ctrl+D Ctrl+R Alt+F3 Ctrl+F Ctrl+H Ctrl+B Ctrl+A Ctrl+Alt+G Ctrl+Alt+U Ctrl+Alt+Q Ctrl+Alt+R Ctrl+Alt+H Alt+P Alt+P Ctrl+Alt+E Ctrl+Alt+L Ctrl+Alt+A Ctrl+B Alt+P Alt+F Alt+P Alt+D Alt+F Alt+P Ctrl+Alt+A Ctrl+Alt+A Ctrl+Alt+O
Open the Connections dialog box. Open the Data Hub Channels dialog box. Capture the current DeLogger screen as a JPEG (.jpg) le automatically saved in DeLoggers Grab folder and named with the date and time of capture. See Figure 7 on page 18. Full screen (maximizes DeLoggers main window) Return from full screen (restores DeLoggers main window size) Toggle the display of the current windows border the window cannot be moved, resized or minimized.
F2 F5 Shift+F12
Ctrl+Shift+L Ctrl+Shift+F Ctrl+Shift+B
APPENDIX 1
KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
239
UM-0070-A0
APPENDIX 2
Worksheet Functions
You can use the functions listed below in DeLogger form window worksheets (page 136) spreadsheet window worksheets (page 150) analysis window worksheets (page 162) Formula One Workbook Designer worksheets (page 138). These DeLogger worksheet functions are similar to those supported by other spreadsheet software such as Microsoft Excel.
ABS
Returns the absolute value of a number. Syntax: ABS(number)
where
number
is any number
An absolute value does not display a positive or negative sign.
Examples s The following two functions both return the value 1: ABS(1)
ABS(1)
ACOS
Returns the arc cosine of a number. Syntax: ACOS(number)
where
number
is the cosine of the angle (range 1 to 1)
The resulting angle is returned in radians (from 0 to ). To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().
Examples s The function ACOS(0.5) returns 1.05.
s The function
ACOS(0.2) returns 1.77. See also PI (page 269) COS (page 247).
ACOSH
Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. Syntax: ACOSH(number)
UM-0070-A0
where
number
is any number equal to or greater than 1
240
PART C: Appendixes
Examples s The function ACOSH(1.2) returns 0.62.
AND
Returns True if all arguments are true; returns False if at least one argument is false. Syntax: AND(logical_list)
where
s The function
ACOSH(3) returns 1.76. See also ASINH (page 242) ATANH (page 242) COSH (page 247).
logical_list is a list of conditions separated by
ADDRESS
Creates a cell address as text. Syntax: ADDRESS(row,column,ref_type[,a1][,sheet])
where
commas. You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list. The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values. Text and empty cells are ignored. If there are no logical values in the list, the error #VALUE! is returned.
Examples s The following function returns True because both arguments are true: AND(1+1=2,5+5=10)
row column ref_type
a1
(optional)
sheet
(optional)
is the row number for the cell address is the column number for the cell address is the cell reference type. Valid values for this argument are 1 Absolute 2 Absolute row, relative column 3 Relative row, absolute column 4 Relative is the reference format, which must be TRUE() to represent an A1 reference format. The R1C1 reference format is not supported. is the name of an external worksheet view control. Omitting this argument assumes that the reference exists in the current spreadsheet.
s The following function returns False:

AND(TRUE(),FALSE()) See also: TRUE (page 281) FALSE (page 252) NOT (page 266) OR (page 269) ROW (page 275).
ASC
Returns a copy of text in which the double-byte characters (if any) have been converted to single-byte. Syntax: ASC(text)
where
Examples s The function ADDRESS(5,6,1) returns $F$5.
text is the text containing double-byte characters

Any double-byte characters that do not have single-byte equivalents are left in their original form. See also DBCS (page 250).
s The function
ADDRESS(5,6,4,TRUE(),"SALES.") returns SALES!F5. See also TRUE (page 281) COLUMN (page 246) OFFSET (page 268) ROW (page 275).
ASIN
Returns the arcsine of a number. Syntax: ASIN(number)
APPENDIX 2
WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS
241
UM-0070-A0
where
number
is the sine of the resulting angle (range 1 to 1)
The resulting angle is returned in radians (ranging from /2 to /2). To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().
Examples s The function ATAN(3.5) returns 1.29.
s The function
ATAN(4) returns 1.33. See also PI (page 269) ATAN2 (page 242) ATANH (page 242) TAN (page 279).
Example s The following function returns 1.57: ASIN(1)

See also PI (page 269) ASINH (page 242) SIN (page 276).
ASINH
Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. Syntax: ASINH(number)
where
ATAN2
Returns the arctangent of the specied coordinates. Syntax: ATAN2(x,y)
where
number
Examples s The function ASINH(5.3) returns 2.37.
is any number
x y
is the x coordinate is the y coordinate
The arctangent is the angle from the x axis to a line with end points at the origin (0, 0) and a point with the given coordinates (x, y). The angle is returned in radians, ranging from to , excluding .
s The function
ASINH(4) returns 2.09. See also ACOSH (page 240) ASIN (page 241) ATANH (page 242) SINH (page 277).
Examples s The function ATAN2(3,6) returns 1.11.
s The function
ATAN2(1,0.1) returns 3.04. See also ATAN (page 242) ATANH (page 242) TAN (page 279).
ATAN
Returns the arctangent of a number. Syntax: ATAN(number)
where
ATANH
Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number.
is the tangent of the angle
number
The resulting angle is returned in radians, ranging from /2 to /2. To convert the resulting radians to degrees, multiply the radians by 180/PI().
UM-0070-A0
Syntax: ATANH(number)
where
number
is a number between 1 and 1, excluding 1 and 1
242
PART C: Appendixes
Examples s The function ATANH(0.5)

returns 0.55.
s The function
ATANH(0.25) returns 0.26. See also ACOS (page 240) ASINH (page 242) TANH (page 279).
AVERAGE
Returns the average of the supplied numbers. The result of AVERAGE is also known as the arithmetic mean. Syntax: AVERAGE(number_list)
where
number_list
is a list of numbers separated by commas
As many as 30 numbers can be included in the list, and the list can contain numbers or a reference to a range of cells that contains numbers. Text, logical expressions, or empty cells in a referenced range are ignored. All numeric values (including 0) are used.
Examples s The function AVERAGE(5,6,8,14) returns 8.25.
s The function
AVERAGE(C15:C17) returns 134, the average of the values in the range of cells C15:C17. See also MAX (page 263) MIN (page 264).
APPENDIX 2
WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS
243
UM-0070-A0
CALL
Calls a procedure in a DLL (Dynamic Link Library). There are two syntax forms of this function: When CALL is used with REGISTER.ID, as shown in syntax 1, the DLL is loaded and remains loaded until the program is dismissed.
When CALL is used alone, as shown in syntax 2, the DLL is loaded, the function is called, and then the DLL is unloaded. IMPORTANT CALL is provided for advanced users only. If you use it incorrectly, you may cause errors that will require you to restart the computer. Syntax 1 used with REGISTER.ID: CALL(register_id,argument1,)
Syntax 2 used alone: CALL(module_text,procedure,type_text,argument1,)

where
register_id argument1 module_text procedure type_text
is the value returned by a previously executed REGISTER.ID function. is the arguments to be passed to the procedure. is quoted text or reference specifying the name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the procedure. is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Formula One. The function name is case dependent in 32-bit Formula One. is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL or code resource. The rst letter of type_text species the return value. The data types you use for type_text are described in the following table:
Data type Description A Logical (False = 0, True = 1) B IEEE 8-byte oating point number C Null-terminated string (255 characters maximum) D Byte-counted string (rst byte contains string length; 255 characters maximum) E IEEE 8-byte oating point number F Null-terminated string (255 characters maximum) G Byte-counted string (rst byte contains string length; 255 characters maximum) H Unsigned 2-byte integer I Signed 2-byte integer J Signed 4-byte integer L Logical (False = 0, True = 1) M Signed 2-byte integer N Signed 4-byte integer
Pass by Value Value Reference Reference

Reference Reference Reference Value Value Value Reference Reference Reference
C declaration short int double char * unsigned char *

double * char * unsigned char * unsigned short int short int long int short int * short int * long int *
For declarations made in C, it is assumed that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte shor t integers, and 4-byte long integers. In the Windows programming environment, all pointers should be far pointers. Pascal calling conventions are used for all functions called from DLLs. For most C compilers, you must add the Pascal keyword to the function declaration. If the return value for your custom function uses a passby-reference data type, a null pointer can be passed as the return value. The null pointer is interpreted as the #NUM! error value. For the F and G data types, a custom function can modify
UM-0070-A0
an allocated string buffer. If the return value type code is F or G, the value returned by the function is ignored. The list of function arguments is searched for the rst data type that corresponds to the return value type. The current contents of the allocated string buffer is taken for the return value. 256 bytes is allocated for the argument; therefore, a function can return a larger string than it receives. You can use a single digit (n), with a value from 1 to 9, as the code for type_text. The variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument is modied instead of the return value; this process is referred to as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference
PART C: Appendixes
244
data type. In addition, you must declare the function void. For most C compilers, you can add the Void keyword to the function declaration.
CHAR
Returns a character that corresponds to the supplied ASCII code. Syntax: CHAR(number)
where
Examples s The following macro formula registers the GetTickCount function from Microsoft Windows. GetTickCount returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Windows was started. REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J")
Assuming that this REGISTER.ID function is in cell A5, after your macro registers GetTickCount, you can use the CALL function to return the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Windows was started: CALL(A5)
number
is a value between 1 and 255 that species an ASCII character
The character and associated numeric code are dened by Windows in the ASCII character set.
Examples s The following function returns the character F: CHAR(70)
s On a worksheet, you can use the following CALL formula (syntax 2) to call the GetTickCount function: CALL("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")
s The following function returns the character #:

CHAR(35) See also CODE (page 246).
CEILING
Rounds a number up to the nearest multiple of a specied signicance. Syntax: CEILING(number,significance)
where
CHOOSE
Returns a value from a list of numbers based on the index number supplied. Syntax: CHOOSE(index,item_list)
where
number significance
is the value you want to round is the multiple to which you want to round
index item_list
is a number that refers to an item in
item_list
is a list of numbers, formulas, or text separated by commas. This argument can also be a range reference. You can specify as many as 29 items in the list.
Regardless of the sign of the number, the value is rounded up, away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs. If number or significance is non-numeric, the error
#VALUE! is returned. When the arguments have opposite signs, the error #NUM! is returned.
Examples s The following function returns 1.25: CEILING(1.23459,0.05)
index can be a cell reference, or a formula that returns any value from 1 to 29. If index is less than 1 or greater than the number of items in item_list, #VALUE! is returned. If index is a fractional number, it is truncated to an integer.
Examples s The following function returns Q2: CHOOSE(2,"Q1","Q2","Q3","Q4")
s The following function returns 150:

CEILING(148.24,2) See also EVEN (page 252) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) ODD (page 268) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
s The following function returns the average of the contents of range A1:A10: AVERAGE(CHOOSE(1,A1:A10,B1:B10,C1:C10))
See also INDEX (page 256).
APPENDIX 2
WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS
245
UM-0070-A0
CLEAN
Removes all non-printable characters from the supplied text. Syntax: CLEAN(text)
where
where
reference is a reference to a cell or range.
Omitting the argument returns the number of the column in which COLUMN is placed.
text is any worksheet information

Text imported from another environment may require this function.
Examples s The following function returns 2: COLUMN(B3)
s The following function returns 4 if the function is entered in cell D2: COLUMN()
See also COLUMNS (page 246) ROW (page 275).
Examples s The following function returns Payments Due because the character returned by CHAR(8) is nonprintable: CLEAN("Payments"&CHAR(8)&"Due")
See also CHAR (page 245) TRIM (page 280).
COLUMNS
Returns the number of columns in a range reference. Syntax: COLUMNS(range)
where
CODE
Returns a numeric code representing the rst character of the supplied string. Syntax: CODE(text)
where
range
is a reference to a range of cells
Example s The following function returns 4: COLUMNS(A1:D5)

See also COLUMN (page 246) ROWS (page 275).
text
is any string
The numeric code and associated string are dened in your computers character set. (The character set used by Windows is the ANSI character set.)
Examples s The following function returns 65: CODE("A")
CONCATENATE
Joins several text strings into one string. Syntax: CONCATENATE(text1,text2,)
where

CODE("b") See also CHAR (page 245).
text1, text2,
COLUMN
Returns the worksheet column number of the supplied reference. Syntax: COLUMN(reference)
represent up to 30 text items to be joined into a single text item. The text items can be strings, numbers, or single-cell references.
The & operator can be used instead of CONCATENATE to join text items.
Examples s The following example returns Sale Price: CONCATENATE("Sale ","Price") Note the space character after Sale.
UM-0070-A0
246
PART C: Appendixes
s Suppose in a sales worksheet, C3 contains client 11, C6 contains dataTakers, and C9 contains the number 9. The following example returns Sales 2000 to 2002: 9 dataTakers for client 11: CONCATENATE("Sales 2000 to 2002: ", C9," ",C6," for ",C3) Note the space character after 2002:, between C9 and C6, and either side of for.
See also ASINH (page 242) ATANH (page 242) COS (page 247).
COUNT
Returns the number of values in the supplied list. Syntax: COUNT(value_list)
where
value_list is a list of values. The list can contain
COS
Returns the cosine of an angle. Syntax: COS(number)
where
as many as 30 values.
number
is the angle in radians. If the angle is in degrees, convert the angle to radians by multiplying the angle by PI()/180.
COUNT only counts numbers, or numerical values such as logical values, dates and text representations of dates. If you supply a range, only numbers and numerical values in the range are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, and error values in the range are ignored.
Examples s The following function returns 0.126: COS(1.444)
Examples s The following function returns 2: COUNT(5,6,"Q2")

COUNT("09/07/02","09/21/02","09/28/02") See also AVERAGE (page 243) COUNTA (page 247) SUM (page 278).
s The following function returns 0.28:

COS(5) See also ACOS (page 240) ASINH (page 242) ATANH (page 242) COSH (page 247) PI (page 269).
COUNTA
Returns the number of non-blank values in the supplied list. Syntax: COUNTA(expression_list)
where
COSH
Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number. Syntax: COSH(number)
where
expression_list
is a list of expressions. As many as 30 expressions can be included in the list.
number
is any number
Examples s The following function returns 4.14: COSH(2.10)
COUNTA returns the number of cells that contain data in a range. Null values ("") are counted, but references to empty cells are ignored.

COSH(.24)
Examples s The following function returns 4: COUNTA(32,45,"AbcdEfg","")
APPENDIX 2
WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS
247
UM-0070-A0
s The following function returns 0 when the specied range contains all empty cells: COUNTA(C38:C60)
See also AVERAGE (page 243) COUNT (page 247) PRODUCT (page 270) SUM (page 278).
DATE
Returns the serial number (see NOW) of the supplied date. Syntax: DATE(year,month,day)
where
year
COUNTIF
Returns the number of cells (within a range) that meet a given criteria. Syntax: COUNTIF(range,criteria)
where
month
day
range criteria
is the range of cells from which you want to count cells is the number, expression, or text that denes the cells to be counted
is a number from 1900 to 2078. If year is between 1920 to 2019, you only need specify two digits to represent the year; otherwise specify all four digits. is a number representing the month (for example, 12 represents December). If a number greater than 12 is supplied, the number is added to the rst month of the specied year. is a number representing the day of the month. If the number you specify for day exceeds the number of days in that month, the number is added to the rst day of the specied month.
Examples s If cells B4 to B7 contain 33, 55, 76, and 86 respectively, the function
Examples s The following function returns 34506: DATE(94,6,21)

DATE(99,3,6) See also DATEVALUE (page 248) DAY (page 249) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) TIMEVALUE (page 280) TODAY (page 280) YEAR (page 284).
COUNTIF(B3:B6,">50") returns the value 3. s If cells C4 to C8 contain DT50, DT500, DT615, DT800
and DT800 respectively, the function
COUNTIF(C4:C8,"DT800"
returns 2. See also AVERAGE (page 243) COUNTA (page 247) SUM (page 278) SUMIF (page 278).
DATEVALUE
Returns the serial number (see NOW) of a date supplied as a text string. Syntax: DATEVALUE(text)
where
text
is a date in text format between January 1 1900 and December 31 2078. If you omit the year, the current year is used.
Examples s The following function returns 34399: DATEVALUE("3/6/94")

DATEVALUE("12/25/95")
UM-0070-A0
248
PART C: Appendixes
See also NOW (page 266) TIMEVALUE (page 280) TODAY (page 280).
DAYS360
Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months). Use this function to help compute payments if your accounting system is based on twelve 30-day months. Syntax: DAYS360(start_date,end_date[,method])
where
DAY
Returns the day of the month that corresponds to the date represented by the supplied number. Syntax: DAY(serial_number)
where
start_date end_date method

(optional)
serial_number is a date represented as a serial number (see NOW) or
as text (for example, 06-21-02 or 21-Jun-02).
Examples s The following function returns 6: DAY(34399)
are the two dates between which you want to know the number of days. is a logical value that species whether the European or US method should be used in the calculation. If False (or omitted), the US (NASD) method is used. If True, the European method is used. The default is based on the local translation. It should be correct for your location.

DAY("06-21-94") See also HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TODAY (page 280) WEEKDAY (page 284) YEAR (page 284).
start_date and end_date can be text strings using numbers to represent the month, day, and year (for example, "1/30/93" or "1-30-93"), or they can be serial numbers (see NOW) representing the dates.
If start_date occurs after end_date, DAYS360 returns a negative number. If method is set to False and start_date is the 31st of a month, start_date becomes equal to the 30th of the same month. end_date is the 31st of a month and start_date is less than the 30th of a month, end_date becomes equal to the 1st of the next month, otherwise end_date becomes equal to the 30th of the same month. If method is set to True, start_dates or end_dates that occur on the 31st of a month become equal to the 30th of the same month. NOTE To determine the number of days between two dates in a normal year, you can use normal subtraction. For example, "12/31/93""1/1/93" equals 364.
Example The following function returns 1: DAYS360("1/30/02","2/1/02")
APPENDIX 2
WORKSHEET FUNCTIONS
249
UM-0070-A0
DB
Returns the real depreciation of an asset for a specic period of time using the xed-declining-balance method. Syntax: DB(cost,salvage,life,period[,months])
where is the initial cost of the asset cost salvage is the salvage value of the asset is the number of periods in the useful life life
DDB
Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specic period of time using the double-declining-balance method or a declining-balance factor you supply. Syntax: DDB(cost,salvage,life,period[,factor])
where
period
months
(optional)
of the asset is the period for which to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine period and life must match. is the number of months in the rst year of the items life. Omitting this argument assumes there are 12 months in the rst year.
cost salvage life period
is the initial cost of the asset is the salvage value of the asset is the number of periods in the useful life of the asset is the period for which to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine period and life must match. is the rate at which the balance declines. Omitting this argument assumes a default factor of 2, the double-declining-balance factor.
factor
(optional)
Example s The following function returns 1451.52: DB(10000,1000,7,3)

See also DDB (page 250) SLN (page 277) SYD (page 279) VDB (page 283).
The double-declining-balance method uses an accelerated rate where the highest depreciation occurs in the rst period, decreasing in successive periods. All arguments for this function must be positive numbers.
Example s The following function returns 1457.73: DDB(10000,1000,7,3)

See also DB (page 250) SLN (page 277) SYD (page 279) VDB (page 283).
DBCS
Returns a copy of text in which single-byte characters (if any) have been converted to double-byte characters. Syntax: DBCS(text)
where
text
is the text containing single-byte characters
Any single-byte characters that do not have double-byte equivalents are left in their original (single-byte) form. See also ASC (page 241).
UM-0070-A0
250
PART C: Appendixes
DOLLAR
Returns the specied number as text, using currency format and the supplied precision. Syntax: DOLLAR(number[,precision])
where is a number, a formula that evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number precision is a value representing the number of decimal places to the right of the (optional) decimal point. Omitting this argument assumes the standard number of decimal places for the local currency.
ERROR.TYPE
Returns a number corresponding to an error:
Number
number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 #N/A
Error #NULL!
#DIV/0! #VALUE! #REF! #NAME? #NUM! #N/A Other
NOTE Local currency refers to the currency format for the current system that is, the one specied in Windows Regional Settings control panel. DOLLAR returns the specied number format as text using the computers current currency format. If you want to always convert to the USDollar format regardless of the language of your system, use USDOLLAR (page 282).
Syntax: ERROR.TYPE(cell_ref)
where
cell_ref
is a cell reference
Examples s The following function returns $1023.79: DOLLAR(1023.789)
Example s The following function returns 2 if the formula in cell D4 attempts to divide by zero: ERROR.TYPE(D4)
See also ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258).
s The following function returns $500:

DOLLAR(495.301,2) See also FIXED (page 253) TEXT (page 280) VALUE (page 282).
251
UM-0070-A0
EVEN
Rounds the specied number up to the nearest even integer. Syntax: EVEN(number)
where
EXP
Returns the value of e raised to the specied power. The constant e is 2.71828182845904 (the base of the natural logarithm). Syntax: EXP(number)
is any number, a formula that evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number where
number
number
is any number as the exponent
Examples s The following function returns 4: EVEN(2.5)
Examples s The following function returns 12.18: EXP(2.5)

EVEN(2030.45) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) ODD (page 268) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).

EXP(3) See also LN (page 261) LOG (page 261).
FACT
Returns the factorial of a specied number. Syntax: FACT(number)
where
EXACT
Compares two expressions for identical, case-sensitive matches. True is returned if the expressions are identical; False is returned if they are not. Use EXACT to test text being entered into a cell. Syntax: EXACT(expression1,expression2)
where
number
is any non-negative integer. If you supply a real number, FACT truncates the number to an integer before calculation.
Examples s The following function returns 2: FACT(2.5)

expression1 expression2
is any text is any text
FACT(6) See also PRODUCT (page 270).
Examples s The following function returns True: EXACT("Abc99","Abc99")

EXACT("Abc99","abc99") See also LEN (page 261) SEARCH (page 275).
FALSE
Returns the logical value False. This function always requires the trailing parentheses. Syntax: FALSE() You can also type False directly into a worksheet cell or formula. See also TRUE (page 281).
UM-0070-A0
252
PART C: Appendixes
FIND
Searches for a text string within another text string and returns the character position at which the search string rst occurs. Syntax: FIND(search_text,text[,start])
where
Examples s The following function returns 12: FINDB("time","There's no time like the present")

FINDB("4","Aisle 4, Part 123-4-11", 9)
search_text is the text to nd. If you specify an text start

(optional) empty string (""), FIND matches the rst character in text. is the text to be searched
FIXED
Rounds a number to the supplied precision, formats the number in decimal format, and returns the result as text. Syntax: FIXED(number[,precision][,no_commas])
where
is the character position in text where the search begins (the rst character in text is character number 1). When you omit this argument, the default starting position is character number 1.
number precision
(optional)
is any number is the number of digits that appear to the right of the decimal place. When this argument is omitted, a default precision of 2 is used. If you specify negative precision, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point. You can specify a precision as great as 127 digits. determines if thousands separators (commas) are used in the result. Use 1 to exclude commas in the result. If no_commas is 0 or the argument is omitted, thousands separators are included (for example, 1,000.00).
FIND is case-sensitive, and you cannot use wildcard characters in the search_text.
Examples s The following function returns 12: FIND("time","There's no time left")

FIND("4","Aisle 4, Part 123-4-11",9) See also EXACT (page 252) LEN (page 261) MID (page 264) SEARCH (page 275).
no_commas
(optional)
Examples s The following function returns 2,000.500: FIXED(2000.5,3)
FINDB
Searches for a string of text within another text string and returns the byte position at which the search string rst occurs. Syntax: FINDB(search_text,text[,start])
where
FIXED(2009.5,1,1) See also DOLLAR (page 251) ROUND (page 274) TEXT (page 280) VALUE (page 282).
search_text is the text to nd. If you specify an text start

(optional) empty string (""), FINDB matches the rst byte in text. is the text to be searched
is the byte position in text where the search begins (the rst byte in text is byte number 1). When you omit this argument, the default starting position is byte number 1.
FINDB is case-sensitive, and you cannot use wildcard characters in the search_text.
: 253
UM-0070-A0
FLOOR
Rounds a number down to the nearest multiple of a specied signicance. Syntax: FLOOR(number,significance)
where
The units used for interest must match those used for nper. For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper. Cash paid out is shown as a negative number. Cash received is shown as a positive number.
number significance
is the value you want to round is the multiple to which you want to round
Examples s The following function returns 4,774.55: FV(5%,8,500)
Regardless of the sign of the number, the value is rounded down, toward zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs. If number or significance is non-numeric, #NAME? is returned. When the arguments have opposite signs, #NUM! is returned.
s The following function returns 531,550.86:

FV(10%/12,240,700,1) See also IPMT (page 257) NPER (page 267) PMT (page 269) PPMT (page 270) PV (page 271) RATE (page 271).
Examples s The following function returns 1.2: FLOOR(1.23459,0.05)

FLOOR(148.24,2) See also CEILING (page 245) EVEN (page 252) INT (page 256) ODD (page 268) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
HLOOKUP
Searches the top row of a table for a value and returns the contents of a cell in that table that corresponds to the location of the search value. Syntax: HLOOKUP(search_item,search_range,row_index)
where is a value, text string, or reference to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of search_range search_range is a reference to the range (table) to be searched. The cells in the rst row of search_range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. The contents of the rst row must be in ascending order (for example, 2, 1, 0, 2, A through Z, False, True). Text searches are not case-sensitive. is the row in search_range row_index from which the matching value is returned. row_index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in search_range. If row_index is less than 1, the error #VALUE! is returned. When row_index is greater than the number of rows in the table, the error #REF! is returned.
search_item
FV
Returns the future value of an annuity based on regular payments and a xed interest rate. Syntax: FV(interest,nper,payment[,pv][,due_type])
where
interest nper payment pv

(optional)
is the xed interest rate is the number of payments in an annuity is the xed payment made each period is the present value or the lump sum amount that the annuity is currently worth. When you omit this argument, a present value of 0 is assumed. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
due_type
(optional)
HLOOKUP compares the information in the top row of search_range to the supplied search_item. When
PART C: Appendixes
UM-0070-A0
254
a match is found, information located in the same column and supplied row (row_index) is returned. If search_item cannot be found in the top row of search_range, the largest value that is less than search_item is used. When search_item is less than the smallest value in the rst row of the search_range, the error #REF! is returned.
Examples
See also DAY (page 249) MINUTE (page 265) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) WEEKDAY (page 284) YEAR (page 284).
IF
Tests a logical condition and returns a specied value. Syntax: IF(condition,true_value,false_value)
FIGURE 300
HLOOKUP example
where
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 300, the following function returns 22.63:
HLOOKUP("Northeast",B1:E5,3)
condition true_value false_value
is any logical expression is the value to be returned if condition evaluates to True is the value to be returned if condition evaluates to False
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 300, the following function returns #REF!: HLOOKUP("Pacific",B1:E5,7)
See also INDEX (page 256) LOOKUP (page 262) MATCH (page 263) VLOOKUP (page 283).
Example s The following function returns Greater if the value in cell A1 is greater than 10, and Less if the value in A1 is less than 10: IF(A1>10,"Greater","Less")
See also AND (page 241) FALSE (page 252) NOT (page 266) OR (page 269) TRUE (page 281).
HOUR
Returns the hour component (in 24-hour format) of the specied time. Syntax: HOUR(time)
where
time
is the time as a serial number (see NOW). The decimal portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.
The result is an integer ranging from 0 (12:00 AM) to 23 (11:00 PM).
Examples s The following function returns 9: HOUR(34259.4)

HOUR(34619.976)
255
UM-0070-A0
INDEX
Returns the contents of a cell from a specied range. Syntax: INDEX(reference[,row][,column][,range])
where
See also CHOOSE (page 245) HLOOKUP (page 254) LOOKUP (page 262) MATCH (page 263) VLOOKUP (page 283).
reference
row
(optional)
is a reference to one or more ranges. If reference species more than one range, separate each reference with a comma and enclose the reference in parentheses. For example, (A1:C6,B7:E14,F4). If each range in reference contains only one row or column, you can omit the row or column argument. For example, if reference is A1:A15, you can omit the column argument and simply use INDEX(A1:A15,3,,1). is the row number in reference from which you want to return data
INDIRECT
Returns the contents of the cell referenced by the specied cell. Syntax: INDIRECT(ref_text[,a1])
where
ref_text
a1
(optional)
column
(optional)
is the column number in reference from which you want to return data species the range from which data is returned if reference contains more than one range. For example, if reference is (A1:A10,B1:B5,D14:E23), A1:A10 is range 1, B1:B5 is range 2, and D14:E23 is range 3.
is a reference to a cell that references a third cell. If ref_text is not a valid reference, the error #REF! is returned. is the reference format. This argument must be TRUE() to represent an A1 reference format; the R1C1 reference format is not supported.
range
(optional)
Example s The following function returns the contents of the cell that C1 references. If C1 contains D1, the contents of D1 are returned: INDIRECT(C1)
See also OFFSET (page 268).
If row, column, and range do not point to a cell within reference, #REF! is returned. If row and column are omitted, INDEX returns the range in reference specied by range.
Examples
INT
Rounds the supplied number down to the nearest integer. Syntax: INT(number)
where
number
FIGURE 301
is any real number
INDEX example
s he following function returns $1415.35:

INDEX(A2:B6,2,2)
Examples s The following function returns 10: INT(10.99)
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 301, the following function returns $1634.58:
INDEX((A2:B6,D2:E6),4,2,2)

INT(10.99) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) MOD (page 265) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
UM-0070-A0
256
PART C: Appendixes
IPMT
Returns the interest payment of an annuity for a given period, based on regular payments and a xed periodic interest rate. Syntax: IPMT(interest,per,nper,pv,[fv],[type])
where
IRR
Returns internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash ows. Syntax: IRR(cash_flow[,guess])
where
cash_flow is a reference to a range that contains interest is the xed periodic interest rate is the period for which to return the per nper pv fv
(optional)
interest payment. This number must be between 1 and nper. is the number of payments is the present value, or the lump sum amount the annuity is currently worth is the future value, or the value after all payments are made. If this argument is omitted, the future value is assumed to be 0. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
guess
values for which to calculate the internal rate of return. The values must contain at least one positive and one negative value. During calculation, IRR uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of the cash ow. Text, logical values, and empty cells in the range are ignored. is the estimate of the internal rate of return. If no argument is supplied, a rate of return of 10 percent is assumed.
type
(optional)
The internal rate of return is the interest rate received for an investment consisting of payments (specied by negative numbers) and investments (specied by positive numbers). IRR is calculated iteratively, cycling through the calculation until the result is accurate to .00001%. If the result cannot be found after 20 iterations, #NUM! is returned. When this occurs, supply a different value for guess.
Examples
Examples s The following function returns 117.87: IPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000)

IPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000,0,1) See also PV (page 271) PMT (page 269) PPMT (page 270) RATE (page 271).
FIGURE 302
IRR example
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 302, the following function returns 3.72%: IRR(B1:B6) s For the worksheet shown in Figure 302, the following function returns 49.26%: IRR(B1:B3,20%)
See also MIRR (page 265) NPV (page 267) RATE (page 271).
257
UM-0070-A0
ISBLANK
Determines if the specied cell is blank. Syntax: ISBLANK(reference)
where
ISERROR
Determines if the specied expression returns an error value. Syntax: ISERROR(expression)
where
reference
is a reference to any cell
If the referenced cell is blank, True is returned. If the referenced cell is not blank, False is returned.
expression
is any expression
Example s The following function returns True if A1 is a blank cell: ISBLANK(A1)

See also ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
If the expression returns any error value, such as #N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME?, or #NULL!, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
Examples s The following function returns True: ISERROR(4/0)
s The following function returns False if A1 contains a formula that does not return an error. ISERROR(A1)
See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
ISERR
Determines if the specied expression returns an error value. Syntax: ISERR(expression)
where
ISLOGICAL
Determines if the specied expression returns a logical value. Syntax: ISLOGICAL(expression)
where
expression
is any expression
If the expression returns any error except #N/A!, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
Example s The following function returns True if A1 contains a formula that returns an error such as #NUM!: ISERR(A1)
See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
UM-0070-A0
expression
is any expression
If the expression returns a logical value, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
Example s The following function returns True because ISBLANK returns a logical value: ISLOGICAL(ISBLANK(A1))
258
PART C: Appendixes
See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
Examples s The following function returns True if cell F3 contains a number or is a blank cell: ISNONTEXT(F3)

ISNONTEXT("text") See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
ISNA
Determines if the specied expression returns the #N/A! (value not available) error. Syntax: ISNA(expression)
where
expression
is any expression
If the expression returns the #N/A! error, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
ISNUMBER
Determines if the specied expression is a number. Syntax: ISNUMBER(expression)
where
Example s The following function returns True if cell A1 contains the NA() function or returns the error value #N/A!: ISNA(A1)
See also NA (page 266) ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
expression
is any expression
If the expression returns a number, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned. If expression returns a number represented as text (for example, "12"), False is returned.
Examples s The following function returns True: ISNUMBER(123.45)

ISNUMBER("123") See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
ISNONTEXT
Determines if the specied expression is not text. Syntax: ISNONTEXT(expression)
where
expression is any expression

If the expression returns any value that is not text, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
259
UM-0070-A0
ISREF
Determines if the specied expression is a range reference. Syntax: ISREF(expression)
where
LEFT
Returns the left-most characters from the specied text string. Syntax: LEFT(text[,num_chars])
where is any text string text num_chars is the number of characters to return. (optional)

If the expression returns a range reference, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
Example s The following function returns True: ISREF(A3)

See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISTEXT (page 260).
This value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of characters in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.
Examples s The following function returns 2: LEFT("2nd Quarter")
s The following function returns 2nd:

LEFT("2nd Quarter",3) See also MID (page 264) RIGHT (page 273).
ISTEXT
Determines if the specied expression is text. Syntax: ISTEXT(expression)
where
LEFTB
Returns the left-most byte from the specied text string. Syntax: LEFTB(text[,num_chars])
where is any text string text num_chars is the number of bytes to return. This (optional)
expression
is any expression
If the expression returns text, True is returned. Otherwise, False is returned.
Example s The following function returns True: ISTEXT("2nd Quarter")

See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260).
value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of bytes in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.
Examples s The following function returns 2: LEFTB("2nd Quarter")
s The following function returns 2nd:

LEFTB("2nd Quarter",3)
UM-0070-A0
260
PART C: Appendixes
LEN
Returns the number of characters in the supplied text string. Syntax: LEN(text)
where

LN(20.09) See also EXP (page 252) LOG (page 261) LOG10 (page 261).
text
is any text string. Spaces in the string are counted as characters.
Examples s The following function returns 11: LEN("3rd Quarter")
LOG
Returns the logarithm of a number to the specied base. Syntax: LOG(number[,base])
where

LEN("1-3") See also EXACT (page 252) SEARCH (page 275).
number base
(optional)
is any positive real number is the base of the logarithm. Omitting this argument assumes a base of 10.
LENB
Returns the number of bytes in the supplied text string. Syntax: LENB(text)
where
Examples s The following function returns 0: LOG(1)

LOG(10) See also EXP (page 252) LN (page 261) LOG10 (page 261).
text
is any text string. Spaces in the string are counted as bytes.
Examples s The following function returns 11: LENB("3rd Quarter")
LOG10
Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number. Syntax: LOG10(number)
where

LENB("1-3")
LN
Returns the natural logarithm (based on the constant e) of a number. Syntax: LN(number)
where
number
is any positive real number
Examples s The following function returns 2.41: LOG10(260)

LOG10(100)
is any positive real number
number
LN is the inverse of the EXP function.
Examples s The following function returns 2.50: LN(12.18)
See also EXP (page 252) LN (page 261) LOG (page 261).
261
UM-0070-A0
LOOKUP
Searches for a value in one range and returns the contents of the corresponding position in a second range. Syntax: LOOKUP(lookup_value,lookup_range,result _range)
where
LOWER
Changes the characters in the specied string to lowercase characters. Numeric characters in the string are not changed. Syntax: LOWER(text)
where
text lookup_value is the value for which to search in

the rst range
is any string
lookup_range is the rst range to search and
contains only one row or one column. The range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. To search lookup_range correctly, the expressions in the range must be placed in ascending order (for example, 2, 1, 0, 1, 2..., A through Z, False, True). The search is not case-sensitive. result_range is a range of one row or one column that is the same size as
Examples s The following function returns 3rd quarter: LOWER("3rd Quarter")
s The following function returns john doe:

LOWER("JOHN DOE") See also PROPER (page 270) UPPER (page 281).
lookup_range
If lookup_value does not have an exact match in lookup_range, the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value is found and the corresponding position in result_range is returned. When lookup_value is smaller than the data in lookup_range, #N/A is returned.
Examples
FIGURE 303
LOOKUP example
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 303, the following function returns Detroit: LOOKUP("North",A2:A7,B2:B7) s For the worksheet shown in Figure 303, the following function returns #N/A: LOOKUP("Alabama",A2:A7,B2:B7)
See also HLOOKUP (page 254) INDEX (page 256) VLOOKUP (page 283).
UM-0070-A0
262
PART C: Appendixes
MATCH
Compares a specied value against values in a range and returns the position of the matching value in the search range. Syntax: MATCH(lookup_value,lookup_range[,comparison])
where
Examples
lookup_value is the value against which to
FIGURE 304
MATCH example
compare. It can be a number, text, or logical value, or a reference to a cell that contains one of those values. lookup_range is the range to search. It contains only one row or one column. The range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. is a number that represents the comparison type of comparison to be made (optional) between lookup_value and the values in lookup_range. When you omit this argument, comparison method 1 is assumed. When comparison is 0, the rst value that is equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range can be in any order. When comparison is 1, the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range must be in ascending order (for example, ...2, -1, 0, 1, 2..., A through Z, False, True). When comparison is 1, the smallest value that is greater than or equal to lookup_value is matched. When using this comparison method, the values in lookup_range must be in descending order (for example, True, False, Z through A, ...2, 1, 0, -1, -2...).
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 304, the following function returns 5: MATCH(7600,B2:B7,1) s For the worksheet shown in Figure 304, the following function returns 2: MATCH("D*",A2:A7,0)
See also HLOOKUP (page 254) INDEX (page 256) LOOKUP (page 262) VLOOKUP (page 283).
MAX
Returns the largest value in a specied list of numbers. Syntax: MAX(number_list)
where
number_list is a list of as many as 30 numbers,

separated by commas
number_list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.
Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors. If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.
If there are no numbers in the list, 0 is returned.
When using comparison method 0 and lookup_value is text, lookup_value can contain wildcard characters. The wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character. When no match is found for lookup_value, #N/A is returned.
Examples s The following function returns 500: MAX(50,100,150,500,200)
s The following function returns the largest value in the range: MAX(A1:F12)
See also AVERAGE (page 243) MIN (page 264).
UM-0070-A0
263
MID
Returns the specied number of characters from a text string, beginning with the specied starting position. Syntax: MID(text,start_position,num_chars)
where is the text string containing the characters you want to extract start_position is the position of the rst character to return from text. If start_position is 1, the rst character in text is returned. If start_position is greater than the number of characters in text, an empty string (" ") is returned. If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. is the number of characters to num_chars return. If num_chars is negative, #VALUE! is returned.
MIDB
Returns the specied number of bytes from a text string, beginning with the specied starting position. Syntax: MIDB(text,start_position,num_chars)
where
text
text start_position
num_chars
is the string from which to return bytes is the position of the rst byte to return from text. If start_position is 1, the rst byte in text is returned. If start_position is greater than the number of bytes in text, an empty string (" ") is returned. If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. is the number of bytes to return. If num_chars is negative, #VALUE! is returned.
If start_position plus the number of characters in num_chars exceeds the length of text, the characters from start_position to the end of text are returned.
If start_position plus the number of bytes in num_chars exceeds the length of text, the bytes from start_position to the end of text are returned.
Examples s The following function returns Expenses: MID("Travel Expenses",8,8)
Examples s The following function returns Expenses: MIDB("Travel Expenses",8,8)

MID("Part #45-7234",7,2) See also CODE (page 246) FIND (page 253) LEFT (page 260) RIGHT (page 273) SEARCH (page 275).

MIDB("Part #45-7234",7,2)
MIN
Returns the smallest value in a specied list of numbers. Syntax: MIN(number_list)
where
number_list is a list of as many as 30
numbers, separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values.
Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors. If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored. If there are no numbers in the list, 0 is returned
UM-0070-A0
264
PART C: Appendixes
Examples s The following function returns 50: MIN(50,100,150,500,200)
MIRR
Returns the modied internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash ows. Syntax: MIRR(cash_flows,finance_rate,reinvest_rate)
where is a reference to a range that contains values for which to calculate the modied internal rate of return. The values must contain at least one positive and one negative value. Values that represent cash received should be positive; negative values represent cash paid. During calculation, MIRR uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of cash ow. Text, logical values, and empty cells in the range are ignored. finance_rate is the interest rate paid on money used in the cash ow reinvest_rate is the interest rate received on money reinvested from the cash ow
s The following function returns the smallest value in the range: MIN(A1:F12)
See also AVERAGE (page 243) MAX (page 263).
cash_flow
MINUTE
Returns the minute that corresponds to a supplied date. Syntax: MINUTE(serial_number)
where
serial_number is the time as a serial number (see NOW). The decimal
portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.
The result is an integer ranging from 0 to 59.
Examples s The following function returns 36: MINUTE(34506.4)

MINUTE(34399.825) See also DAY (page 249) HOUR (page 255) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) WEEKDAY (page 284) YEAR (page 284).
The modied internal rate of return considers the cost of the investment and the interest received on the reinvestment of cash. See also IRR (page 257) NPV (page 267) RATE (page 271).
MOD
Returns the remainder after dividing a number by a specied divisor. Syntax: MOD(number,divisor)
where
number divisor
is any number is any nonzero number. If divisor is 0, #DIV/0! is returned.
Examples s The following function returns 1: MOD(23,3)

MOD(23,3)
UM-0070-A0
265
See also INT (page 256) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
NOT
Returns a logical value that is the opposite of its value. Syntax: NOT(logical)
where
MONTH
Returns the month that corresponds to a supplied date. Syntax: MONTH(serial_number)
where
logical is an expression that returns a logical

value such as True or False
If logical is false, NOT returns True. Conversely, if logical is true, NOT returns False.
serial_number is the date as a serial number (see NOW) or as text (for
example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)
Examples s The following function returns False: NOT(TRUE())
MONTH returns a number ranging from 1 (January) to 12 (December).

NOT(MONTH("12/25/94")=12) See also AND (page 241) IF (page 255) OR (page 269).
Examples s The following function returns 6: MONTH("06-21-94")

MONTH(34626) See also DAY (page 249) HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TODAY (page 280) WEEKDAY (page 284) YEAR (page 284).
NOW
Returns the current date and time as a serial number. Syntax: NOW() The result of this function changes only when a recalculation of the worksheet occurs. See also DATE (page 248) DAY (page 249) HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) MONTH (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TODAY (page 280) WEEKDAY (page 284) YEAR (page 284).
NA
Returns the error value #N/A, which represents not available. Syntax: NA() Use NA to mark cells that lack data without leaving them empty. Empty cells may not be correctly represented in some calculations. IMPORTANT Although NA does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function. See also ISNA (page 259).
Serial Number In a serial number, numbers to the left of the decimal point represent the date, and numbers to the right of the decimal point represent the time.
UM-0070-A0
266
PART C: Appendixes
NPER
Returns the number of periods of an investment based on regular periodic payments and a xed interest rate. Syntax: NPER(interest,pmt,pf[,fv][,type])
where
NPV
Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic payments and a discount rate. Syntax: NPV(discount_rate,value_list)
where
interest pmt
is the xed interest rate is the xed payment made each period. Generally, pmt includes the principal and interest, not taxes or other fees. is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is currently worth is the future value, or the balance to attain after the nal payment. Omitting this argument assumes a future balance of 0. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period, or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
discount_rate is the rate of discount for one value_list
pf
fv
(optional)
type
(optional)
Examples s The following function returns 36.67: NPER(12%/12,350,300,16000,1)

NPER(1%,350,300,16000) See also PV (page 271) IPMT (page 257) PMT (page 269) PPMT (page 270) PV (page 271) RATE (page 271).
period is a list of as many as 29 arguments or a reference to a range that contains values that represent payments and income. During calculation, NPV uses the order in which the values appear to determine the order of cash ow. Numbers, empty cells, and text representations of numbers are included in the calculation. Errors and text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored. If value_list is a range reference, only numeric data in the range is included in the calculation. Other types of data in the range, such as empty cells, logical values, text, and error values are ignored.
The time span NPV uses for calculation begins one period before the rst cash ow date and ends when the last cash ow payment is made. This function is based on future cash ows. When your rst cash ow occurs at the beginning of the rst period, the rst value must be added to the NPV result, not supplied as a value in value_list.
Example s The following function returns 811.57: NPV(8%,12000,3000,3000,3000,7000)

See also FV (page 254) IRR (page 257) PV (page 271).
267
UM-0070-A0
ODD
Rounds a specied number up to the nearest odd integer. Syntax: ODD(number)
where
OFFSET
Returns the contents of a range that is offset from a starting point in the worksheet. Syntax: OFFSET(ref,rows,columns[,height][,width])
where is any number, a formula that evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number is a reference to a cell from which the offset reference is based. If you specify a range reference, #VALUE! is returned. is the number of rows from ref that rows represents the upper-left cell of the offset range. A positive number represents rows below the starting cell; a negative number represents rows above the starting cell. If rows places the upper-left cell of the offset range outside the worksheet boundary, #REF! is returned. columns is the number of columns from ref that represents the upper-left cell of the offset range. A positive number represents columns right of the starting cell; a negative number represents columns left of the starting cell. If columns places the upper-left cell of the offset range outside the spreadsheet boundary, #REF! is returned. height is a positive number representing the (optional) number of rows to include in the offset range. Omitting this argument assumes a single row. is a positive number representing the width (optional) number of columns to include in the offset range. Omitting this argument assumes a single column.
number
ref
Examples s The following function returns 5: ODD(3.5)

ODD(6) See also CEILING (page 245) EVEN (page 252) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) ROUND (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
OFFSET does not change the current selection in the worksheet. Because it returns a reference, OFFSET can be used in any function that requires or uses a cell or range reference as an argument.
Examples s The following function returns the contents of cell D4: OFFSET(B1,3,2,1,1)
s The following function returns the sum of the values in the range E3:F5: SUM(OFFSET(A1,2,4,3,2))
UM-0070-A0
268
PART C: Appendixes
OR
Returns True if at least one of a series of logical arguments is true. Syntax: OR(logical_list)
where
PMT
Returns the periodic payment of an annuity, based on regular payments and a xed periodic interest rate. Syntax: PMT(interest,nper,pv[,fv][,type])
where is a list of conditions separated by commas. You can include as many as 30 conditions in the list. The list can contain logical values or a reference to a range containing logical values. Text and empty cells are ignored. If there are no logical values in the list, the error value #VALUE! is returned.
logical_list
interest nper pv fv
(optional)
is the xed periodic interest rate is the number of periods in the annuity is the present value, or the amount the annuity is currently worth is the future value, or the amount the annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
type
(optional)
Example s The following function returns True because one of the arguments is true: OR(1+1=1,5+5=10)
See also AND (page 241) IF (page 255) NOT (page 266).
PMT returns only the principal and interest payment. It does not include taxes or other fees. The units used for interest must match those used for nper. For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper. Cash paid out is shown as a negative number. Cash received is shown as a positive number.
PI
Returns the value of pi (), which is 3.14159265358979 when calculated to 15 signicant digits. Syntax: PI() IMPORTANT Although PI does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function. See also COS (page 247) SIN (page 276) TAN (page 279).
Examples s The following function returns 439.43: PMT(8%/12,48,18000)

PMT(8%/12,48,18000,0,1) See also IPMT (page 257) PV (page 271) NPER (page 267) PPMT (page 270) PV (page 271) RATE (page 271).
269
UM-0070-A0
PPMT
Returns the principal paid on an annuity for a given period. Syntax: PPMT(interest,per,nper,pv,[fv],[type])
where
PRODUCT
Multiplies a list of numbers and returns the result. Syntax: PRODUCT(number_list)
where
number_list is a list of as many as 30 numbers, interest is the xed periodic interest rate is the period for which to return the per nper pv fv
separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values. Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors. If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored. All numeric values, including 0, are used in the calculation.
principal is the number of periods in the annuity
type
is the present value, or the amount the annuity is currently worth is the future value, or the amount the annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
The units used for interest must match those used for nper. For example, if the annuity has an 8 percent annual interest rate over a period of 5 years, specify 8 percent/12 for interest and 5*12 for nper.
Example s The following function returns 24: PRODUCT(1,2,3,4)

See also FACT (page 252) SUM (page 278).
Examples s The following function returns 321.56: PPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000)
s The following function returns -319.43:

PPMT(8%/12,2,48,18000,0,1) See also FV (page 254) IPMT (page 257) NPER (page 267) PMT (page 269) PV (page 271) RATE (page 271).
PROPER
Returns the specied string in proper-case format. Syntax: PROPER(text)
where
text is any string

In proper-case format, the rst alphabetic character in a word is capitalized. If an alphabetic character follows a number, punctuation mark, or space, it is capitalized. All other alphabetic characters are lowercase. Numbers are not changed by PROPER.
Examples s The following function returns 3Rd Quarter:
=PROPER("3rd Quarter")
s The following function returns John Doe:

=PROPER("JOHN DOE") See also LOWER (page 262) UPPER (page 281).
UM-0070-A0
270
PART C: Appendixes
PV
Returns the present value of an annuity, considering a series of constant payments made over a regular payment period. Syntax: PV(interest,nper,pmt [,fv][,type])
where
Example s The following function returns a random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 10: RAND()*10
RATE
Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity, given a series of constant cash payments made over a regular payment period. Syntax: RATE(nper,pmt,pv[,fv][,type][,guess])
where
interest is the xed periodic interest rate is the number of payment periods in the nper pmt fv
investment is the xed payment made each period
type
is the future value, or the amount the annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed. indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed.
nper pmt
is the number of periods in the annuity is the xed payment made each period. Generally, pmt includes only principal and interest, not taxes or other fees. is the present value of the annuity
pv fv
Examples s The following function returns 17999.89: PV(8%/12,48,439.43)
is the future value, or the amount the annuity will be worth. When you omit this argument, a future value of 0 is assumed. type indicates when payments are due. Use 0 if payments are due at the end of the period or 1 if payments are due at the beginning of the period. When you omit this argument, 0 is assumed. guess is your estimate of the interest rate. If no argument is supplied, a value of 0.1 (10%) is assumed.

PV(8%/12,48,-439.43) See also FV (page 254) IPMT (page 257) NPER (page 267) PMT (page 269) PPMT (page 270) RATE (page 271).
RATE is calculated iteratively, cycling through the calculation until the result is accurate to .00001%. If the result cannot be found after 20 iterations, #NUM! is returned. When this occurs, supply a different value for guess.
Example The following function returns the monthly interest rate of 0.0067; the annual interest rate (0.0067 multiplied by 12) is 8%: RATE(48,439.43,18000)
See also FV (page 254) IPMT (page 257) NPER (page 267) PMT (page 269) PPMT (page 270) PV (page 271).
RAND
Returns a number selected randomly from a uniform distribution greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. Syntax: RAND() IMPORTANT Although RAND does not use arguments, you must supply the empty parentheses to correctly reference the function.
:
271
UM-0070-A0
REGISTER.ID
Returns the register ID of the specied DLL (Dynamic Link Library) that has been previously registered. If the DLL has not been registered, this function registers the DLL, and then returns the register ID. Syntax: REGISTER.ID(module_text,procedure,type_text)
where
void. For most C compilers, you can add the Void keyword to the function declaration.
Examples s The following formula registers the GetTickCount function and returns the register ID: REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")
Assuming that GetTickCount was already registered on another worksheet using the preceding formula, the following formula returns the register ID for GetTickCount: REGISTER.ID("Kernel32","GetTickCount")
module_text is the text specifying the name of procedure
type_text
the DLL that contains the function is the text specifying the name of the function in the DLL. The function name is case-dependent. is the text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL. The rst letter of type_text species the return value. If the function or code resource is already registered, you can omit this argument. For a complete list of the data types available, see the type_text parameter of CALL (page 244).
REPLACE
Replaces part of a text string with another text string; character-specied. Syntax: REPLACE (orig_text,start_position, num_chars,repl_text)
where is the original text string orig_text start_position is the character position where
For declarations made in C, it is assumed that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte short integers, and 4-byte long integers. In the Windows programming environment, all pointers should be far pointers. Pascal calling conventions are used for all functions called from DLLs. For most C compilers, you must add the Pascal keyword to the function declaration. If the return value for your custom function uses a passby-reference data type, a null pointer can be passed as the return value. The null pointer is interpreted as the #NUM! error value. For the F and G data types, a custom function can modify an allocated string buffer. If the return value type code is F or G, the value returned by the function is ignored. The list of function arguments is searched for the rst data type that corresponds to the return value type. The current contents of the allocated string buffer is taken for the return value. 256 bytes is allocated for the argument; therefore, a function can return a larger string than it receives. You can use a single digit (n), with a value from 1 to 9, as the code for type_text. The variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument is modied instead of the return value; this process is referred to as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference data type. In addition, you must declare the function
UM-0070-A0
num_chars
repl_text
the replacement begins. If start_position is greater than the number of characters in orig_text, repl_text is appended to the end of orig_text. If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. is the number of characters to replace. If this argument is negative, #VALUE! is returned. is the replacement text string
Examples s The following function returns "For the year: 1994": REPLACE("For the year: 1993",18,1,"4")
See also MID (page 264) SEARCH (page 275) TRIM (page 280) REPLACEB (page 273).
272
PART C: Appendixes
REPLACEB
Replaces part of a text string with another text string; byte-specied. Syntax: REPLACEB(orig_text,start_position, num_chars,repl_text)
where is the original text string orig_text start_position is the byte position where the
RIGHT
Returns the right-most characters from a given text string. Syntax: RIGHT(text[,num_chars])
where is any text string text num_chars is the number of characters to return. (optional)
num_chars
repl_text
replacement begins. If start_position is greater than the number of bytes in orig_text, repl_text is appended to the end of orig_text. If start_position is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. is the number of bytes to replace. If this argument is negative, #VALUE! is returned. is the replacement text string
The value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of characters in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.
Examples s The following function returns r: RIGHT("2nd Quarter")
s The following function returns Quarter:

RIGHT("2nd Quarter",7) See also LEFT (page 260) MID (page 264).
Examples s The following function returns "For the year: 1994": REPLACEB("For the year: 1993",18,1,"4")
See also REPLACE (page 272).
RIGHTB
Returns the right-most bytes from a given text string. Syntax: RIGHTB(text[,num_chars])
where is any text string text num_chars is the number of bytes to return. The (optional)
REPT
Repeats a text string a specied number of times. Syntax: REPT(text,number)
where
text number
is any text string is the number of times you want text to repeat. If number is 0, empty text (" ") is returned.
value must be greater than or equal to zero. If num_chars is greater than the number of bytes in text, the entire string is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a value of 1.
The result of REPT cannot exceed 255 characters.
Example s The following function returns error-error-error-
Examples s The following function returns r: RIGHTB("2nd Quarter")
error-error-:
REPT("error-",5)
s The following function returns Quarter:

RIGHTB("2nd Quarter",7)
273
UM-0070-A0
ROUND
Rounds a number to a specied number of decimal places. Syntax: ROUND(number,precision)
where is any value number precision is the number of decimal places to which number is rounded. When a negative precision is
Example s The following function returns 3.141: ROUNDDOWN(3.14159,3)

ROUNDDOWN(31415.92654,-2) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) MOD (page 265) ROUND (page 274) ROUNDUP (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of signicant digits specied by precision are replaced with zeros. If precision is 0, number is rounded to the nearest integer.
Example s The following function returns 123.46: ROUND(123.456,2)
ROUNDUP
Rounds a number up to a specied number of decimal places. Syntax: ROUNDUP(number,precision)
where is any real number you want to round up (away from zero) precision is the number of decimal places to which number is rounded. When a negative precision is used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of signicant digits specied by precision are replaced with zeros. If precision is 0, number is rounded up to the nearest integer.

ROUND(9899.435,2) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) MOD (page 265) ROUNDDOWN (page 274) ROUNDUP (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
number
ROUNDDOWN
Rounds a number down to a specied number of decimal places. Syntax: ROUNDDOWN(number,precision)
where is any real number you want to round down (towards zero) precision is the number of decimal places to which number is rounded. When a negative precision is used, the digits to the right of the decimal point are dropped and the absolute number of signicant digits specied by precision are replaced with zeros. If precision is 0, number is rounded down to the nearest integer.
Example s The following function returns 77: ROUNDUP(76.9,0)

ROUNDUP(31415.92654,-2) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) MOD (page 265) ROUND (page 274) ROUNDDOWN (page 274) TRUNC (page 281).
number
UM-0070-A0
274
PART C: Appendixes
ROW
Returns the row number of a supplied cell reference. Syntax: ROW(reference)
where
SEARCH
Locates the position of the rst character of a specied text string within another text string. Syntax: SEARCH(search_text,text[,start_position])
where
reference is a cell or range reference

Omitting reference returns the row number of the cell in which ROW is entered.
search_text
Examples s The following function returns 3: ROW(B3)

ROWS
Returns the number of rows in a range reference. Syntax: ROWS(range)
where
text start_position is the character position where

(optional)
is the text to nd. To search for an asterisk or question mark, include a tilde (~) before the character. The search string can contain wildcard characters. The available wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character. is the text to be searched the search begins. If the number you specify is less than 0 or greater than the number of characters in text, #VALUE! is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a starting position of 1.
range
is a reference to a range of cells
Examples s The following function returns 5: ROWS(A1:D5)
Text is searched from left to right, starting at the position specied. The search is not case-sensitive. If text does not contain the search string, #VALUE! is returned.

ROWS(C30:F35) See also COLUMN (page 246) ROW (page 275).
Examples s The following function returns 6: SEARCH("?5","Bin b45")

SEARCH("b","Bin b45",4) See also FIND (page 253) MID (page 264) REPLACE (page 272) SUBSTITUTE (page 278).
275
UM-0070-A0
SEARCHB
Locates the position of the rst byte of a specied text string within another text string. Syntax: SEARCHB(search_text,text [,start_position])
where

SECOND(34657.904) See also DAY (page 249) HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) WEEKDAY (page 284).
search_text
text start_position is the byte position where the

search begins. If the number you specify is less than 0 or greater than the number of bytes in text, #VALUE! is returned. Omitting this argument assumes a starting position of 1.
is the text to nd. To search for an asterisk or question mark, include a tilde (~) before the character. The search string can contain wildcards. The available wildcard characters are * (asterisk), which matches any sequence of characters, and ? (question mark), which matches any single character. is the text to be searched
SIGN
Determines the sign of a specied number. Syntax: SIGN(number)
where
number
is any number
SIGN returns 1 if the specied number is positive; -1 if it is negative; 0 if it is 0.
Text is searched from left to right, starting at the position specied. The search is not case-sensitive. If text does not contain the search string, #VALUE! is returned.
Examples s The following function returns -1: SIGN(123)

SIGN(123) See also ABS (page 240).
Examples s The following function returns 6: SEARCHB("?5","Bin b45")

SEARCHB("b","Bin b45",4)
SIN
Returns the sine of a supplied angle. Syntax: SIN(number)
where
SECOND
Returns the second that corresponds to the supplied date. Syntax: SECOND(serial_number)
where
number
is the angle in radians. If the angle is in degrees, convert the angle to radians by multiplying the angle by PI()/180.
serial_number is the time as a serial number
(see NOW). The decimal portion of the number represents time as a fraction of the day.
Examples s The following function returns 0.85: SIN(45)

SIN(90) See also ASIN (page 241) PI (page 269).
Examples s The following function returns 58: SECOND(0.259)

UM-0070-A0
276
PART C: Appendixes
SINH
Returns the hyperbolic sine of a specied number. Syntax: SINH(number)
where
Examples s The following function returns 3: SQRT(9)

SQRT(2.5)
is any number
number
See also SUMSQ (page 279).
Examples s The following function returns 1.18: SINH(1)
STDEV
Returns the standard deviation of a population based on a sample of supplied values. The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values. Syntax: STDEV(number_list)
where

SINH(3) See also ASINH (page 242) PI (page 269).
SLN
Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specic period of time using the straight-line-balance method. Syntax: SLN(cost,salvage,life)
where

separated by commas. The list can contain numbers or a reference to a range that contains numbers.
Example s The following function returns 0.56: STDEV(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

See also STDEVP (page 277) VAR (page 282) VARP (page 282).
cost salvage life
is the initial cost of the asset is the salvage value of the asset is the number of periods of the useful life of the asset
Example s The following function returns 1285.71: SLN(10000,1000,7)

See also DDB (page 250) SYD (page 279) VDB (page 283).
STDEVP
Returns the standard deviation of a population based on an entire population of values. The standard deviation of a population represents an average of deviations from the population mean within a list of values. Syntax: STDEVP(number_list)
where
SQRT
Returns the square root of a specied number. Syntax: SQRT(number)
where

number
is any positive number. If you specify a negative number, the error #NUM! is returned.
Example s The following function returns 0.52: STDEVP(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)
277
UM-0070-A0
See also STDEV (page 277) VAR (page 282) VARP (page 282).
SUM
Returns the sum of the specied numbers. Syntax: SUM(number_list)
where
SUBSTITUTE
Replaces a specied part of a text string with another text string. Syntax: SUBSTITUTE(text,old_text,new_text[,instance])
where

separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values. Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors. If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.
text
old_text new_text is the replacement text instance species the occurrence of old_text
to replace. If this argument is omitted, every instance of old_text is replaced.
is a text string that contains the text to replace. You can also specify a reference to a cell that contains text. is the text string to be replaced
Examples s The following function returns 6000: SUM(1000,2000,3000)
Examples s The following function returns "Second Quarter Results": SUBSTITUTE("First Quarter Results", "First","Second")
s The following function returns 4000 when each cell in the range contains 1000: SUM(A10:D10)
See also AVERAGE (page 243) COUNT (page 247) COUNTA (page 247) PRODUCT (page 270) SUMSQ (page 279).
s The following function returns "Shipment 45, Bin 52":

SUBSTITUTE("Shipment 45,Bin 45","45","52",2) See also REPLACE (page 272) TRIM (page 280).
SUMIF
Returns the sum of the specied cells based on the given criteria. Syntax: SUMIF(range,criteria[,sum_range])
where is the range of cells you want evaluated criteria is a number, expression, or text that denes which cells are added. For example, criteria can be expressed as 15, "15", ">15" or "cars". sum_range is the actual cells to sum. These cells are only summed if their (optional) corresponding cells in range match the criteria. If this argument is omitted, the cells in range are summed.
range
UM-0070-A0
278
PART C: Appendixes
See also AVERAGE (page 243) COUNT (page 247) COUNTA (page 247) COUNTIF (page 248) PRODUCT (page 270) SUM (page 278).
Example s The following function returns 1607.14: SYD(10000,1000,7,3)

See also DDB (page 250) SLN (page 277) VDB (page 283).
SUMSQ
Squares each of the supplied numbers and returns the sum of the squares. Syntax: SUMSQ(number_list)
where
TAN
Returns the tangent of the specied angle. Syntax: TAN(number)
where
number_list
is a list of as many as 30 numbers, separated by commas. The list can contain numbers, logical values, text representations of numbers, or a reference to a range containing those values. Error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers return errors. If a range reference is included in the list, text, logical expressions, and empty cells in the range are ignored.
number is the angle in radians. To convert a
number expressed as degrees to radians, multiply the degrees by PI()/180.
Example s The following function returns 0.752: TAN(0.645)

TAN(45*PI()/180) See also ATANH (page 242) ATAN2 (page 242) PI (page 269) TANH (page 279).
Example s The following function returns 302: SUMSQ(9,10,11)

See also SUM (page 278).
TANH
Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number. Syntax: TANH(number)
where
SYD
Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specied period using the sum-of-years method. This depreciation method uses an accelerated rate, where the greatest depreciation occurs early in the useful life of the asset. Syntax: SYD(cost,salvage,life,period)
where is the initial cost of the asset cost salvage is the salvage value of the asset is the number of periods in the useful life life
number
is any number
Examples s The following function returns -0.96: TANH(-2)

TANH(1.2) See also ATANH (page 242) COSH (page 247) SINH (page 277) TAN (page 279).
279
UM-0070-A0
period
of the asset is the period for which to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine per and life must match.
TEXT
Returns a number as text, using the specied formatting. Syntax: TEXT(number,format)
where
TIMEVALUE
Returns a serial number (see NOW) for the supplied text representation of time. Syntax: TIMEVALUE(text)
where
number
format
is a ny value, a formula that evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a value is a string representing a number format. The string can be any valid format string including "General", "M/DD/YY", or "H:MM AM/PM". The format must be surrounded by a set of double quotation marks. Asterisks cannot be included in format.
text is a time in text format

Examples s The following function returns 0.07: TIMEVALUE("1:43:43 am")

TIMEVALUE("14:10:07") See also HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TIME (page 280).
Examples s The following function returns 123.620: TEXT(123.62,"0.000")
s The following function returns 10/19/94:

TEXT(34626.2,"MM/DD/YY") See also DOLLAR (page 251) FIXED (page 253) VALUE (page 282).
TODAY
Returns the current date as a serial number (see NOW). Syntax: TODAY() This function is updated only when the worksheet is recalculated. See also DATE (page 248) DAY (page 249) NOW (page 266).
TIME
Returns a serial number (see NOW) for the supplied time. Syntax: TIME(hour,minute,second)
where is a number from 0 to 23 hour minute is a number from 0 to 59 second is a number from 0 to 59
Examples s The following function returns 0.52: TIME(12,26,24)
TRIM
Removes all spaces from text except single spaces between words. Syntax: TRIM(text)
where

TIME(1,43,34) See also HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TIMEVALUE (page 280).
text is any text string or a reference to a cell that

contains a text string
Text that is imported from another environment may require this function.
UM-0070-A0
280
PART C: Appendixes
Example s The following function returns Level 3, Gate 45: TRIM(" Level 3, Gate 45 ")
See also CLEAN (page 246) MID (page 264) REPLACE (page 272) SUBSTITUTE (page 278).
TYPE
Returns the argument type of a given expression. Syntax: TYPE(expression)
where

The valid values returned by this argument are:
1 2 4 16 Number Text string Logical value Error value
TRUE
Returns the logical value True. This function always requires the trailing parentheses. Syntax: TRUE() You can also type True directly into a worksheet cell or formula. See also FALSE (page 252).
Examples s The following function returns 1 if cell A1 contains a number: TYPE(A1)

TYPE("Customer") See also ISBLANK (page 258) ISERR (page 258) ISERROR (page 258) ISLOGICAL (page 258) ISNA (page 259) ISNONTEXT (page 259) ISNUMBER (page 259) ISREF (page 260) ISTEXT (page 260).
TRUNC
Truncates a given number to an integer. Syntax: TRUNC(number[,precision])
where is any value number precision is the number of decimal places (optional)
allowed in the truncated number. Omitting this argument assumes a precision of 0.
TRUNC removes the fractional part of a number to the specied precision without rounding the number.
UPPER
Changes the characters in a specied string to uppercase characters. Syntax: UPPER(text)
where
Example s The following function returns 123.45: TRUNC(123.456,2)

TRUNC(9899.435,2) See also CEILING (page 245) FLOOR (page 254) INT (page 256) MOD (page 265) ROUND (page 274).
text is any string

Numeric characters in the string are not changed.
281
UM-0070-A0
Examples s The following function returns 3RD QUARTER: UPPER("3rd Quarter")
VAR
Returns the variance of a population based on a sample. Syntax: VAR(number_list)
where
s The following function returns JOHN DOE:

UPPER("JOHN DOE") See also LOWER (page 262) PROPER (page 270).
USDOLLAR
Returns a specied number as text using the USDollar format and a supplied precision. Omitting the precision argument assumes two decimal places. Syntax: USDOLLAR(number[,precision])
where is a number, a formula that evaluates to a number, or a reference to a cell that contains a number precision is a value representing the number of decimal places to the right of the (optional) decimal point. Omitting this argument assumes two decimal places.
Example s The following function returns 0.31: VAR(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

See also STDEV (page 277) STDEVP (page 277) VARP (page 282).
number
VARP
Returns the variance of a population based on an entire population of values. Syntax: VARP(number_list)
where
See also DOLLAR (page 251).
VALUE
Returns specied text as a number. Syntax: VALUE(text)
where
Example s The following function returns 0.27: VARP(4.0,3.0,3.0,3.5,2.5,4.0,3.5)

See also STDEV (page 277) STDEVP (page 277) VAR (page 282).
text is any text string, a formula that evaluates to a

text string, or a cell reference that contains a text string. You can also specify a date or time in a recognizable format (for example, M/DD/YY for dates or H:MM AM/PM for time). If the format is not recognized, #VALUE! is returned.
Examples s The following function returns 9800: VALUE(9800)

VALUE("123") See also DOLLAR (page 251) FIXED (page 253) TEXT (page 280).
282 Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro PART C: Appendixes
UM-0070-A0
VDB
Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specied period using a variable method of depreciation. Syntax: VDB(cost,salvage,life,start_period, end_period[,factor][,method])
where
VLOOKUP
Searches the rst column of a table for a value and returns the contents of a cell in that table that corresponds to the location of the search value. Syntax: VLOOKUP(search_item, search_range, column_index)
where is a value, text string, or reference to a cell containing a value that is matched against data in the top row of search_range search_range is the reference of the range (table) to be searched. The cells in the rst column of search_range can contain numbers, text, or logical values. The contents of the rst column must be in ascending order (for example, -2, -1, 0, 2..., A through Z, False, True). Text searches are not case-sensitive. column_index is the column in the search range from which the matching value is returned. column_index can be a number from 1 to the number of rows in the search range. If column_index is less than 1, #VALUE! is returned. When column_index is greater than the number of rows in the table, #REF! is returned.
cost salvage life
is the initial cost of the asset is the salvage value of the asset
search_item
is the number of periods in the useful life of the asset start_period is the beginning period for which to calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine start_period and life must match. is the ending period for which to end_period calculate the depreciation. The time units used to determine end_period and life must match. is the rate at which the balance factor declines. Omitting this argument (optional) assumes a default of 2, which is the double-declining balance factor. is a logical value that determines if method you want to switch to straight-line (optional) depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation. Use True to maintain declining balance calculation; use False or omit the argument to switch to straight-line depreciation calculation.
VLOOKUP compares the information in the rst column of search_range to the supplied search_item. When a match is found, information located in the same row and supplied column (column_index) is returned. If search_item cannot be found in the rst column of search_range, the largest value that is less than search_item is used. When search_item is less than the smallest value in the rst column of the search_range, #REF! is returned.
Example s The following function returns 1041.23: VDB(10000,1000,7,3,4)

See also DDB (page 250) SLN (page 277) SYD (page 279).
Examples
FIGURE 305
VLOOKUP example
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 305, the following function returns $28,700:
VLOOKUP("Clark",A2:E9,4)
: 283
UM-0070-A0
s For the worksheet shown in Figure 305, the following function returns 3961: VLOOKUP("Lee",A2:E9,3)
See also HLOOKUP (page 254) INDEX (page 256) LOOKUP (page 262) MATCH (page 263).
YEAR
Returns the year that corresponds to the supplied date. Syntax: YEAR(serial_number)
where
serial_number The date as a serial number (see

NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)
WEEKDAY
Returns the day of the week that corresponds to a supplied date. Syntax: WEEKDAY(serial_number)
where
Examples s The following function returns 1993: YEAR(34328)

YEAR("06/21/94") See also DAY (page 249) HOUR (page 255) MINUTE (page 265) MONTH (page 266) NOW (page 266) SECOND (page 276) TODAY (page 280) WEEKDAY (page 284).
serial_number is the date as a serial number (see

NOW) or as text (for example, 06-21-94 or 21-Jun-94)
WEEKDAY returns a number ranging from 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday).
Examples s The following function returns 1, indicating Sunday: WEEKDAY(34399.92)
s The following function returns 3, indicating Tuesday:

WEEKDAY("06/21/94") See also DAY (page 249) NOW (page 266) TEXT (page 280) TODAY (page 280).
UM-0070-A0
284
PART C: Appendixes
Index
" " (null field) 187, 188 .csv file (comma-separated-variable file) Save Screen Buffer As 93 unload to le 65 .dcp file (DeCipher Plus data file) 104, 115 .dlr file (DeLogger replay file) Analysis > Load Session From File 116 Play command 40 Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115 unload to replay le 65 .dlw file (project master file) 22, 208, 209 and AutoRun 179 .dx8 (dataTaker unload files) 40 .dxd file (DT800 logged alarms file) 104, 115 .dxd file (DT800 logged data file) 104, 115 .dxu (dataTaker unload files) 40 .rpt file (reports file) 200 / character (in DDE ChannelName item) 223 @CurrentSessionID 57, 202 @PreviousSessionID 57, 202
Symbols
A
About DeLogger (Help command) 135 ABS (worksheet function) 240 ACOS (worksheet function) 240 ACOSH (worksheet function) 240 Action (Reports > Log Files command) 128 actions 55 action log le report 128, 199 AutoRun (startup action) 179 chaining 56, 199, 202 creating and editing 55 end_of_unload 64 macro commands 184 placeholders 56 saving 208, 209 toolbar 171, 172 triggers 55 using actions to run reports 199, 200 using actions to web-publish reports 232 using DDE to request action lists 222, 224 using DDE to run actions within DeLogger Pro 222, 224 using mimic buttons to trigger actions 101 Actions (Configuration command) 55 ADDRESS (worksheet function) 241 administration database See databases advise (DDE) list 59, 224 loop 222 alarms external 56, 182 internal 56, 183 logging setting default 52, 53 triggering 55, 182 Alignment (Analysis > Format command) 119 Alignment (Form > Format command) 79 Alignment (Spread > Format command) 109 Allow Compressed Mode (Chart command) 89 analysis menu See menus Analysis analysis window See windows Analysis AND (worksheet function) 241 Annunciator (Mimic command) 99 appearance, customizing 29 Arc Meters (Mimic command) 98 archive databases 205, 226 Arrange Channels (DT5/6xx Program command) 125 Arrange Icons (Window command) 134 array for store-type virtual channels 215 maximum size 216
Sym Num A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Numerics
2000 (Windows operating system) 235
Index
285
UM-0070-A0
resetting store channel 216 rolling store channel 216 size 217 art (Picture folder for clip art) 18, 101 Sym ASC (worksheet function) 241 Num ASIN (worksheet function) 241 ASINH (worksheet function) 242 A ATAN (worksheet function) 242 B ATAN2 (worksheet function) 242 C ATANH (worksheet function) 242 Attach Action (Form > Object command) D Auto Re-Scale (Chart command) 89 E automatic saves 208 F AutoRun startup action 179 G auxiliary lines H curve 87 I AVERAGE (worksheet function) 243
82
J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
B
Back One (Mimic > Arrange command) 102 Background Colour (Analysis command) 118 Background Colour (Form command) 78 Background Colour (Spread command) 107 background, customizing 29 bitmap file background image 29 splash screen image 30 Border (Analysis > Format command) 119 Border (Form > Format command) 80 Border (Spread > Format command) 109 Bring To Front (Mimic > Arrange command) 102 buffer and Unload command 66 buffer (text window screen buffer) 93, 96 busy indicator 170 button, follow mode 86, 139 Buttons (Mimic command) 101
C
calculated-type virtual channels 218 Calculation (Analysis command) 121 Calculation (Form command) 82 Calculation (Spread command) 111 CALL (worksheet function) 244 Capture Data To Disk (Text > Display Screen command) 92 capture screen 239 Cascade (Window command) 134 CEILING (worksheet function) 245 chaining actions 56 ChannelID (in ChannelName DDE item) 223 ChannelName (DDE item) 223
channels primary 212 virtual See virtual channels CHAR (worksheet function) 245 chart menu See menus chart Chart Properties (Chart command) 86 Chart Type (Spread command) 107 chart window See windows chart CHOOSE (worksheet function) 245 CLEAN (worksheet function) 246 Clear (Chart command) 89 Clear (dataTaker menu command) 67 Clear (Edit command) 35 Clear Entry Buffer (Text > Entry Screen command) 96 Clear Screen Buffer (Text > Display Screen command) 93 CLEAR_CHART macro 189 client (DDE) See DDE clip art 18, 101 Close (File command) 23 CLOSE_WINDOW macro 189 CODE (worksheet function) 246 COLUMN (worksheet function) 246 Column Template (Form command) 78 COLUMNS (worksheet function) 246 Command Edit Mode (Text > Entry Screen command) 94 command-line utilities (dlr2dlr.exe and dlr2txt.exe) 207 commands Analysis Background Colour 118 Calculation 121 Dene Name 122 Export Sheet 117 Format Alignment 119 Border 119 Custom Number 120 Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 120 Default Font 120 Fixed 120 Fixed (1) to (5) 120 Font 119 General 119 Pattern 119 Percent % 120 Scientific 120 Time (hh:mm:ss) 120 Import Sheet 117 Insert Page Break 122 Load Into External Spreadsheet 117 Load Session From Database 116 Load Session From File 116 Properties 123 Publish 123 Remove Page Break 123 Set Print Range From Selection 122 Show Gridlines 118 Show Headers 118
UM-0070-A0
286
Sort 121 Update Chart 117 View Toolbar 118 Chart Allow Compressed Mode 89 Auto Re-Scale 89 Chart Properties 86 Clear 89 Edit Axis 89 Edit Mode 85 Pause 85 Properties 90 Publish 90 Rotate 89 Scale Text Down 90 Scale Text Up 90 Select Channels 88 View Toolbar 90 XY Chart 89 Conguration Actions 55 Data Hub Channels 59 Database Channel Logging Sessions 60 Defaults 52 Reports 57 Web Publish 58 Connections Connect 38 Disconnect 39 Manual Integrity Check 39 Play 40 Properties 42 Database Reports 57, 127, 129, 201, 202 dataTaker Clear 67 Data Logging 63 Job To Run On Hard Reset 68 Memory Card 71 Prole 73 Quit Unload 66 Reset 68 Run 69 Run Card Program 72 Status 70 Test 71 Unload 64 Upgrade Firmware 76 Edit Clear 35 Copy 34 Copy Down 35 Copy Right 35 Cut 34 Delete 35 Find 35 Go To Matching Brace 36 Insert 35 Paste 34 Paste Values 34 Redo 34 Replace 35
Select All 36 Undo 34 File Close 23 Customize 29 Exit 33 Open 22 Page Setup 25 Performance 24 Print 26 Print Preview 27 Print Setup 28 Project Properties 23 recent project les (list) 33 Register Product 33 Save Project 23 Form Background Colour 78 Calculation 82 Column Template 78 Dene Name 83 Edit Mode 77 Format Alignment 79 Border 80 Custom Number 81 Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 81 Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss.000) Default Font 81 Fixed 80 Fixed (1) to (5) 80 Font 79 General 80 Locale Date/Time 81 Pattern 80 Percent % 80 Scientific 80 Time (hh:mm:ss) 81 Insert Page Break 83 Object Attach Action 82 Insert Button 81 Insert Checkbox 81 Options 82 Pause 77 Properties 84 Publish 84 Remove Page Break 84 Reset High 78 Reset Low 78 Set Print Range From Selection 83 Show Gridlines 78 Show Headers 78 Validation Rule 82 View Toolbar 79 Help About DeLogger 135 Mimic Annunciator 99 Arc Meters 98 Arrange Back One 102
Sym Num A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
81
O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Index
287
UM-0070-A0
Bring To Front 102 Forward One 102 Send To Back 102 Buttons 101 Delete 103 Digital 100 Edit Mode 102 Edit Panel 102 LED Indicators 100 Lock 103 Needle Meters 98 Pause 101 Picture 101 Pie Meters 98 Properties 103 Publish 103 Scale Text Down 103 Scale Text Up 103 Temperature Meter 99 View Toolbar 103 Program Arrange Channels 125 Edit Mode 125 Next Analogue Channel 125 Next Digital Channel 125 Next HSC Channel 125 Properties 125 Send To Card On Connection 124 Send To Connection 124 Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job View Toolbar 125 Reports Alarms Full 127 Month To Date 127 Today 127 Week To Date 127 Database Reports 129 Errors Full 128 Month To Date 128 Today 128 Week To Date 128 Log Files Action 128 Schedule 128 Spread Background Colour 107 Calculation 111 Chart Type 107 Dene Name 112 Export Sheet 106 Format Alignment 109 Border 109 Custom Number 110 Date (yyyy/mm/dd) 110 Default Font 111 Fixed 110 Fixed (1) to (5) 110 Font 109 General 110
Pattern 110 Percent % 110 Scientific 110 Time (hh:mm:ss) 110 Import Sheet 106 Insert Page Break 113 Load Into External Spreadsheet 106 Load Session From Database 105 Load Session From File 105 Properties 114 Publish 113 Remove Page Break 113 Set Print Range From Selection 113 Show Gridlines 108 Show Headers 108 Sort 112 Update Chart 107 View Toolbar 108 Text Display Screen Capture Data To Disk 92 Clear Screen Buffer 93 Display Data As 92 Filter Data 91 Font 92 Insert Text 93 Pause 93 Properties 94 Save Screen Buffer As 93 View Toolbar 93 Entry Screen Clear Entry Buffer 96 Command Edit Mode 94 Go To Matching Brace 96 Load DLP Text 95 Open Text File 95 Save Text File 95 Send Highlighted 95 Send Line 95 Send Program 95 Set User Buttons 96 User Buttons 96 View Toolbar 96 Splitter View 96 Tools Internal Cards 130 Memory Cards 130 View Project Bar 37 Show Alarm Events 37 Show Error Events 37 Show Message Events 37 Status Bar 37 Toolbars Configuration 37 Connection 37 dataTaker 37 System 37 View Events 37 Window Arrange Icons 134 Cascade 134 More Windows 134
126
UM-0070-A0
288
Tile Horizontal 134 Tile Vertical 134 comma-separated-variable file Save Screen Buffer As 93 unload to le 65 CONCATENATE (worksheet function) 246 Configuration (View > Toolbars command) 37 Configuration menu See menus configuring data hub connection defaults 54 confirmation level (message display) 37, 167 Connect (Connections command) 38 CONNECT_PORT macro 184 CONNECT_SITE macro 184 Connection (View > Toolbars command) 37 connections database connection 42, 50 external (in Extras Data Site) 38 Force the Connect (Extras) 38 internal (in Extras Data Site) 38 macros for managing connections 184 menu See menus model-specic 40 network connection Lantronix adaptor 45 TCP/IP 45 UDP 45 play connection See connections replay connection replay connection 40 control panel replay 41 conversation (DDE) See DDE Copy (Edit command) 34 Copy Down (Edit command) 35 Copy Right (Edit command) 35 COS (worksheet function) 247 COSH (worksheet function) 247 COUNT (worksheet function) 247 COUNTA (worksheet function) 247 COUNTIF (worksheet function) 248 Crystal Reports formula 57, 202 software 199, 201 Crystal Reports Engine 199 preferred version 202 current database logging session 57, 202 Custom Number (Analysis > Format command) 120 Custom Number (Form > Format command) 81 Custom Number (Spread > Format command) 110 Customize (File command) 29 customizing DeLoggers appearance 29 background 29 splash screen 30 system tray icon 31 toolbars 31
window tabs 30 workspace state 32 Cut (Edit command) 34
D
data historical 40 dened 40 replaying 41 input activity indicator 170 invalid 52, 53 primary 212 replay 41 displayed by mimics 97 reporting on 199 replay(Extras) 40 site (Extras) 38 valid 52, 53 virtual 212, 215 data hub 210 activity indicator 170 alarm indication annunciator mimic 99 digital mimic 100 and connection types (Fig.) 42 and manual integrity check 39 channel details saved in .dlw le 22, 208 conguration saved in admin database 209, 210 conguring 59 setting channel properties 213 conguring connection defaults 54 DDE advise loop 222 Extras 62 Data Hub Channels (Configuration command) 59 Data Logging (dataTaker menu command) 63 data point symbols (chart window) 87 Data Site (Extras) 38 database sessions logging 60 unload 64 Database Channel Logging Sessions (Configuration command) 60 Database Reports (Reports command) 57, 127, 129, 202 Database Reports command 201 databases 226 administration database and secondary reports 200 manual saves 208 storing conguration settings reports 57 storing connections 42 storing database channel logging sessions 60 storing secondary reports 200 alternative 23, 227 archive databases 205, 226 connection 42, 50 data database
Index
289
UM-0070-A0
DDE requests 222 importing into spreadsheet window 104, 115 reports 127, 199 alarms 127 database 129, 200 Sym Schedule and action log files 128 Num secondary reports 200 A database connection 42, 50 dialog box controls (Fig.) 42 B ve data databases 205, 226 C FoxPro 203, 226 historical databases 205, 226 D Load Session From Database E into analysis window 116 F into spreadsheed window 105 reports G See reports Database Reports command H sessions I current (@CurrentSessionID) 57, 202 previous (@PreviousSessionID) 57, 202 J dataTaker K menu L See menus unload les (.dx8 and .dxu) 40 M dataTaker (View > Toolbars command) 37 N DATATAKER_HALT macro 185 O DATATAKER_LOG macro 185 P DATATAKER_RUN macro 185 DATE (worksheet function) 248 Q Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Analysis > Format command) 120 R Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Form > Format command) 81 S Date (yyyy/mm/dd) (Spread > Format command) 110 Date/Time (yyyy/mm/dd hh:m:ss.000) (Form > Format T command) 81 U DATEVALUE (worksheet function) 248 V DAY (worksheet function) 249 DAYS360 (worksheet function) 249 W DB (worksheet function) 250 X DBCS (worksheet function) 250 Y DDB (worksheet function) 250 Z DDE 222 advise list 59, 224 loop 222 and Schedule utility (running actions) 197 ChannelName item 223 client 222 conversation 222 item 223 ChannelName 223 ChannelID 223 ScheduleID 223 SiteName 223 multiple channels in Excel 225 server 222 service name 223 service name (DELOGGER) 223 spaces in messages 223 topic 223 Default Font (Analysis > Format command) 120
UM-0070-A0
Default Font (Form > Format command) 81 Default Font (Spread > Format command) 111 Defaults (Configuration command) 52 Define Name (Analysis command) 122 Define Name (Form command) 83 Define Name (Spread command) 112 DELAY macro 195 Delete (Edit command) 35 Delete (Mimic command) 103 DeLogger installing See the Getting Started guide supplied with your dataTaker introduction 4 DELOGGER (DDE service name) 223 DeLogger Pro installing See the Getting Started guide supplied with your dataTaker DeLogger replay file Analysis > Load Session From File 116 Play command 40 Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115 unload to replay le 65 Digital (Mimic command) 100 Disconnect (Connections command) 39 DISCONNECT macro 185 Display Data As (Text > Display Screen command) 92 display screen (text window) 91 dlr2dlr.exe replay file utility 207 dlr2txt.exe replay file utility 207 dlw file (project master file) 22 document windows See windows DOLLAR (worksheet function) 251 DOS prompt 207 Dynamic Data Exchange See DDE
E
Edit Axis (Chart command) 89 Edit menu See menus Edit Edit Mode (Chart command) 85 Edit Mode (DT5/6xx Program command) Edit Mode (Form command) 77 Edit Mode (Mimic command) 102 Edit Panel (Mimic command) 102 end_of_unload (action) 64 entry screen (text window) 94 ERROR.TYPE (worksheet function) 251 errors logging setting default 52, 53 reports 199 EVEN (worksheet function) 252 event logs window See windows
125
290
EXACT (worksheet function) 252 exceedency (test for virtual channel PARTIALLY_INVALID or INVALID status) 217 Excel (software) and Delogger2 macro les 224 and VBA macros 224 as analysis window data destination 117 as DDE client 222, 224 as report tool 199 as spreadsheet window data destination 106 as spreadsheet window data source 104, 115 formula bar (inserting DDE link text) 225 inserting DDE link text 225 similarity to Formula One Workbook Designer 138 Excel Delogger2 macro files 224 Exit (File command) 33 EXP (worksheet function) 252 export folder 18, 106, 117 Export Sheet (Analysis command) 117 Export Sheet (Spread command) 106 external alarms 56, 182 external connections (in Extras Data Site) 38 Extras Data Hub 62 Data Site 38 Force the Connect 38 Historical Data, Replay Data 40
F
F2 key (connect shortcut) 38 F5 key (data hub channels shortcut) 59 FACT (worksheet function) 252 FALSE (worksheet function) 252 file menu See menus project master le (.dlw le) 22, 208, 209 and administration database 226 and AutoRun 179 replay See replay le Filter Data (Text > Display Screen command) 91 Find (Edit command) 35 FIND (worksheet function) 253 FINDB (worksheet function) 253 firmware folder 18, 76 Fixed (1) to (5) (Analysis > Format command) 120 Fixed (1) to (5) (Form > Format command) 80 Fixed (1) to (5) (Spread > Format command) 110 Fixed (Analysis > Format command) 120 Fixed (Form > Format command) 80 Fixed (Spread > Format command) 110 FIXED (worksheet function) 253 flag channel logging mode defaults 53 Flags column in data hub dialog box 59
FLOOR (worksheet function) 254 folder 18 Export 18, 106, 117 Firmware 18, 76 Grab 18, 239 installation 18, 22 MT (multi-thread) 76 Picture (clip art) 18, 101 Project 18, 22 structure for web publishing (Fig.) 230 follow mode button 86, 139 Font (Analysis > Format command) 119 Font (Form > Format command) 79 Font (Spread > Format command) 109 Font (Text > Display Screen command) 92 Force the Connect (Extras) 38 form menu See menus Form form window See windows form format ISO 81, 106, 110, 117, 120 replay (text window display screen) 92 formula Crystal Reports 57, 202 Excel formula bar (inserting DDE link text) 225 Formula One Workbook Designer (software) 138 Formula One Workbook Designer window See windows Formula One Workbook Designer Forward One (Mimic > Arrange command) 102 FoxPro 203, 226 Full (Reports > Alarms command) 127 Full (Reports > Errors command) 128 functions for store channels 217 See worksheet functions FV (worksheet function) 254
G
General (Analysis > Format command) 119 General (Form > Format command) 80 General (Spread > Format command) 110 GET_TEXT macro 194 GET_VALUE macro 194 Getting Started (user guides) 4 global formulas 202 @CurrentSessionID 57, 202 @PreviousSessionID 57, 202 in report Parameter elds 57 Go To Matching Brace (Edit command) 36 Go To Matching Brace (Text > Entry Screen command) Grab folder 18, 239
96
Index
291
UM-0070-A0
H
Help menu See menus Sym historical data 40 replaying 41 Num Historical Data, Replay Data (Extras) 40 A historical database 205, 226 B HLOOKUP (worksheet function) 254 C HOUR (worksheet function) 255 hub D See data hub E HUB_SAVE macro 191
F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
I
icon, system tray 31 IF (worksheet function) 255 image background 29 splash screen 30 Import Sheet (Analysis command) 117 Import Sheet (Spread command) 106 INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIX macro 193 INDEX (worksheet function) 256 indicator data hub activity 170 data input activity 170 DeLogger busy 170 INDIRECT (worksheet function) 256 input activity indicator 170 Insert (Edit command) 35 Insert Button (Form > Object command) 81 Insert Checkbox (Form > Object command) 81 Insert Page Break (Analysis command) 122 Insert Page Break (Form command) 83 Insert Page Break (Spread command) 113 Insert Text (Text > Display Screen command) 93 installation folder 18, 22 installing DeLogger 4 See the Getting Started guide supplied with your dataTaker Windows NT, 2000, XP 235 INT (worksheet function) 256 integrity check 39 internal alarms 56 connections (in Extras Data Site) 38 internal alarms 183 Internal Cards (Tools command) 130 Internet publishing See publishing intranet 58, 229, 231 dened 229 publishing (local publishing) 230 versus report publishing 232 intranet publishing See publishing
invalid data and alarm test 215 global logging session settings 52, 53 setting chart window properties 90 setting form window properties 84 setting mimic window properties 103 setting text display screen properties 94 invalid data (virtual channel exceedency test) IPMT (worksheet function) 257 IRR (worksheet function) 257 ISBLANK (worksheet function) 258 ISERR (worksheet function) 258 ISERROR (worksheet function) 258 ISLOGICAL (worksheet function) 258 ISNA (worksheet function) 259 ISNONTEXT (worksheet function) 259 ISNUMBER (worksheet function) 259 ISO format 81, 106, 110, 117, 120 ISREF (worksheet function) 260 ISTEXT (worksheet function) 260 item (DDE) See DDE iteration Analysis > Calculation 121 Form > Calculation 82, 83 Spread > Calculation 111 iUser utility 207, 235
217
J
Job To Run On Hard Reset (dataTaker menu command) 68
K
keyboard shortcuts 239 F2 (connect) 38 F5 (data hub channels) summary table 239 59
L
Lantronix adaptor (for DT5/6xx network connection) 45 LED Indicators (Mimic command) 100 LEFT (worksheet function) 260 LEFTB (worksheet function) 260 LEN (worksheet function) 261 LENB (worksheet function) 261 LN (worksheet function) 261 Load DLP Text (Text > Entry Screen command) 95 Load Into External Spreadsheet (Analysis command) 117 Load Into External Spreadsheet (Spread command) 106 Load Session From Database (Analysis command) 116 Load Session From Database (Spread command) 105 Load Session From File (Analysis command) 116 Load Session From File (Spread command) 105 Locale Date/Time (Form > Format command) 81 location of new mimics 97 Lock (Mimic command) 103
UM-0070-A0
292
Lock Job (data hub option) 59, 211, 212 LOG (worksheet function) 261 LOG10 (worksheet function) 261 logging alarms alarm reports 199 setting default 52, 53 triggering actions 53 changed values only 53 channel logging mode 52, 53 data database 209 size and performance 227 errors error reports 199 setting default 52, 53 individual schedules 63 ON/OFF (Data Logging command) 63 session 40, 60 sessions 60 conguring 60 database connections 50 macros (for managing database channel logging sessions) 192 saved in admin database 209 status 63 ag 53 valid/invalid data 52, 53 LOOKUP (worksheet function) 262 LOWER (worksheet function) 262
Index
293
UM-0070-A0
Macro Builder (Fig.) 56, 181 macros action commands See actions macro commands CLEAR_CHART 189 CLOSE_WINDOW 189 CONNECT_PORT 184 CONNECT_SITE 184 DATATAKER_HALT 185 DATATAKER_LOG 185 DATATAKER_RUN 185 DELAY 195 DISCONNECT 185 Excel Delogger2 macro les 224 for commanding a dataTaker 185 for interacting with a user 194 for managing connections 184 for managing database channel logging sessions for managing projects 190 for managing windows 189 for unloading data from a dataTaker 187 GET_TEXT 194 GET_VALUE 194 HUB_SAVE 191 INCREMENT_SESSION_SUFFIX 193 Macro Builder 56, 181 MESSAGE_BOX 195 MESSAGE_LINE 195
192
miscellaneous 195 OPEN_WINDOW 189 PRINT_CHART 189 PROJECT_CLOSE 191 PROJECT_LOAD 190 PROJECT_SAVE 190 PUBLISH 190 SEND_FILE 186 SEND_PROGRAM 186 SEND_TEXT 186 SESSION 192 SESSION_START 192 SET_SESSION_NAME 193 SET_SESSION_SUFFIX 193 SHOW_WINDOW 190 UNLOAD_SITE 187 UNLOAD_SITE_DB 187 UNLOAD_SITE_FILE 188 UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FAST 188 WAIT 188 main window (project window) 136 See also windows manual integrity check 39 saves 208 Manual Integrity Check (command) 39 Manual Integrity Check (Connections command) MATCH (worksheet function) 263 MAX (worksheet function) 263 Memory Card (dataTaker menu command) 71 Memory Cards (Tools command) 130 menus Analysis menu 115 Chart menu 85 Conguration menu 51 Connections menu 38 dataTaker menu 63 Edit menu 34 File menu 21 Form menu 77 Help menu 135 Mimic menu 97 Program menu DT5/6xx 124 Program menu DT8xx 126 Reports menu 127 Spread menu 104 Taskbar menu 135 Text menu 91 Tools menu 130 View menu 37 Window menu 134 message display confirmation level 37, 167 MESSAGE_BOX macro 195 MESSAGE_LINE macro 195 MID (worksheet function) 264 MIDB (worksheet function) 264
Sym Num A B C D E F G H I J K L M N
39
O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
mimic location of new mimics 97 menu See menus Mimic Sym moving 97 nudging 97 Num nudge distance 97 A resizing 97 B selecting 97 window C See windows Mimic D MIN (worksheet function) 264 E MINUTE (worksheet function) 265 F MIRR (worksheet function) 265 MOD (worksheet function) 265 G model-specific H connections 40 replay les 40 I Modem Manager MM-01 221 J modems K Modem Manager MM-01 221 L modes follow mode (chart window) 86, 139 M MONTH (worksheet function) 266 N Month To Date (Reports > Alarms command) 127 O Month To Date (Reports > Errors command) 128 More Windows (Window command) 134 P moving mimic 97 Q MT (multi-thread) folder 76 R multiple channels in Excel (DDE) 225
OPEN_WINDOW macro 189 Options (Form > Object command) OR (worksheet function) 269
82
P
Page Setup (File command) 25 panels See mimics partially invalid data (virtual channel exceedency test) 217 partially-invalid data and alarm test 215 and resetting store channels 216 setting chart window properties 90 setting form window properties 84 setting mimic window properties 103 setting text display screen properties 94 Paste (Edit command) 34 Paste Values (Edit command) 34 Pattern (Analysis > Format command) 119 Pattern (Form > Format command) 80 Pattern (Spread > Format command) 110 Pause (Chart command) 85 Pause (Form command) 77 Pause (Mimic command) 101 Pause (Text > Display Screen command) 93 Percent % (Analysis > Format command) 120 Percent % (Form > Format command) 80 Percent % (Spread > Format command) 110 Performance (File command) 24 PI (worksheet function) 269 Picture (Mimic command) 101 Picture folder (clip art) 18, 101 Pie Meters (Mimic command) 98 placeholders (macro commands) 56 Play (Connections command) 40 play (replay) connection 40 PMT (worksheet function) 269 PPMT (worksheet function) 270 previous database logging session 57, 202 primary channels 212 Print (File command) 26 Print Preview (File command) 27 Print Setup (File command) 28 PRINT_CHART macro 189 PRODUCT (worksheet function) 270 Profile (dataTaker menu command) 73 program builder windows See windows program builder Program menu See menus Program project 13 folder 18, 22 master le (.dlw le) 22, 208, 209 and administration database 226 and AutoRun 179 window See windows
S T U V W X Y Z
N
NA (worksheet function) 266 Needle Meters (Mimic command) 98 new mimics, location 97 Next Analogue Channel 125 Next Digital Channel (DT5/6xx Program command) 125 Next HSC Channel (DT5/6xx Program command) 125 NOT (worksheet function) 266 Notepad (software) 53 NOW (worksheet function) 266 NPER (worksheet function) 267 NPV (worksheet function) 267 NT (Windows operating system) 235 nudging mimics 97 null field ("") 187, 188 number, serial 266
O
ODBC 199 ODD (worksheet function) 268 OFFSET (worksheet function) 268 OLE for Process Control (OPC) 233 OPC 233 Open (File command) 22 Open Text File (Text > Entry Screen command)
UM-0070-A0
95
294
window (main window) 136 Project Bar (View command) 37 Project Properties (File command) 23 project window See windows project PROJECT_CLOSE macro 191 PROJECT_LOAD macro 190 PROJECT_SAVE macro 190 projects macros for managing projects 190 prompt, DOS 207 PROPER (worksheet function) 270 Properties (Analysis command) 123 Properties (Chart command) 90 Properties (Connections command) 42 Properties (DT5/6xx Program command) 125 Properties (Form command) 84 Properties (Mimic command) 103 Properties (Spread command) 114 Properties (Text > Display Screen command) 94 Publish (Analysis command) 123 Publish (Chart command) 90 Publish (Form command) 84 Publish (Mimic command) 103 Publish (Spread command) 113 PUBLISH macro 190 publishing folder structure (Fig.) 230 Internet (WWW) 231 intranet (local) 230 PV (worksheet function) 271
Q
Query 202 Quit Unload (dataTaker menu command) 66
R
RAND (worksheet function) 271 RATE (worksheet function) 271 recalculation Analysis > Calculation 121 Form > Calculation 82 Spread > Calculation 111 synchronised update of calculated (virtual) channel 219 recent project files (list on File menu) 33 Redo (Edit command) 34 Regedit enabling alarm mail support 237 moding auto-answer modem action response delay 48 moding default web publishing folder locations moding OPC Server setup 234 setting mimic nudge distance 97 Register Product (File command) 33 REGISTER.ID (worksheet function) 272
230
Remove Page Break (Analysis command) 123 Remove Page Break (Form command) 84 Remove Page Break (Spread command) 113 Replace (Edit command) 35 REPLACE (worksheet function) 272 REPLACEB (worksheet function) 273 replay connection 40 control panel 41 data (Extras) 40 le Analysis > Load Session From File 116 as session 60 Extras 40 includes STATUS information 212 model-specic 40 Play command 40 Spread > Load Session From File 104, 115 unload to replay le 65 utilities (dlr2dlr.exe and dlr2txt.exe) 207 format (text window display screen) 92 session (Extras) 40 replay data displayed by mimics 97 reporting on 199 reports .rpt le extension 200 Database Reports (Reports command) 201 Database Reports command 57, 127, 129, 202 menu See menus Report overview (Fig.) 201 publishing in HTML format 232 running 199, 200 secondary 200 Reports (Configuration command) 57 REPT (worksheet function) 273 Reset (dataTaker menu command) 68 Reset High (Form command) 78 Reset Low (Form command) 78 resetting store virtual channels 216 resizing mimics 97 RIGHT (worksheet function) 273 RIGHTB (worksheet function) 273 rolling store virtual channels 216 Rotate (Chart command) 89 ROUND (worksheet function) 274 ROUNDDOWN (worksheet function) 274 ROUNDUP (worksheet function) 274 ROW (worksheet function) 275 ROWS (worksheet function) 275 rpt file (report file) 200 rulers, chart 140 enabling 86 Run (dataTaker menu command) 69 Run Card Program (dataTaker menu command) 72 running reports 199, 200
Index
295
UM-0070-A0
S
Save Project (File command) 23 Save Screen Buffer As (Text > Display Screen Sym command) 93 Save Text File (Text > Entry Screen command) 95 Num saving A automatic saves 208 manual saves 208 B scale group 87 C Scale Text Down (Chart command) 90 D Scale Text Down (Mimic command) 103 E Scale Text Up (Chart command) 90 Scale Text Up (Mimic command) 103 F Schedule (Reports > Log Files command) 128 G Schedule utility 196, 203 H ScheduleID (in ChannelName DDE item) 223 Scientific (Analysis > Format command) 120 I Scientific (Form > Format command) 80 J Scientific (Spread > Format command) 110 K screen buffer 93, 96 L text window display screen 91 M text window entry screen 94 N screen captures 239 O scripting (actions) 55 SEARCH (worksheet function) 275 P SEARCHB (worksheet function) 276 Q SECOND (worksheet function) 276 R secondary reports 200 Select All (Edit command) 36 S Select Channels (Chart command) 88 T selecting mimics 97 U Send Highlighted (Text > Entry Screen command) 95 Send Line (Text > Entry Screen command) 95 V Send Program (Text > Entry Screen command) 95 W Send To Back (Mimic > Arrange command) 102 X Send To Card On Connection (DT5/6xx Program command) 124 Y Send To Connection (DT5/6xx Program command) 124 Z Send To Connection And Save As RESET Job (DT8xx Program command) 126 SEND_FILE macro 186 SEND_PROGRAM macro 186 SEND_TEXT macro 186 serial number 266 server (DDE) See DDE service name See DDE SESSION macro 192 SESSION_START macro 192 sessions conguring 60 Load Session From Database into analysis window 116 into spreadsheed window 105 logging sessions 40, 60 versus unload session 60
UM-0070-A0
macros (for managing database channel logging sessions) 192 replay (Extras) 40 replay les as sessions 60 unload 64 unload sessions 61, 64, 66 Set Print Range From Selection (Analysis command) 122 Set Print Range From Selection (Form command) 83 Set Print Range From Selection (Spread command) 113 Set User Buttons (Text > Entry Screen command) 96 SET_SESSION_NAME macro 193 SET_SESSION_SUFFIX macro 193 shortcuts F2 (connect) 38 F5 (data hub channels) 59 summary table 239 Show Alarm Events (View command) 37 Show Error Events (View command) 37 Show Gridlines (Analysis command) 118 Show Gridlines (Form command) 78 Show Gridlines (Spread command) 108 Show Headers (Analysis command) 118 Show Headers (Form command) 78 Show Headers (Spread command) 108 Show Message Events (View command) 37 SHOW_WINDOW macro 190 SIGN (worksheet function) 276 SIN (worksheet function) 276 SINH (worksheet function) 277 site, data (Extras) 38 SiteAdmin utility 203 SiteName (in ChannelName DDE item) 223 slash character (in DDE ChannelName item) 223 slider, Confirmation Level 37, 167 SLN (worksheet function) 277 software Crystal Reports 199, 201 Engine 199 preferred version 202 dlr2dlr.exe replay le utility 207 dlr2txt.exe replay le utility 207 Excel and Delogger2 macro les 224 and VBA macros 224 as analysis window data destination 117 as DDE client 222, 224 as report tool 199 as spreadsheet window data destination 106 as spreadsheet window data source 104, 115 inserting DDE link text 225 similarity to Formula One Workbook Designer 138 Formula One Workbook Designer 138 FoxPro 203, 226 iUser utility 207, 235 Notepad 53 Regedit enabling alarm mail support 237 moding auto-answer modem action response delay 48 moding OPC Server setup 234
296
modifying default web publishing folder locations 230 setting mimic nudge distance 97 Schedule utility 196, 203 SiteAdmin utility 203 VBA 224, 225 Windows 2000 235 Windows NT 235 Windows XP 235 Word 53 WordPad 53 Sort (Analysis command) 121 Sort (Spread command) 112 sound, startup 55, 179 space character (in DDE messages) 223 splash screen, customizing 30 Splitter View (Text command) 96 spread menu See menus Spread spreadsheet window See windows spreadsheet SQRT (worksheet function) 277 startup sound 55, 179 state, workspace 32 STATUS dialog boxes 70 information saved in replay le and database session 212 STATUS10 24, 39, 212 STATUS11 212 STATUS14 24, 39, 212 status dialog boxes 70 ag 53 logging 63 Status (dataTaker menu command) 70 Status Bar (View command) 37 STDEV (worksheet function) 277 STDEVP (worksheet function) 277 store-type virtual channels 216 structure, web publishing folders 230 SUBSTITUTE (worksheet function) 278 SUM (worksheet function) 278 SUMIF (worksheet function) 278 SUMSQ (worksheet function) 279 SYD (worksheet function) 279 System (View > Toolbars command) 37 system tray icon 31
TEXT (worksheet function) 280 text menu See menus Text text window See windows text Tile Horizontal (Window command) 134 Tile Vertical (Window command) 134 Time (hh:mm:ss) (Analysis > Format command) 120 Time (hh:mm:ss) (Form > Format command) 81 Time (hh:mm:ss) (Spread > Format command) 110 TIME (worksheet function) 280 TIMEVALUE (worksheet function) 280 Today (Reports > Alarms command) 127 Today (Reports > Errors command) 128 TODAY (worksheet function) 280 toolbars actions sub-bar 171, 172 connections sub-bar 171, 172 creating 31 customizing 31 enabling tooltips 31 project bar 171 connections sub-bar ULAST 172 connections sub-bar and ULAST 172 Tools menu See menus tooltips, enabling on toolbars 31 topic (DDE) See DDE tray icon 31 triggering alarms 55, 182 TRIM (worksheet function) 280 TRUE (worksheet function) 281 TRUNC (worksheet function) 281 TYPE (worksheet function) 281
U
UDP (network connection) 45 ULAST (unload from end of last unload) 54, 64, 65 in connections sub-bar 172 in DT8xx status dialog box 70 in DT8xx unload dialog box 65 making project-specic 54 reported in connections sub-bar 172 tracking 54 Undo (Edit command) 34 undoing Text > Clear Entry Buffer 96 undo (Macro Builder command) 181 unload initiating 61 macros for unloading data 187 session 61 sessions 64, 66 to .csv le 65 to .dlr le 65
T
tabs (window), customizing 30 TAN (worksheet function) 279 TANH (worksheet function) 279 Taskbar menu See menus TCP/IP (network connection) 45 Temperature Meter (Mimic command) Test (dataTaker menu command) 71
99
UM-0070-A0
Index
297
ULAST (unload from end of last unload) 54, 64, 65 making project-specic 54 tracking 54 Unload (dataTaker menu command) 64 Sym unload files .dx8 and .dxu (Extras) 40 Num UNLOAD_SITE macro 187 A UNLOAD_SITE_DB macro 187 B UNLOAD_SITE_FILE macro 188 C UNLOAD_SITE_FILE_FAST macro 188 Update Chart (Analysis command) 117 D Update Chart (Spread command) 107 E Upgrade Firmware (dataTaker menu command) 76 F UPPER (worksheet function) 281 USDOLLAR (worksheet function) 282 G User Buttons (Text > Entry Screen command) 96 H utility software dlr2dlr.exe 207 I dlr2txt.exe 207 J iUser 207, 235 K Schedule 196, 203 SiteAdmin 203 L
W
WAIT macro 188 Web Publish (Configuration command) 58 web publishing See publishing Week To Date (Reports > Alarms command) 127 Week To Date (Reports > Errors command) 128 WEEKDAY (worksheet function) 284 Window menu See menus windows analysis 161 chart 139 data point symbols 87 rulers 140 enabling 86 scale group 87 document 14 event logs 167 message display conrmation level (slider) 37, 167 form 136 Formula One Workbook Designer 138 macros for managing windows 189 main window (project window) 13, 136 mimic 145 for realtime data 97 for replay data 97 overview (Fig.) 14, 15 program builder DT5/6xx 164 DT8xx 165 project 136 project window (main window) 13, 136 spreadsheet 149 chart area 151, 163 text 144 display screen commands 91 entry screen commands 94 Windows 2000 (operating system) 235 Windows NT (operating system) 235 Windows XP (operating system) 235 Word (software) 53 WordPad (software) 53 worksheet functions ABS 240 ACOS 240 ACOSH 240 ADDRESS 241 AND 241 ASC 241 ASIN 241 ASINH 242 ATAN 242 ATAN2 242 ATANH 242 AVERAGE 243 CALL 244
M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
V
valid data global logging session settings 52, 53 Validation Rule (Form command) 82 VALUE (worksheet function) 282 VAR (worksheet function) 282 VARP (worksheet function) 282 VBA (software) 224, 225 VDB (worksheet function) 283 View Events (View command) 37 View menu See menus View Toolbar (Analysis command) 118 View Toolbar (Chart command) 90 View Toolbar (DT5/6xx Program command) 125 View Toolbar (Form command) 79 View Toolbar (Mimic command) 103 View Toolbar (Spread command) 108 View Toolbar (Text > Display Screen command) 93 View Toolbar (Text > Entry Screen command) 96 virtual channels 212, 215 calculated channels 218 data hub 215 exceedency (test for PARTIALLY_INVALID or INVALID status) 217 store channels 216 resetting 216 rolling 216 VLOOKUP (worksheet function) 283
UM-0070-A0
298
CEILING 245 CHAR 245 CHOOSE 245 CLEAN 246 CODE 246 COLUMN 246 COLUMNS 246 CONCATENATE 246 COS 247 COSH 247 COUNT 247 COUNTA 247 COUNTIF 248 DATE 248 DATEVALUE 248 DAY 249 DAYS360 249 DB 250 DBCS 250 DDB 250 DOLLAR 251 ERROR.TYPE 251 EVEN 252 EXACT 252 EXP 252 FACT 252 FALSE 252 FIND 253 FINDB 253 FIXED 253 FLOOR 254 FV 254 HLOOKUP 254 HOUR 255 IF 255 INDEX 256 INDIRECT 256 INT 256 IPMT 257 IRR 257 ISBLANK 258 ISERR 258 ISERROR 258 ISLOGICAL 258 ISNA 259 ISNONTEXT 259 ISNUMBER 259 ISREF 260 ISTEXT 260 LEFT 260 LEFTB 260 LEN 261 LENB 261 LN 261 LOG 261 LOG10 261 LOOKUP 262 LOWER 262 MATCH 263 MAX 263 MID 264
MIDB 264 MIN 264 MINUTE 265 MIRR 265 MOD 265 MONTH 266 NA 266 NOT 266 NOW 266 NPER 267 NPV 267 ODD 268 OFFSET 268 OR 269 PI 269 PMT 269 PPMT 270 PRODUCT 270 PROPER 270 PV 271 RAND 271 RATE 271 REGISTER.ID 272 REPLACE 272 REPLACEB 273 REPT 273 RIGHT 273 RIGHTB 273 ROUND 274 ROUNDDOWN 274 ROUNDUP 274 ROW 275 ROWS 275 SEARCH 275 SEARCHB 276 SECOND 276 SIGN 276 SIN 276 SINH 277 SLN 277 SQRT 277 STDEV 277 STDEVP 277 SUBSTITUTE 278 SUM 278 SUMIF 278 SUMSQ 279 SYD 279 TAN 279 TANH 279 TEXT 280 TIME 280 TIMEVALUE 280 TODAY 280 TRIM 280 TRUE 281 TRUNC 281 TYPE 281 UPPER 281 USDOLLAR 282 VALUE 282
Index
299
UM-0070-A0
VAR 282 VARP 282 VDB 283 VLOOKUP 283 Sym WEEKDAY 284 YEAR 284 Num workspace state, customizing A
32
B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
X
XP (Windows operating system) 235 XY Chart (Chart command) 89
Y
YEAR (worksheet function) 284
UM-0070-A0
300
OFFICES DATATAKER
Head Office
Australia Melbourne dataTaker Pty Ltd 7 Seismic Court Rowville Victoria 3178 Tel: 03 9764 8600 + 613 9764 8600 Fax: 03 9764 8997 +613 9764 8997 Email: sales@dataTaker.com.au
Offices
United Kingdom dataTaker Ltd Shepreth Cambridgeshire SG8 6GB Tel: +44 (0) 1763 264780 Fax: +44 (0) 1763 262410 email: sales@dataTaker.co.uk United States of America dataTaker, Inc. 22961 Triton Way Suite E Laguna Hills CA 92653-1230 Tel: 1-800-9-LOGGER Tel: 949 452 0750 +1 949 452 0750 Fax: 949 452 1170 +1 949 452 1170 Email: sales@dataTaker.com
Worldwide Dealer Network

www.dataTaker.com
Your Local Dealer
www.dataTaker.com

Data Taker

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Data Taker

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

www.dataTaker.

...keeping an eye on reality

About this Users Manual

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A Menus, Windows and Toolbars

PART B Nuts & Bolts

9-6 9-7 9-8

APPENDIX 2 Worksheet Functions......................... 240

WHAT, WHEN, WHERE

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A Menus, Windows and Toolbars

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART B Nuts & Bolts

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

iUser Utility .................................................. 207 Replay File Utilities ........................................ 207

WHAT, WHEN, WHERE

APPENDIX 2 Worksheet Functions ......................... 240

Index ................................................ 285

PART A Menus, Windows and Toolbars

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars

THE BIG PICTURE

MAIN WINDOW (PROJECT WINDOW)

Activity indicators see page 170

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE

1-1 Main Window (Project Window)

Print Web publish

Print Trigger actions Web publish

Replay file (.dlr)

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars

Replay file (.dlr)

Internal connection File and database connections for historical data

Send program to the dataTaker

DeLogger document window types (sub-windows) 3 of 3 the two program builders

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE

1-2 Document Windows

VIEWING AND SAVING DATA

DYNAMIC DATA VIEWS

UNLOAD LOGGED DATA

See Initiating Unloads on page 61.

UNLOAD LOGGED DATA

dataTaker > Unload only See page 64.

Replay file (.dlr)

CSV file (.csv)

STATIC DATA VIEWS

Replay file (.dlr) Analysis window

Viewing and saving data

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars

PROJECTS, PROGRAMS, SCHEDULES AND CHANNELS

A channel can be scanned by more than one schedule.

Hierarchy: project >

program (job) >

CHAPTER 1: THE BIG PICTURE

1-4 Projects, Programs, Schedules and Channels

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro

PART A: Menus, Windows and Toolbars

DT5/6xx only DT8xx only

2-1 Menu Overview

Menu 7 changes according to which DeLogger window is front-most.

Page 126 Page 135

Users Manual DeLogger4 and DeLogger4 Pro